From b91e23910ae2f433757880fa1c7e7b4a66c586e6 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: mdw <mdw>
Date: Wed, 5 May 1999 19:23:46 +0000
Subject: [PATCH] Initial revision

---
 .skelrc       |    9 +
 COPYING       |  339 ++++
 COPYING.LIB   |  482 +++++
 INSTALL       |  176 ++
 Makefile.am   |   65 +
 aclocal.glob  | 1331 ++++++++++++++
 ansi2knr.1    |   19 +
 ansi2knr.c    |  439 +++++
 common.texi   |  329 ++++
 config.guess  |  740 ++++++++
 config.sub    |  939 ++++++++++
 configure.in  |   42 +
 elisp-comp    |   49 +
 findlinks.in  |  104 ++
 gpl.tex       |  459 +++++
 gpl.texi      |  398 +++++
 install-sh    |  250 +++
 lgpl.tex      |  577 ++++++
 lgpl.texi     |  549 ++++++
 mdate-sh      |   92 +
 mdwopt.c      |  785 +++++++++
 mdwopt.h      |  426 +++++
 missing       |  134 ++
 mkaclocal.in  |  178 ++
 mkinstalldirs |   40 +
 mklinks.in    |   85 +
 setup         |    7 +
 texinfo.tex   | 5462 +++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
 texinice.tex  |  122 ++
 txtlib.in     |  130 ++
 ylwrap        |  101 ++
 31 files changed, 14858 insertions(+)
 create mode 100644 .skelrc
 create mode 100644 COPYING
 create mode 100644 COPYING.LIB
 create mode 100644 INSTALL
 create mode 100644 Makefile.am
 create mode 100644 aclocal.glob
 create mode 100644 ansi2knr.1
 create mode 100644 ansi2knr.c
 create mode 100644 common.texi
 create mode 100755 config.guess
 create mode 100755 config.sub
 create mode 100644 configure.in
 create mode 100755 elisp-comp
 create mode 100755 findlinks.in
 create mode 100644 gpl.tex
 create mode 100644 gpl.texi
 create mode 100755 install-sh
 create mode 100644 lgpl.tex
 create mode 100644 lgpl.texi
 create mode 100755 mdate-sh
 create mode 100644 mdwopt.c
 create mode 100644 mdwopt.h
 create mode 100755 missing
 create mode 100755 mkaclocal.in
 create mode 100755 mkinstalldirs
 create mode 100755 mklinks.in
 create mode 100755 setup
 create mode 100644 texinfo.tex
 create mode 100644 texinice.tex
 create mode 100755 txtlib.in
 create mode 100755 ylwrap

diff --git a/.skelrc b/.skelrc
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..3b4e1994
--- /dev/null
+++ b/.skelrc
@@ -0,0 +1,9 @@
+;;; -*-emacs-lisp-*-
+
+(setq skel-alist
+      (append
+       '((author . "Mark Wooding")
+	 (full-title . "the Common Files Distribution (`common')")
+	 (Program . "`Common'")
+	 (program . "`common'"))
+       skel-alist))
diff --git a/COPYING b/COPYING
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..916d1f0f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/COPYING
@@ -0,0 +1,339 @@
+		    GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
+		       Version 2, June 1991
+
+ Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+ 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA
+ Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
+ of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
+
+			    Preamble
+
+  The licenses for most software are designed to take away your
+freedom to share and change it.  By contrast, the GNU General Public
+License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free
+software--to make sure the software is free for all its users.  This
+General Public License applies to most of the Free Software
+Foundation's software and to any other program whose authors commit to
+using it.  (Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by
+the GNU Library General Public License instead.)  You can apply it to
+your programs, too.
+
+  When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not
+price.  Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you
+have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for
+this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it
+if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it
+in new free programs; and that you know you can do these things.
+
+  To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid
+anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights.
+These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you
+distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it.
+
+  For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether
+gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that
+you have.  You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the
+source code.  And you must show them these terms so they know their
+rights.
+
+  We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and
+(2) offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy,
+distribute and/or modify the software.
+
+  Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make certain
+that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free
+software.  If the software is modified by someone else and passed on, we
+want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so
+that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original
+authors' reputations.
+
+  Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software
+patents.  We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free
+program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the
+program proprietary.  To prevent this, we have made it clear that any
+patent must be licensed for everyone's free use or not licensed at all.
+
+  The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and
+modification follow.
+
+		    GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
+   TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
+
+  0. This License applies to any program or other work which contains
+a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed
+under the terms of this General Public License.  The "Program", below,
+refers to any such program or work, and a "work based on the Program"
+means either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law:
+that is to say, a work containing the Program or a portion of it,
+either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated into another
+language.  (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in
+the term "modification".)  Each licensee is addressed as "you".
+
+Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not
+covered by this License; they are outside its scope.  The act of
+running the Program is not restricted, and the output from the Program
+is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the
+Program (independent of having been made by running the Program).
+Whether that is true depends on what the Program does.
+
+  1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program's
+source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you
+conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate
+copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the
+notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty;
+and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License
+along with the Program.
+
+You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and
+you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee.
+
+  2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion
+of it, thus forming a work based on the Program, and copy and
+distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1
+above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions:
+
+    a) You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices
+    stating that you changed the files and the date of any change.
+
+    b) You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in
+    whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or any
+    part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third
+    parties under the terms of this License.
+
+    c) If the modified program normally reads commands interactively
+    when run, you must cause it, when started running for such
+    interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display an
+    announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a
+    notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that you provide
+    a warranty) and that users may redistribute the program under
+    these conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy of this
+    License.  (Exception: if the Program itself is interactive but
+    does not normally print such an announcement, your work based on
+    the Program is not required to print an announcement.)
+
+These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole.  If
+identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Program,
+and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in
+themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those
+sections when you distribute them as separate works.  But when you
+distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based
+on the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of
+this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the
+entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it.
+
+Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest
+your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to
+exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or
+collective works based on the Program.
+
+In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program
+with the Program (or with a work based on the Program) on a volume of
+a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under
+the scope of this License.
+
+  3. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it,
+under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of
+Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following:
+
+    a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable
+    source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections
+    1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or,
+
+    b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three
+    years, to give any third party, for a charge no more than your
+    cost of physically performing source distribution, a complete
+    machine-readable copy of the corresponding source code, to be
+    distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium
+    customarily used for software interchange; or,
+
+    c) Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer
+    to distribute corresponding source code.  (This alternative is
+    allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you
+    received the program in object code or executable form with such
+    an offer, in accord with Subsection b above.)
+
+The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for
+making modifications to it.  For an executable work, complete source
+code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any
+associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to
+control compilation and installation of the executable.  However, as a
+special exception, the source code distributed need not include
+anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary
+form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the
+operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component
+itself accompanies the executable.
+
+If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering
+access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent
+access to copy the source code from the same place counts as
+distribution of the source code, even though third parties are not
+compelled to copy the source along with the object code.
+
+  4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program
+except as expressly provided under this License.  Any attempt
+otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is
+void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License.
+However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under
+this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such
+parties remain in full compliance.
+
+  5. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not
+signed it.  However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or
+distribute the Program or its derivative works.  These actions are
+prohibited by law if you do not accept this License.  Therefore, by
+modifying or distributing the Program (or any work based on the
+Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and
+all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying
+the Program or works based on it.
+
+  6. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the
+Program), the recipient automatically receives a license from the
+original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program subject to
+these terms and conditions.  You may not impose any further
+restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein.
+You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to
+this License.
+
+  7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent
+infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues),
+conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or
+otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not
+excuse you from the conditions of this License.  If you cannot
+distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this
+License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you
+may not distribute the Program at all.  For example, if a patent
+license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Program by
+all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then
+the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to
+refrain entirely from distribution of the Program.
+
+If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under
+any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to
+apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other
+circumstances.
+
+It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any
+patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any
+such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the
+integrity of the free software distribution system, which is
+implemented by public license practices.  Many people have made
+generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed
+through that system in reliance on consistent application of that
+system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing
+to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot
+impose that choice.
+
+This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to
+be a consequence of the rest of this License.
+
+  8. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in
+certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the
+original copyright holder who places the Program under this License
+may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding
+those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among
+countries not thus excluded.  In such case, this License incorporates
+the limitation as if written in the body of this License.
+
+  9. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions
+of the General Public License from time to time.  Such new versions will
+be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to
+address new problems or concerns.
+
+Each version is given a distinguishing version number.  If the Program
+specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and "any
+later version", you have the option of following the terms and conditions
+either of that version or of any later version published by the Free
+Software Foundation.  If the Program does not specify a version number of
+this License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software
+Foundation.
+
+  10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free
+programs whose distribution conditions are different, write to the author
+to ask for permission.  For software which is copyrighted by the Free
+Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes
+make exceptions for this.  Our decision will be guided by the two goals
+of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and
+of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally.
+
+			    NO WARRANTY
+
+  11. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY
+FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW.  EXCEPT WHEN
+OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES
+PROVIDE THE PROGRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED
+OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
+MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  THE ENTIRE RISK AS
+TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU.  SHOULD THE
+PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING,
+REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
+
+  12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING
+WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR
+REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES,
+INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING
+OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED
+TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY
+YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER
+PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE
+POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
+
+		     END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
+
+	Appendix: How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs
+
+  If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest
+possible use to the public, the best way to achieve this is to make it
+free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms.
+
+  To do so, attach the following notices to the program.  It is safest
+to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively
+convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least
+the "copyright" line and a pointer to where the full notice is found.
+
+    <one line to give the program's name and a brief idea of what it does.>
+    Copyright (C) 19yy  <name of author>
+
+    This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
+    it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
+    the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
+    (at your option) any later version.
+
+    This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+    but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+    MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the
+    GNU General Public License for more details.
+
+    You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+    along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
+    Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA
+
+Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.
+
+If the program is interactive, make it output a short notice like this
+when it starts in an interactive mode:
+
+    Gnomovision version 69, Copyright (C) 19yy name of author
+    Gnomovision comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details type `show w'.
+    This is free software, and you are welcome to redistribute it
+    under certain conditions; type `show c' for details.
+
+The hypothetical commands `show w' and `show c' should show the appropriate
+parts of the General Public License.  Of course, the commands you use may
+be called something other than `show w' and `show c'; they could even be
+mouse-clicks or menu items--whatever suits your program.
+
+You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your
+school, if any, to sign a "copyright disclaimer" for the program, if
+necessary.  Here is a sample; alter the names:
+
+  Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the program
+  `Gnomovision' (which makes passes at compilers) written by James Hacker.
+
+  <signature of Ty Coon>, 1 April 1989
+  Ty Coon, President of Vice
+
+This General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into
+proprietary programs.  If your program is a subroutine library, you may
+consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with the
+library.  If this is what you want to do, use the GNU Library General
+Public License instead of this License.
diff --git a/COPYING.LIB b/COPYING.LIB
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..161a3d1d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/COPYING.LIB
@@ -0,0 +1,482 @@
+		  GNU LIBRARY GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
+		       Version 2, June 1991
+
+ Copyright (C) 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+ 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA
+ Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
+ of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
+
+[This is the first released version of the library GPL.  It is
+ numbered 2 because it goes with version 2 of the ordinary GPL.]
+
+			    Preamble
+
+  The licenses for most software are designed to take away your
+freedom to share and change it.  By contrast, the GNU General Public
+Licenses are intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change
+free software--to make sure the software is free for all its users.
+
+  This license, the Library General Public License, applies to some
+specially designated Free Software Foundation software, and to any
+other libraries whose authors decide to use it.  You can use it for
+your libraries, too.
+
+  When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not
+price.  Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you
+have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for
+this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it
+if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it
+in new free programs; and that you know you can do these things.
+
+  To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid
+anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights.
+These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if
+you distribute copies of the library, or if you modify it.
+
+  For example, if you distribute copies of the library, whether gratis
+or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that we gave
+you.  You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source
+code.  If you link a program with the library, you must provide
+complete object files to the recipients so that they can relink them
+with the library, after making changes to the library and recompiling
+it.  And you must show them these terms so they know their rights.
+
+  Our method of protecting your rights has two steps: (1) copyright
+the library, and (2) offer you this license which gives you legal
+permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the library.
+
+  Also, for each distributor's protection, we want to make certain
+that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free
+library.  If the library is modified by someone else and passed on, we
+want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original
+version, so that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on
+the original authors' reputations.
+
+  Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software
+patents.  We wish to avoid the danger that companies distributing free
+software will individually obtain patent licenses, thus in effect
+transforming the program into proprietary software.  To prevent this,
+we have made it clear that any patent must be licensed for everyone's
+free use or not licensed at all.
+
+  Most GNU software, including some libraries, is covered by the ordinary
+GNU General Public License, which was designed for utility programs.  This
+license, the GNU Library General Public License, applies to certain
+designated libraries.  This license is quite different from the ordinary
+one; be sure to read it in full, and don't assume that anything in it is
+the same as in the ordinary license.
+
+  The reason we have a separate public license for some libraries is that
+they blur the distinction we usually make between modifying or adding to a
+program and simply using it.  Linking a program with a library, without
+changing the library, is in some sense simply using the library, and is
+analogous to running a utility program or application program.  However, in
+a textual and legal sense, the linked executable is a combined work, a
+derivative of the original library, and the ordinary General Public License
+treats it as such.
+
+  Because of this blurred distinction, using the ordinary General
+Public License for libraries did not effectively promote software
+sharing, because most developers did not use the libraries.  We
+concluded that weaker conditions might promote sharing better.
+
+  However, unrestricted linking of non-free programs would deprive the
+users of those programs of all benefit from the free status of the
+libraries themselves.  This Library General Public License is intended to
+permit developers of non-free programs to use free libraries, while
+preserving your freedom as a user of such programs to change the free
+libraries that are incorporated in them.  (We have not seen how to achieve
+this as regards changes in header files, but we have achieved it as regards
+changes in the actual functions of the Library.)  The hope is that this
+will lead to faster development of free libraries.
+
+  The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and
+modification follow.  Pay close attention to the difference between a
+"work based on the library" and a "work that uses the library".  The
+former contains code derived from the library, while the latter only
+works together with the library.
+
+  Note that it is possible for a library to be covered by the ordinary
+General Public License rather than by this special one.
+
+		  GNU LIBRARY GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
+   TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
+
+  0. This License Agreement applies to any software library which
+contains a notice placed by the copyright holder or other authorized
+party saying it may be distributed under the terms of this Library
+General Public License (also called "this License").  Each licensee is
+addressed as "you".
+
+  A "library" means a collection of software functions and/or data
+prepared so as to be conveniently linked with application programs
+(which use some of those functions and data) to form executables.
+
+  The "Library", below, refers to any such software library or work
+which has been distributed under these terms.  A "work based on the
+Library" means either the Library or any derivative work under
+copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Library or a
+portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated
+straightforwardly into another language.  (Hereinafter, translation is
+included without limitation in the term "modification".)
+
+  "Source code" for a work means the preferred form of the work for
+making modifications to it.  For a library, complete source code means
+all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any associated
+interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control compilation
+and installation of the library.
+
+  Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not
+covered by this License; they are outside its scope.  The act of
+running a program using the Library is not restricted, and output from
+such a program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based
+on the Library (independent of the use of the Library in a tool for
+writing it).  Whether that is true depends on what the Library does
+and what the program that uses the Library does.
+  
+  1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Library's
+complete source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that
+you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an
+appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact
+all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any
+warranty; and distribute a copy of this License along with the
+Library.
+
+  You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy,
+and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a
+fee.
+
+  2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Library or any portion
+of it, thus forming a work based on the Library, and copy and
+distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1
+above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions:
+
+    a) The modified work must itself be a software library.
+
+    b) You must cause the files modified to carry prominent notices
+    stating that you changed the files and the date of any change.
+
+    c) You must cause the whole of the work to be licensed at no
+    charge to all third parties under the terms of this License.
+
+    d) If a facility in the modified Library refers to a function or a
+    table of data to be supplied by an application program that uses
+    the facility, other than as an argument passed when the facility
+    is invoked, then you must make a good faith effort to ensure that,
+    in the event an application does not supply such function or
+    table, the facility still operates, and performs whatever part of
+    its purpose remains meaningful.
+
+    (For example, a function in a library to compute square roots has
+    a purpose that is entirely well-defined independent of the
+    application.  Therefore, Subsection 2d requires that any
+    application-supplied function or table used by this function must
+    be optional: if the application does not supply it, the square
+    root function must still compute square roots.)
+
+These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole.  If
+identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Library,
+and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in
+themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those
+sections when you distribute them as separate works.  But when you
+distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based
+on the Library, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of
+this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the
+entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote
+it.
+
+Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest
+your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to
+exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or
+collective works based on the Library.
+
+In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Library
+with the Library (or with a work based on the Library) on a volume of
+a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under
+the scope of this License.
+
+  3. You may opt to apply the terms of the ordinary GNU General Public
+License instead of this License to a given copy of the Library.  To do
+this, you must alter all the notices that refer to this License, so
+that they refer to the ordinary GNU General Public License, version 2,
+instead of to this License.  (If a newer version than version 2 of the
+ordinary GNU General Public License has appeared, then you can specify
+that version instead if you wish.)  Do not make any other change in
+these notices.
+
+  Once this change is made in a given copy, it is irreversible for
+that copy, so the ordinary GNU General Public License applies to all
+subsequent copies and derivative works made from that copy.
+
+  This option is useful when you wish to copy part of the code of
+the Library into a program that is not a library.
+
+  4. You may copy and distribute the Library (or a portion or
+derivative of it, under Section 2) in object code or executable form
+under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you accompany
+it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code, which
+must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a
+medium customarily used for software interchange.
+
+  If distribution of object code is made by offering access to copy
+from a designated place, then offering equivalent access to copy the
+source code from the same place satisfies the requirement to
+distribute the source code, even though third parties are not
+compelled to copy the source along with the object code.
+
+  5. A program that contains no derivative of any portion of the
+Library, but is designed to work with the Library by being compiled or
+linked with it, is called a "work that uses the Library".  Such a
+work, in isolation, is not a derivative work of the Library, and
+therefore falls outside the scope of this License.
+
+  However, linking a "work that uses the Library" with the Library
+creates an executable that is a derivative of the Library (because it
+contains portions of the Library), rather than a "work that uses the
+library".  The executable is therefore covered by this License.
+Section 6 states terms for distribution of such executables.
+
+  When a "work that uses the Library" uses material from a header file
+that is part of the Library, the object code for the work may be a
+derivative work of the Library even though the source code is not.
+Whether this is true is especially significant if the work can be
+linked without the Library, or if the work is itself a library.  The
+threshold for this to be true is not precisely defined by law.
+
+  If such an object file uses only numerical parameters, data
+structure layouts and accessors, and small macros and small inline
+functions (ten lines or less in length), then the use of the object
+file is unrestricted, regardless of whether it is legally a derivative
+work.  (Executables containing this object code plus portions of the
+Library will still fall under Section 6.)
+
+  Otherwise, if the work is a derivative of the Library, you may
+distribute the object code for the work under the terms of Section 6.
+Any executables containing that work also fall under Section 6,
+whether or not they are linked directly with the Library itself.
+
+  6. As an exception to the Sections above, you may also compile or
+link a "work that uses the Library" with the Library to produce a
+work containing portions of the Library, and distribute that work
+under terms of your choice, provided that the terms permit
+modification of the work for the customer's own use and reverse
+engineering for debugging such modifications.
+
+  You must give prominent notice with each copy of the work that the
+Library is used in it and that the Library and its use are covered by
+this License.  You must supply a copy of this License.  If the work
+during execution displays copyright notices, you must include the
+copyright notice for the Library among them, as well as a reference
+directing the user to the copy of this License.  Also, you must do one
+of these things:
+
+    a) Accompany the work with the complete corresponding
+    machine-readable source code for the Library including whatever
+    changes were used in the work (which must be distributed under
+    Sections 1 and 2 above); and, if the work is an executable linked
+    with the Library, with the complete machine-readable "work that
+    uses the Library", as object code and/or source code, so that the
+    user can modify the Library and then relink to produce a modified
+    executable containing the modified Library.  (It is understood
+    that the user who changes the contents of definitions files in the
+    Library will not necessarily be able to recompile the application
+    to use the modified definitions.)
+
+    b) Accompany the work with a written offer, valid for at
+    least three years, to give the same user the materials
+    specified in Subsection 6a, above, for a charge no more
+    than the cost of performing this distribution.
+
+    c) If distribution of the work is made by offering access to copy
+    from a designated place, offer equivalent access to copy the above
+    specified materials from the same place.
+
+    d) Verify that the user has already received a copy of these
+    materials or that you have already sent this user a copy.
+
+  For an executable, the required form of the "work that uses the
+Library" must include any data and utility programs needed for
+reproducing the executable from it.  However, as a special exception,
+the source code distributed need not include anything that is normally
+distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major
+components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on
+which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies
+the executable.
+
+  It may happen that this requirement contradicts the license
+restrictions of other proprietary libraries that do not normally
+accompany the operating system.  Such a contradiction means you cannot
+use both them and the Library together in an executable that you
+distribute.
+
+  7. You may place library facilities that are a work based on the
+Library side-by-side in a single library together with other library
+facilities not covered by this License, and distribute such a combined
+library, provided that the separate distribution of the work based on
+the Library and of the other library facilities is otherwise
+permitted, and provided that you do these two things:
+
+    a) Accompany the combined library with a copy of the same work
+    based on the Library, uncombined with any other library
+    facilities.  This must be distributed under the terms of the
+    Sections above.
+
+    b) Give prominent notice with the combined library of the fact
+    that part of it is a work based on the Library, and explaining
+    where to find the accompanying uncombined form of the same work.
+
+  8. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute
+the Library except as expressly provided under this License.  Any
+attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or
+distribute the Library is void, and will automatically terminate your
+rights under this License.  However, parties who have received copies,
+or rights, from you under this License will not have their licenses
+terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance.
+
+  9. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not
+signed it.  However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or
+distribute the Library or its derivative works.  These actions are
+prohibited by law if you do not accept this License.  Therefore, by
+modifying or distributing the Library (or any work based on the
+Library), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and
+all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying
+the Library or works based on it.
+
+  10. Each time you redistribute the Library (or any work based on the
+Library), the recipient automatically receives a license from the
+original licensor to copy, distribute, link with or modify the Library
+subject to these terms and conditions.  You may not impose any further
+restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein.
+You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to
+this License.
+
+  11. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent
+infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues),
+conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or
+otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not
+excuse you from the conditions of this License.  If you cannot
+distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this
+License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you
+may not distribute the Library at all.  For example, if a patent
+license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Library by
+all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then
+the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to
+refrain entirely from distribution of the Library.
+
+If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any
+particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to apply,
+and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances.
+
+It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any
+patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any
+such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the
+integrity of the free software distribution system which is
+implemented by public license practices.  Many people have made
+generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed
+through that system in reliance on consistent application of that
+system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing
+to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot
+impose that choice.
+
+This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to
+be a consequence of the rest of this License.
+
+  12. If the distribution and/or use of the Library is restricted in
+certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the
+original copyright holder who places the Library under this License may add
+an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries,
+so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus
+excluded.  In such case, this License incorporates the limitation as if
+written in the body of this License.
+
+  13. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new
+versions of the Library General Public License from time to time.
+Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version,
+but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns.
+
+Each version is given a distinguishing version number.  If the Library
+specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and
+"any later version", you have the option of following the terms and
+conditions either of that version or of any later version published by
+the Free Software Foundation.  If the Library does not specify a
+license version number, you may choose any version ever published by
+the Free Software Foundation.
+
+  14. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Library into other free
+programs whose distribution conditions are incompatible with these,
+write to the author to ask for permission.  For software which is
+copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation, write to the Free
+Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this.  Our
+decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status
+of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing
+and reuse of software generally.
+
+			    NO WARRANTY
+
+  15. BECAUSE THE LIBRARY IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO
+WARRANTY FOR THE LIBRARY, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW.
+EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR
+OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE LIBRARY "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY
+KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
+IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
+PURPOSE.  THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE
+LIBRARY IS WITH YOU.  SHOULD THE LIBRARY PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME
+THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
+
+  16. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN
+WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY
+AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE LIBRARY AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU
+FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR
+CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE
+LIBRARY (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING
+RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A
+FAILURE OF THE LIBRARY TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER SOFTWARE), EVEN IF
+SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
+DAMAGES.
+
+		     END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
+
+     Appendix: How to Apply These Terms to Your New Libraries
+
+  If you develop a new library, and you want it to be of the greatest
+possible use to the public, we recommend making it free software that
+everyone can redistribute and change.  You can do so by permitting
+redistribution under these terms (or, alternatively, under the terms of the
+ordinary General Public License).
+
+  To apply these terms, attach the following notices to the library.  It is
+safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively
+convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least the
+"copyright" line and a pointer to where the full notice is found.
+
+    <one line to give the library's name and a brief idea of what it does.>
+    Copyright (C) <year>  <name of author>
+
+    This library is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+    modify it under the terms of the GNU Library General Public
+    License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+    version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+
+    This library is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+    but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+    MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+    Library General Public License for more details.
+
+    You should have received a copy of the GNU Library General Public
+    License along with this library; if not, write to the Free
+    Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston,
+    MA 02111-1307, USA
+
+Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.
+
+You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your
+school, if any, to sign a "copyright disclaimer" for the library, if
+necessary.  Here is a sample; alter the names:
+
+  Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the
+  library `Frob' (a library for tweaking knobs) written by James Random Hacker.
+
+  <signature of Ty Coon>, 1 April 1990
+  Ty Coon, President of Vice
+
+That's all there is to it!
diff --git a/INSTALL b/INSTALL
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..3b50ea95
--- /dev/null
+++ b/INSTALL
@@ -0,0 +1,176 @@
+Basic Installation
+==================
+
+   These are generic installation instructions.
+
+   The `configure' shell script attempts to guess correct values for
+various system-dependent variables used during compilation.  It uses
+those values to create a `Makefile' in each directory of the package.
+It may also create one or more `.h' files containing system-dependent
+definitions.  Finally, it creates a shell script `config.status' that
+you can run in the future to recreate the current configuration, a file
+`config.cache' that saves the results of its tests to speed up
+reconfiguring, and a file `config.log' containing compiler output
+(useful mainly for debugging `configure').
+
+   If you need to do unusual things to compile the package, please try
+to figure out how `configure' could check whether to do them, and mail
+diffs or instructions to the address given in the `README' so they can
+be considered for the next release.  If at some point `config.cache'
+contains results you don't want to keep, you may remove or edit it.
+
+   The file `configure.in' is used to create `configure' by a program
+called `autoconf'.  You only need `configure.in' if you want to change
+it or regenerate `configure' using a newer version of `autoconf'.
+
+The simplest way to compile this package is:
+
+  1. `cd' to the directory containing the package's source code and type
+     `./configure' to configure the package for your system.  If you're
+     using `csh' on an old version of System V, you might need to type
+     `sh ./configure' instead to prevent `csh' from trying to execute
+     `configure' itself.
+
+     Running `configure' takes a while.  While running, it prints some
+     messages telling which features it is checking for.
+
+  2. Type `make' to compile the package.
+
+  3. Optionally, type `make check' to run any self-tests that come with
+     the package.
+
+  4. Type `make install' to install the programs and any data files and
+     documentation.
+
+  5. You can remove the program binaries and object files from the
+     source code directory by typing `make clean'.  To also remove the
+     files that `configure' created (so you can compile the package for
+     a different kind of computer), type `make distclean'.  There is
+     also a `make maintainer-clean' target, but that is intended mainly
+     for the package's developers.  If you use it, you may have to get
+     all sorts of other programs in order to regenerate files that came
+     with the distribution.
+
+Compilers and Options
+=====================
+
+   Some systems require unusual options for compilation or linking that
+the `configure' script does not know about.  You can give `configure'
+initial values for variables by setting them in the environment.  Using
+a Bourne-compatible shell, you can do that on the command line like
+this:
+     CC=c89 CFLAGS=-O2 LIBS=-lposix ./configure
+
+Or on systems that have the `env' program, you can do it like this:
+     env CPPFLAGS=-I/usr/local/include LDFLAGS=-s ./configure
+
+Compiling For Multiple Architectures
+====================================
+
+   You can compile the package for more than one kind of computer at the
+same time, by placing the object files for each architecture in their
+own directory.  To do this, you must use a version of `make' that
+supports the `VPATH' variable, such as GNU `make'.  `cd' to the
+directory where you want the object files and executables to go and run
+the `configure' script.  `configure' automatically checks for the
+source code in the directory that `configure' is in and in `..'.
+
+   If you have to use a `make' that does not supports the `VPATH'
+variable, you have to compile the package for one architecture at a time
+in the source code directory.  After you have installed the package for
+one architecture, use `make distclean' before reconfiguring for another
+architecture.
+
+Installation Names
+==================
+
+   By default, `make install' will install the package's files in
+`/usr/local/bin', `/usr/local/man', etc.  You can specify an
+installation prefix other than `/usr/local' by giving `configure' the
+option `--prefix=PATH'.
+
+   You can specify separate installation prefixes for
+architecture-specific files and architecture-independent files.  If you
+give `configure' the option `--exec-prefix=PATH', the package will use
+PATH as the prefix for installing programs and libraries.
+Documentation and other data files will still use the regular prefix.
+
+   If the package supports it, you can cause programs to be installed
+with an extra prefix or suffix on their names by giving `configure' the
+option `--program-prefix=PREFIX' or `--program-suffix=SUFFIX'.
+
+Optional Features
+=================
+
+   Some packages pay attention to `--enable-FEATURE' options to
+`configure', where FEATURE indicates an optional part of the package.
+They may also pay attention to `--with-PACKAGE' options, where PACKAGE
+is something like `gnu-as' or `x' (for the X Window System).  The
+`README' should mention any `--enable-' and `--with-' options that the
+package recognizes.
+
+   For packages that use the X Window System, `configure' can usually
+find the X include and library files automatically, but if it doesn't,
+you can use the `configure' options `--x-includes=DIR' and
+`--x-libraries=DIR' to specify their locations.
+
+Specifying the System Type
+==========================
+
+   There may be some features `configure' can not figure out
+automatically, but needs to determine by the type of host the package
+will run on.  Usually `configure' can figure that out, but if it prints
+a message saying it can not guess the host type, give it the
+`--host=TYPE' option.  TYPE can either be a short name for the system
+type, such as `sun4', or a canonical name with three fields:
+     CPU-COMPANY-SYSTEM
+
+See the file `config.sub' for the possible values of each field.  If
+`config.sub' isn't included in this package, then this package doesn't
+need to know the host type.
+
+   If you are building compiler tools for cross-compiling, you can also
+use the `--target=TYPE' option to select the type of system they will
+produce code for and the `--build=TYPE' option to select the type of
+system on which you are compiling the package.
+
+Sharing Defaults
+================
+
+   If you want to set default values for `configure' scripts to share,
+you can create a site shell script called `config.site' that gives
+default values for variables like `CC', `cache_file', and `prefix'.
+`configure' looks for `PREFIX/share/config.site' if it exists, then
+`PREFIX/etc/config.site' if it exists.  Or, you can set the
+`CONFIG_SITE' environment variable to the location of the site script.
+A warning: not all `configure' scripts look for a site script.
+
+Operation Controls
+==================
+
+   `configure' recognizes the following options to control how it
+operates.
+
+`--cache-file=FILE'
+     Use and save the results of the tests in FILE instead of
+     `./config.cache'.  Set FILE to `/dev/null' to disable caching, for
+     debugging `configure'.
+
+`--help'
+     Print a summary of the options to `configure', and exit.
+
+`--quiet'
+`--silent'
+`-q'
+     Do not print messages saying which checks are being made.
+
+`--srcdir=DIR'
+     Look for the package's source code in directory DIR.  Usually
+     `configure' can determine that directory automatically.
+
+`--version'
+     Print the version of Autoconf used to generate the `configure'
+     script, and exit.
+
+`configure' also accepts some other, not widely useful, options.
+
diff --git a/Makefile.am b/Makefile.am
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..28ed467c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Makefile.am
@@ -0,0 +1,65 @@
+## Process this file with Automake to generate `Makefile.in'
+## -*-Makefile-*-
+##
+## $Id: Makefile.am,v 1.1 1999/05/05 19:23:47 mdw Exp $
+##
+## Building the distribution
+##
+## (c) 1997 Mark Wooding
+##
+
+##----- Licensing notice ----------------------------------------------------
+##
+## This file is part of the Common Files Distribution (`common')
+## 
+## `Common' is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
+## it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
+## the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
+## (at your option) any later version.
+## 
+## `Common' is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+## but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+## MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the
+## GNU General Public License for more details.
+## 
+## You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+## along with `common'; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation,
+## Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.
+
+##----- Revision history ----------------------------------------------------
+##
+## $Log: Makefile.am,v $
+## Revision 1.1  1999/05/05 19:23:47  mdw
+## Initial revision
+##
+
+## --- Options ---
+
+AUTOMAKE_OPTIONS = foreign
+
+## --- What needs building ---
+
+bin_SCRIPTS = mklinks findlinks txtlib mkaclocal
+
+## --- Files to install in the repository ---
+
+pkgdata_DATA = \
+	COPYING COPYING.LIB INSTALL \
+	ansi2knr.1 ansi2knr.c \
+	gpl.tex lgpl.tex gpl.texi lgpl.texi texinfo.tex texinice.tex \
+	aclocal.glob \
+	mdwopt.c mdwopt.h
+
+EXTRA_DIST = $(pkgdata_DATA)
+
+pkgdata_SCRIPTS = \
+	config.guess config.sub elisp-comp install-sh \
+	mdate-sh missing  mkinstalldirs ylwrap
+
+## --- Documentation ---
+
+info_TEXINFOS = common.texi
+
+## --- Cleaning up ---
+
+CLEANFILES = $(bin_SCRIPTS)
diff --git a/aclocal.glob b/aclocal.glob
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..cf5334f0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/aclocal.glob
@@ -0,0 +1,1331 @@
+dnl -*-fundamental-*-					  *@--GLOB-HEADER--@*
+dnl
+dnl $Id: aclocal.glob,v 1.1 1999/05/05 19:23:47 mdw Exp $
+dnl
+dnl Common library of autoconf macros
+dnl
+dnl (c) 1997 Mark Wooding, except for macros and documentation where noted.
+dnl
+
+dnl----- Licensing notice ---------------------------------------------------
+dnl
+dnl This file is part of the Common Files Distribution (`common')
+dnl 
+dnl `Common' is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
+dnl it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
+dnl the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
+dnl (at your option) any later version.
+dnl 
+dnl `Common' is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+dnl but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+dnl MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the
+dnl GNU General Public License for more details.
+dnl 
+dnl You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+dnl along with `common'; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation,
+dnl Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.
+
+dnl----- Revision history ---------------------------------------------------
+dnl
+dnl $Log: aclocal.glob,v $
+dnl Revision 1.1  1999/05/05 19:23:47  mdw
+dnl Initial revision
+dnl
+
+dnl----- Common files distribution --------------------------- *@--NOTICE--@*
+dnl
+dnl $Id: aclocal.glob,v 1.1 1999/05/05 19:23:47 mdw Exp $
+
+dnl --- *@-AC_PROG_CC_STDC-@* ---
+dnl
+dnl Author:	Franc,ois Pinard
+dnl
+dnl Synopsis:	AC_PROG_CC_STDC
+dnl
+dnl Arguments:	---
+dnl
+dnl Use:	If the C compiler in not in ANSI C mode by default, try to
+dnl		add an option to output variable `CC' to make it so.  This
+dnl		macro tries various options that select ANSI C on some system
+dnl		or another.  It considers the compiler to be in ANSI C mode
+dnl		if it defines `__STDC__' to 1 and handles function prototypes
+dnl		correctly.
+dnl
+dnl		If you use this macro, you should check after calling it
+dnl		whether the C compiler has been set to accept ANSI C; if not,
+dnl		the shell variable `ac_cv_prog_cc_stdc' is set to `no'.  If
+dnl		you wrote your source code in ANSI C, you can make an
+dnl		un-ANSIfied copy of it by using the program `ansi2knr', which
+dnl		comes with Ghostscript.
+dnl
+dnl					(documentation by Franc,ois Pinard)
+
+AC_DEFUN(AM_PROG_CC_STDC,
+[AC_REQUIRE([AC_PROG_CC])
+AC_BEFORE([$0], [AC_C_INLINE])
+AC_BEFORE([$0], [AC_C_CONST])
+AC_MSG_CHECKING(for ${CC-cc} option to accept ANSI C)
+AC_CACHE_VAL(am_cv_prog_cc_stdc,
+[am_cv_prog_cc_stdc=no
+ac_save_CC="$CC"
+# Don't try gcc -ansi; that turns off useful extensions and
+# breaks some systems' header files.
+# AIX                   -qlanglvl=ansi
+# Ultrix and OSF/1      -std1
+# HP-UX                 -Aa -D_HPUX_SOURCE
+# SVR4                  -Xc -D__EXTENSIONS__
+for ac_arg in "" -qlanglvl=ansi -std1 "-Aa -D_HPUX_SOURCE" "-Xc -D__EXTENSIONS__"
+do
+  CC="$ac_save_CC $ac_arg"
+  AC_TRY_COMPILE(
+[#if !defined(__STDC__) || __STDC__ != 1
+choke me
+#endif
+/* DYNIX/ptx V4.1.3 can't compile sys/stat.h with -Xc -D__EXTENSIONS__. */
+#ifdef _SEQUENT_
+# include <sys/types.h>
+# include <sys/stat.h>
+#endif
+], [
+int test (int i, double x);
+struct s1 {int (*f) (int a);};
+struct s2 {int (*f) (double a);};],
+[am_cv_prog_cc_stdc="$ac_arg"; break])
+done
+CC="$ac_save_CC"
+])
+if test -z "$am_cv_prog_cc_stdc"; then
+  AC_MSG_RESULT([none needed])
+else
+  AC_MSG_RESULT($am_cv_prog_cc_stdc)
+fi
+case "x$am_cv_prog_cc_stdc" in
+  x|xno) ;;
+  *) CC="$CC $am_cv_prog_cc_stdc" ;;
+esac
+])
+
+dnl----- AutoMake macros ------------------------------------- *@--IGNORE--@*
+
+dnl --- *@-AM_CONDITIONAL-@* ---
+dnl
+dnl Author:	Unknown
+dnl
+dnl Synopsis:	AM_CONDITIONAL(NAME, TEST)
+dnl
+dnl Arguments:	NAME = name of the conditional
+dnl		TEST = a shell list to execute
+dnl
+dnl Use:	Allows conditional sections in Makefiles.
+
+AC_DEFUN(AM_CONDITIONAL,
+[AC_SUBST($1_TRUE)
+AC_SUBST($1_FALSE)
+if $2; then
+  $1_TRUE=
+  $1_FALSE='#'
+else
+  $1_TRUE='#'
+  $1_FALSE=
+fi])
+
+dnl --- *@-AM_CYGWIN32-@* ---
+dnl
+dnl Author:	Cygnus (I guess)
+dnl
+dnl Synopsis:	AM_CYGWIN32
+dnl
+dnl Arguments:	---
+dnl
+dnl Use:	Check to see if we're running under Cygwin32, without using
+dnl		AC_CANONICAL_*.  If so, set output variable EXEEXT to
+dnl		".exe".  Otherwise set it to "".
+
+dnl AM_CYGWIN32()
+dnl You might think we can do this by checking for a cygwin32-specific
+dnl cpp define.  We can't, because cross-compilers that target
+dnl cygwin32 don't use the .exe suffix.  I don't know why.
+AC_DEFUN(AM_CYGWIN32,
+[AC_CACHE_CHECK(for Cygwin32 environment, am_cv_cygwin32,
+[cat > conftest.$ac_ext << 'EOF'
+int main () {
+/* Nothing.  */
+return 0; }
+EOF
+if AC_TRY_EVAL(ac_link) && test -s conftest.exe; then
+   am_cv_cygwin32=yes
+else
+   am_cv_cygwin32=no
+fi
+rm -f conftest*])
+EXEEXT=
+test "$am_cv_cygwin32" = yes && EXEEXT=.exe
+AC_SUBST(EXEEXT)])
+
+dnl --- *@-AM_WITH_DMALLOC-@* ---
+dnl
+dnl Author:	Franc,ois Pinard
+dnl
+dnl Synopsis:	AM_WITH_DMALLOC
+dnl
+dnl Arguments:	---
+dnl
+dnl Use:	Links with `-dmalloc' if told to by the user.
+
+## ----------------------------------- ##
+## Check if --with-dmalloc was given.  ##
+## From Franc,ois Pinard               ##
+## ----------------------------------- ##
+
+# serial 1
+
+AC_DEFUN(AM_WITH_DMALLOC,
+[AC_MSG_CHECKING(if malloc debugging is wanted)
+AC_ARG_WITH(dmalloc,
+[  --with-dmalloc          use dmalloc, as in
+                          ftp://ftp.letters.com/src/dmalloc/dmalloc.tar.gz],
+[if test "$withval" = yes; then
+  AC_MSG_RESULT(yes)
+  AC_DEFINE(WITH_DMALLOC)
+  LIBS="$LIBS -ldmalloc"
+  LDFLAGS="$LDFLAGS -g"
+else
+  AC_MSG_RESULT(no)
+fi], [AC_MSG_RESULT(no)])
+])
+
+dnl --- *@-AM_FUNC_ERROR_AT_LINE-@* ---
+dnl
+dnl Author:	Jim Meyering
+dnl
+dnl Synopsis:	AM_FUNC_ERROR_AT_LINE
+dnl
+dnl Arguments:	---
+dnl
+dnl Use:	Use this if you use the GNU error.[ch].
+
+dnl FIXME: Migrate into libit
+
+AC_DEFUN(AM_FUNC_ERROR_AT_LINE,
+[AC_CACHE_CHECK([for error_at_line], am_cv_lib_error_at_line,
+ [AC_TRY_LINK([],[error_at_line(0, 0, "", 0, "");],
+              am_cv_lib_error_at_line=yes,
+              am_cv_lib_error_at_line=no)])
+ if test $am_cv_lib_error_at_line = no; then
+   LIBOBJS="$LIBOBJS error.o"
+ fi
+ AC_SUBST(LIBOBJS)dnl
+])
+
+dnl --- *@-AM_INIT_GUILE_MODULE-@* ---
+dnl
+dnl Author:	Unknown
+dnl
+dnl Synopsis:	AM_INIT_GUILE_MODULE(MODNAME)
+dnl
+dnl Arguments:	MODNAME = value to initialise `module' variable with
+dnl
+dnl Use:	This macro will automatically get the guile version from the
+dnl		top-level srcdir, and will initialize automake.  It also
+dnl		defines the `module' variable.
+
+AC_DEFUN([AM_INIT_GUILE_MODULE],[
+. $srcdir/../GUILE-VERSION
+AM_INIT_AUTOMAKE($PACKAGE, $VERSION)
+AC_CONFIG_AUX_DIR(..)
+module=[$1]
+AC_SUBST(module)])
+
+dnl --- *@-AM_CONFIG_HEADER-@* ---
+dnl
+dnl Author:	Unknown
+dnl
+dnl Synopsis:	AM_CONFIG_HEADER(HEADER ...)
+dnl
+dnl Arguments:	HEADER = a header spec, as for AC_CONFIG_HEADER
+dnl
+dnl Use:	Like AC_CONFIG_HEADER, but automatically create stamp file.
+
+AC_DEFUN(AM_CONFIG_HEADER,
+[AC_PREREQ([2.12])
+AC_CONFIG_HEADER([$1])
+dnl When config.status generates a header, we must update the stamp-h file.
+dnl This file resides in the same directory as the config header
+dnl that is generated.  We must strip everything past the first ":",
+dnl and everything past the last "/".
+AC_OUTPUT_COMMANDS(changequote(<<,>>)dnl
+ifelse(patsubst(<<$1>>, <<[^ ]>>, <<>>), <<>>,
+<<test -z "<<$>>CONFIG_HEADERS" || echo timestamp > patsubst(<<$1>>, <<^\([^:]*/
+\)?.*>>, <<\1>>)stamp-h<<>>dnl>>,
+<<am_indx=1
+for am_file in <<$1>>; do
+  case " <<$>>CONFIG_HEADERS " in
+  *" <<$>>am_file "*<<)>>
+    echo timestamp > `echo <<$>>am_file | sed -e 's%:.*%%' -e 's%[^/]*$%%'`stamp-h$am_indx
+    ;;
+  esac
+  am_indx=`expr "<<$>>am_indx" + 1`
+done<<>>dnl>>)
+changequote([,]))])
+
+dnl --- *@-AM_INIT_AUTOMAKE-@*
+dnl
+dnl Author:	Unknown
+dnl
+dnl Synopsis:	AM_INIT_AUTOMAKE(PACKAGE, VERSION, [NO-DEFINE])
+dnl
+dnl Arguments:	PACKAGE = package name
+dnl		VERSION = version number
+dnl		NO-DEFINE = if set, don't define package and version number
+dnl
+dnl Use:	Do all the work for Automake.  This macro actually does too
+dnl		much -- some checks are only needed if your package does
+dnl		certain things.  But this isn't really a big deal.
+
+# serial 1
+
+AC_DEFUN(AM_INIT_AUTOMAKE,
+[AC_REQUIRE([AM_PROG_INSTALL])
+PACKAGE=[$1]
+AC_SUBST(PACKAGE)
+VERSION=[$2]
+AC_SUBST(VERSION)
+dnl test to see if srcdir already configured
+if test "`cd $srcdir && pwd`" != "`pwd`" && test -f $srcdir/config.status; then
+  AC_MSG_ERROR([source directory already configured; run "make distclean" there first])
+fi
+ifelse([$3],,
+AC_DEFINE_UNQUOTED(PACKAGE, "$PACKAGE")
+AC_DEFINE_UNQUOTED(VERSION, "$VERSION"))
+AM_SANITY_CHECK
+AC_ARG_PROGRAM
+dnl FIXME This is truly gross.
+missing_dir=`cd $ac_aux_dir && pwd`
+AM_MISSING_PROG(ACLOCAL, aclocal, $missing_dir)
+AM_MISSING_PROG(AUTOCONF, autoconf, $missing_dir)
+AM_MISSING_PROG(AUTOMAKE, automake, $missing_dir)
+AM_MISSING_PROG(AUTOHEADER, autoheader, $missing_dir)
+AM_MISSING_PROG(MAKEINFO, makeinfo, $missing_dir)
+AC_PROG_MAKE_SET])
+
+dnl --- *@-AM_PROG_INSTALL-@* ---
+dnl
+dnl Author:	Franc,ois Pinard
+dnl
+dnl Synopsis:	AM_PROG_INSTALL
+dnl
+dnl Arguments:	---
+dnl
+dnl Use:	Calls `AC_PROG_INSTALL' to find an installer.  Then it sets
+dnl		`INSTALL_SCRIPT' to a suitable value if necessary.
+
+# serial 1
+
+AC_DEFUN(AM_PROG_INSTALL,
+[AC_PROG_INSTALL
+test -z "$INSTALL_SCRIPT" && INSTALL_SCRIPT='${INSTALL} -m 755'
+AC_SUBST(INSTALL_SCRIPT)dnl
+])
+
+dnl --- *@-AM_PROG_LEX-@* ---
+dnl
+dnl Author:	Alexandre Oliva
+dnl
+dnl Synopsis:	AM_PROG_LEX
+dnl
+dnl Arguments:	---
+dnl
+dnl Use:	Replacement for AC_PROG_LEX and AC_DECL_YYTEXT
+
+dnl AM_PROG_LEX
+dnl Look for flex, lex or missing, then run AC_PROG_LEX and AC_DECL_YYTEXT
+AC_DEFUN(AM_PROG_LEX,
+[missing_dir=ifelse([$1],,`cd $ac_aux_dir && pwd`,$1)
+AC_CHECK_PROGS(LEX, flex lex, "$missing_dir/missing flex")
+AC_PROG_LEX
+AC_DECL_YYTEXT])
+
+dnl --- *@-AM_PROG_LIBTOOL-@* ---
+dnl
+dnl Author:	Unknown
+dnl
+dnl Synopsis:	AM_PROG_LIBTOOL
+dnl
+dnl Arguments:	---
+dnl
+dnl Use:	Configures `libtool' for the target architecture.
+
+##
+## Configure libtool for the target system.
+##
+# serial 1 AM_PROG_LIBTOOL
+AC_DEFUN(AM_PROG_LIBTOOL,
+[AC_REQUIRE([AC_CANONICAL_HOST])
+AC_REQUIRE([AC_PROG_CC])
+AC_REQUIRE([AC_PROG_RANLIB])
+
+# Always use our own libtool.
+LIBTOOL='$(top_builddir)/libtool'
+AC_SUBST(LIBTOOL)
+
+dnl Allow the --disable-shared flag to stop us from building shared libs.
+AC_ARG_ENABLE(shared,
+[  --enable-shared         build shared libraries [default=yes]],
+test "$enableval" = no && libtool_shared=" --disable-shared",
+libtool_shared=)
+
+libtool_flags="$libtool_shared"
+test "$silent" = yes && libtool_flags="$libtool_flags --silent"
+test "$ac_cv_prog_gcc" = yes && libtool_flags="$libtool_flags --with-gcc"
+
+# Actually configure libtool.  ac_aux_dir is where install-sh is found.
+CC="$CC" CFLAGS="$CFLAGS" CPPFLAGS="$CPPFLAGS" LD="$LD" RANLIB="$RANLIB" \
+$ac_aux_dir/ltconfig $libtool_flags --no-verify $ac_aux_dir/ltmain.sh $host \
+|| AC_MSG_ERROR([libtool configure failed])
+])
+
+dnl --- *@-AM_PATH_LISPDIR-@* ---
+dnl
+dnl Author:	Ulrich Drepper
+dnl
+dnl Synopsis:	AM_PATH_LISPDIR
+dnl
+dnl Arguments:	---
+dnl
+dnl Use:	Sets the variable `lispdir' to point to a place to install
+dnl		Emacs lisp files.
+
+## ------------------------
+## Emacs LISP file handling
+## From Ulrich Drepper
+## ------------------------
+
+# serial 1
+
+AC_DEFUN(AM_PATH_LISPDIR,
+ [# If set to t, that means we are running in a shell under Emacs.
+  # If you have an Emacs named "t", then use the full path.
+  test "$EMACS" = t && EMACS=
+  AC_PATH_PROG(EMACS, emacs xemacs, no)
+  if test $EMACS != "no"; then
+    AC_MSG_CHECKING([where .elc files should go])
+    dnl Set default value
+    lispdir="\$(datadir)/emacs/site-lisp"
+    if test "x$prefix" = "xNONE"; then
+      if test -d $ac_default_prefix/share/emacs/site-lisp; then
+        lispdir="\$(prefix)/share/emacs/site-lisp"
+      else
+        if test -d $ac_default_prefix/lib/emacs/site-lisp; then
+          lispdir="\$(prefix)/lib/emacs/site-lisp"
+        fi
+      fi
+    else
+      if test -d $prefix/share/emacs/site-lisp; then
+        lispdir="\$(prefix)/share/emacs/site-lisp"
+      else
+        if test -d $prefix/lib/emacs/site-lisp; then
+          lispdir="\$(prefix)/lib/emacs/site-lisp"
+        fi
+      fi
+    fi
+    AC_MSG_RESULT($lispdir)
+  fi
+  AC_SUBST(lispdir)])
+
+dnl --- *@-AM_MAINTAINTER_MODE-@* ---
+dnl
+dnl Author:	Jim Meyering
+dnl
+dnl Synopsis:	jm_MAINTAINER_MODE
+dnl
+dnl Arguments:	---
+dnl
+dnl Use:	Provides an option `--enable-maintainer-mode' which turns
+dnl		on rules which might normally be commented out.  The
+dnl		substitution variable `MAINT' is set to be a comment when
+dnl		this option is disabled, which it is by default.
+
+# serial 1
+
+AC_DEFUN(AM_MAINTAINER_MODE,
+[AC_MSG_CHECKING([whether to enable maintainer-specific portions of Makefiles])
+  dnl maintainer-mode is disabled by default
+  AC_ARG_ENABLE(maintainer-mode,
+[  --enable-maintainer-mode enable make rules and dependencies not useful
+                          (and sometimes confusing) to the casual installer],
+      USE_MAINTAINER_MODE=$enableval,
+      USE_MAINTAINER_MODE=no)
+  AC_MSG_RESULT($USE_MAINTAINER_MODE)
+  if test $USE_MAINTAINER_MODE = yes; then
+    MAINT=
+  else
+    MAINT='#M#'
+  fi
+  AC_SUBST(MAINT)dnl
+]
+)
+
+dnl --- *@-AM_MISSING_PROG-@* ---
+dnl
+dnl Author:	Unknown
+dnl
+dnl Synopsis:	AM_MISSING_PROG(NAME, PROGRAM, DIRECTORY)
+dnl
+dnl Arguments:	NAME = variable to set to the file's location
+dnl		PROGRAM = name of program to find
+dnl		DIRECTORY = directory to look in
+dnl
+dnl Use:	Fakes existence of a useful GNU maintainer tool.
+
+AC_DEFUN(AM_MISSING_PROG,
+[AC_MSG_CHECKING(for working $2)
+# Run test in a subshell; some versions of sh will print an error if
+# an executable is not found, even if stderr is redirected.
+# Redirect stdin to placate older versions of autoconf.  Sigh.
+if ($2 --version) < /dev/null > /dev/null 2>&1; then
+   $1=$2
+   AC_MSG_RESULT(found)
+else
+   $1="$3/missing $2"
+   AC_MSG_RESULT(missing)
+fi
+AC_SUBST($1)])
+
+dnl --- *@-AM_FUNC_MKTIME-@* ---
+dnl
+dnl Author:	Jim Meyering
+dnl
+dnl Synopsis:	AM_FUNC_MKTIME
+dnl
+dnl Arguments:	---
+dnl
+dnl Use:	Checks for a working mktime function.
+
+AC_DEFUN(AM_FUNC_MKTIME,
+[AC_REQUIRE([AC_HEADER_TIME])dnl
+ AC_CHECK_HEADERS(sys/time.h)
+ AC_CACHE_CHECK([for working mktime], am_cv_func_working_mktime,
+  [AC_TRY_RUN(
+changequote(<<, >>)dnl
+<</* Test program from Paul Eggert (eggert@twinsun.com)
+   and Tony Leneis (tony@plaza.ds.adp.com).  */
+#if TIME_WITH_SYS_TIME
+# include <sys/time.h>
+# include <time.h>
+#else
+# if HAVE_SYS_TIME_H
+#  include <sys/time.h>
+# else
+#  include <time.h>
+# endif
+#endif
+
+static time_t time_t_max;
+
+/* Values we'll use to set the TZ environment variable.  */
+static const char *const tz_strings[] = {
+  NULL, "GMT0", "JST-9", "EST+3EDT+2,M10.1.0/00:00:00,M2.3.0/00:00:00"
+};
+#define N_STRINGS (sizeof (tz_strings) / sizeof (tz_strings[0]))
+
+static void
+mktime_test (now)
+     time_t now;
+{
+  if (mktime (localtime (&now)) != now)
+    exit (1);
+  now = time_t_max - now;
+  if (mktime (localtime (&now)) != now)
+    exit (1);
+}
+
+int
+main ()
+{
+  time_t t, delta;
+  int i;
+
+  for (time_t_max = 1; 0 < time_t_max; time_t_max *= 2)
+    continue;
+  time_t_max--;
+  delta = time_t_max / 997; /* a suitable prime number */
+  for (i = 0; i < N_STRINGS; i++)
+    {
+      if (tz_strings[i])
+        putenv (tz_strings[i]);
+
+      for (t = 0; t <= time_t_max - delta; t += delta)
+        mktime_test (t);
+      mktime_test ((time_t) 60 * 60);
+      mktime_test ((time_t) 60 * 60 * 24);
+    }
+  exit (0);
+}
+              >>,
+changequote([, ])dnl
+             am_cv_func_working_mktime=yes, am_cv_func_working_mktime=no,
+             dnl When crosscompiling, assume mktime is missing or broken.
+             am_cv_func_working_mktime=no)
+  ])
+  if test $am_cv_func_working_mktime = no; then
+    LIBOBJS="$LIBOBJS mktime.o"
+  fi
+])
+
+dnl --- *@-AM_FUNC_OBSTACK-@* ---
+dnl
+dnl Author:	Jim Meyering
+dnl
+dnl Synopsis:	AM_FUNC_OBSTACK
+dnl
+dnl Arguments:	---
+dnl
+dnl Use:	Checks for GNU obstacks.
+
+AC_DEFUN(AM_FUNC_OBSTACK,
+[AC_CACHE_CHECK([for obstacks], am_cv_func_obstack,
+ [AC_TRY_LINK([#include "obstack.h"],
+              [struct obstack *mem;obstack_free(mem,(char *) 0)],
+              am_cv_func_obstack=yes,
+              am_cv_func_obstack=no)])
+ if test $am_cv_func_obstack = yes; then
+   AC_DEFINE(HAVE_OBSTACK)
+ else
+   LIBOBJS="$LIBOBJS obstack.o"
+ fi
+])
+
+dnl --- *@-AC_C_PROTOTYPES-@* ---
+dnl
+dnl Author:	Franc,ois Pinard
+dnl
+dnl Synopsis:	AC_C_PROTOTYPES
+dnl
+dnl Arguments:	---
+dnl
+dnl Use:	If the C compiler understands ANSI C, define `PROTOTYPES',
+dnl		and clear the `U' and `ANSI2KNR' variables.  Otherwise, 
+dnl		set `U' to be `_' and `ANSI2KNR' to be `./ansi2knr'.
+
+# serial 1
+
+AC_DEFUN(fp_C_PROTOTYPES,
+[AC_REQUIRE([fp_PROG_CC_STDC])
+AC_MSG_CHECKING([for function prototypes])
+if test "$ac_cv_prog_cc_stdc" != no; then
+  AC_MSG_RESULT(yes)
+  AC_DEFINE(PROTOTYPES)
+  U= ANSI2KNR=
+else
+  AC_MSG_RESULT(no)
+  U=_ ANSI2KNR=./ansi2knr
+fi
+AC_SUBST(U)dnl
+AC_SUBST(ANSI2KNR)dnl
+])
+
+dnl --- *@-AM_PATH_GTK-@* ---
+dnl
+dnl Author:	Owen Taylor
+dnl
+dnl Synopsis:	AM_PATH_GTK(MIN-VERSION, [ACTION-IF-FOUND], [ACTION-IF-NOT])
+dnl
+dnl Arguments:	MIN-VERSION = minimum version of GTK required
+dnl		ACTION-IF-FOUND = executed if GTK found OK
+dnl		ACTION-IF-NOT-FOUND = what to do if GTK not available
+dnl
+dnl Use:	Sets up compilation environment suitably for GTK programming.
+
+# Configure paths for GTK+
+# Owen Taylor     97-11-3
+
+dnl AM_PATH_GTK([MINIMUM-VERSION, [ACTION-IF-FOUND [, ACTION-IF-NOT-FOUND]]])
+dnl Test for GTK, and define GTK_CFLAGS and GTK_LIBS
+dnl
+AC_DEFUN(AM_PATH_GTK,
+[dnl 
+dnl Get the cflags and libraries from the gtk-config script
+dnl
+AC_ARG_WITH(gtk-prefix,[  --with-gtk-prefix=PFX   Prefix where GTK is installed (optional)],
+            gtk_config_prefix="$withval", gtk_config_prefix="")
+AC_ARG_WITH(gtk-exec-prefix,[  --with-gtk-exec-prefix=PFX Exec prefix where GTK is installed (optional)],
+            gtk_config_exec_prefix="$withval", gtk_config_exec_prefix="")
+AC_ARG_ENABLE(gtktest, [  --disable-gtktest       Do not try to compile and run a test GTK program],
+		    , enable_gtktest=yes)
+
+  if test x$gtk_config_exec_prefix != x ; then
+     gtk_config_args="$gtk_config_args --exec-prefix=$gtk_config_exec_prefix"
+     if test x${GTK_CONFIG+set} != xset ; then
+        GTK_CONFIG=$gtk_config_exec_prefix/bin/gtk-config
+     fi
+  fi
+  if test x$gtk_config_prefix != x ; then
+     gtk_config_args="$gtk_config_args --prefix=$gtk_config_prefix"
+     if test x${GTK_CONFIG+set} != xset ; then
+        GTK_CONFIG=$gtk_config_prefix/bin/gtk-config
+     fi
+  fi
+
+  AC_PATH_PROG(GTK_CONFIG, gtk-config, no)
+  min_gtk_version=ifelse([$1], ,0.99.7,$1)
+  AC_MSG_CHECKING(for GTK - version >= $min_gtk_version)
+  no_gtk=""
+  if test "$GTK_CONFIG" = "no" ; then
+    no_gtk=yes
+  else
+    GTK_CFLAGS=`$GTK_CONFIG $gtk_config_args --cflags`
+    GTK_LIBS=`$GTK_CONFIG $gtk_config_args --libs`
+    gtk_config_major_version=`$GTK_CONFIG $gtk_config_args --version | \
+           sed 's/\([[0-9]]*\).\([[0-9]]*\).\([[0-9]]*\)/\1/'`
+    gtk_config_minor_version=`$GTK_CONFIG $gtk_config_args --version | \
+           sed 's/\([[0-9]]*\).\([[0-9]]*\).\([[0-9]]*\)/\2/'`
+    gtk_config_micro_version=`$GTK_CONFIG $gtk_config_args --version | \
+           sed 's/\([[0-9]]*\).\([[0-9]]*\).\([[0-9]]*\)/\3/'`
+    if test "x$enable_gtktest" = "xyes" ; then
+      ac_save_CFLAGS="$CFLAGS"
+      ac_save_LIBS="$LIBS"
+      CFLAGS="$CFLAGS $GTK_CFLAGS"
+      LIBS="$LIBS $GTK_LIBS"
+dnl
+dnl Now check if the installed GTK is sufficiently new. (Also sanity
+dnl checks the results of gtk-config to some extent
+dnl
+      rm -f conf.gtktest
+      AC_TRY_RUN([
+#include <gtk/gtk.h>
+#include <stdio.h>
+
+int 
+main ()
+{
+  int major, minor, micro;
+  char *tmp_version;
+
+  system ("touch conf.gtktest");
+
+  /* HP/UX 9 (%@#!) writes to sscanf strings */
+  tmp_version = g_strdup("$min_gtk_version");
+  if (sscanf(tmp_version, "%d.%d.%d", &major, &minor, &micro) != 3) {
+     printf("%s, bad version string\n", "$min_gtk_version");
+     exit(1);
+   }
+
+  if ((gtk_major_version != $gtk_config_major_version) ||
+      (gtk_minor_version != $gtk_config_minor_version) ||
+      (gtk_micro_version != $gtk_config_micro_version))
+    {
+      printf("\n*** 'gtk-config --version' returned %d.%d.%d, but GTK+ (%d.%d.%d)\n", 
+             $gtk_config_major_version, $gtk_config_minor_version, $gtk_config_micro_version,
+             gtk_major_version, gtk_minor_version, gtk_micro_version);
+      printf ("*** was found! If gtk-config was correct, then it is best\n");
+      printf ("*** to remove the old version of GTK+. You may also be able to fix the error\n");
+      printf("*** by modifying your LD_LIBRARY_PATH enviroment variable, or by editing\n");
+      printf("*** /etc/ld.so.conf. Make sure you have run ldconfig if that is\n");
+      printf("*** required on your system.\n");
+      printf("*** If gtk-config was wrong, set the environment variable GTK_CONFIG\n");
+      printf("*** to point to the correct copy of gtk-config, and remove the file config.cache\n");
+      printf("*** before re-running configure\n");
+    } 
+  else
+    {
+      if ((gtk_major_version > major) ||
+        ((gtk_major_version == major) && (gtk_minor_version > minor)) ||
+        ((gtk_major_version == major) && (gtk_minor_version == minor) && (gtk_micro_version >= micro)))
+      {
+        return 0;
+       }
+     else
+      {
+        printf("\n*** An old version of GTK+ (%d.%d.%d) was found.\n",
+               gtk_major_version, gtk_minor_version, gtk_micro_version);
+        printf("*** You need a version of GTK+ newer than %d.%d.%d. The latest version of\n",
+	       major, minor, micro);
+        printf("*** GTK+ is always available from ftp://ftp.gtk.org.\n");
+        printf("***\n");
+        printf("*** If you have already installed a sufficiently new version, this error\n");
+        printf("*** probably means that the wrong copy of the gtk-config shell script is\n");
+        printf("*** being found. The easiest way to fix this is to remove the old version\n");
+        printf("*** of GTK+, but you can also set the GTK_CONFIG environment to point to the\n");
+        printf("*** correct copy of gtk-config. (In this case, you will have to\n");
+        printf("*** modify your LD_LIBRARY_PATH enviroment variable, or edit /etc/ld.so.conf\n");
+        printf("*** so that the correct libraries are found at run-time))\n");
+      }
+    }
+  return 1;
+}
+],, no_gtk=yes,[echo $ac_n "cross compiling; assumed OK... $ac_c"])
+       CFLAGS="$ac_save_CFLAGS"
+       LIBS="$ac_save_LIBS"
+     fi
+  fi
+  if test "x$no_gtk" = x ; then
+     AC_MSG_RESULT(yes)
+     ifelse([$2], , :, [$2])     
+  else
+     AC_MSG_RESULT(no)
+     if test "$GTK_CONFIG" = "no" ; then
+       echo "*** The gtk-config script installed by GTK could not be found"
+       echo "*** If GTK was installed in PREFIX, make sure PREFIX/bin is in"
+       echo "*** your path, or set the GTK_CONFIG environment variable to the"
+       echo "*** full path to gtk-config."
+     else
+       if test -f conf.gtktest ; then
+        :
+       else
+          echo "*** Could not run GTK test program, checking why..."
+          CFLAGS="$CFLAGS $GTK_CFLAGS"
+          LIBS="$LIBS $GTK_LIBS"
+          AC_TRY_LINK([
+#include <gtk/gtk.h>
+#include <stdio.h>
+],      [ return ((gtk_major_version) || (gtk_minor_version) || (gtk_micro_version)); ],
+        [ echo "*** The test program compiled, but did not run. This usually means"
+          echo "*** that the run-time linker is not finding GTK or finding the wrong"
+          echo "*** version of GTK. If it is not finding GTK, you'll need to set your"
+          echo "*** LD_LIBRARY_PATH environment variable, or edit /etc/ld.so.conf to point"
+          echo "*** to the installed location  Also, make sure you have run ldconfig if that"
+          echo "*** is required on your system"
+	  echo "***"
+          echo "*** If you have an old version installed, it is best to remove it, although"
+          echo "*** you may also be able to get things to work by modifying LD_LIBRARY_PATH"
+          echo "***"
+          echo "*** If you have a RedHat 5.0 system, you should remove the GTK package that"
+          echo "*** came with the system with the command"
+          echo "***"
+          echo "***    rpm --erase --nodeps gtk gtk-devel" ],
+        [ echo "*** The test program failed to compile or link. See the file config.log for the"
+          echo "*** exact error that occured. This usually means GTK was incorrectly installed"
+          echo "*** or that you have moved GTK since it was installed. In the latter case, you"
+          echo "*** may want to edit the gtk-config script: $GTK_CONFIG" ])
+          CFLAGS="$ac_save_CFLAGS"
+          LIBS="$ac_save_LIBS"
+       fi
+     fi
+     GTK_CFLAGS=""
+     GTK_LIBS=""
+     ifelse([$3], , :, [$3])
+  fi
+  AC_SUBST(GTK_CFLAGS)
+  AC_SUBST(GTK_LIBS)
+  rm -f conf.gtktest
+])
+
+dnl --- *@-AC_TYPE_PTRDIFF_T-@* ---
+dnl
+dnl Author:	Ulrich Drepper
+dnl
+dnl Synopsis:	AC_TYPE_PTRDIFF_T
+dnl
+dnl Arguments:	---
+dnl
+dnl Use:	Sets HAVE_PTRDIFF_T if the type exists.
+
+AC_DEFUN(AM_TYPE_PTRDIFF_T,
+  [AC_CACHE_CHECK([for ptrdiff_t], am_cv_type_ptrdiff_t,
+     [AC_TRY_COMPILE([#include <stddef.h>], [ptrdiff_t p],
+                     am_cv_type_ptrdiff_t=yes, am_cv_type_ptrdiff_t=no)])
+   if test $am_cv_type_ptrdiff_t = yes; then
+     AC_DEFINE(HAVE_PTRDIFF_T)
+   fi
+])
+
+dnl --- *@-AM_WITH_REGEX-@* ---
+dnl
+dnl Author:	Unknown (possibly Franc,ois Pinard)
+dnl
+dnl Synopsis:	AM_WITH_REGEX
+dnl
+dnl Arguments:	---
+dnl
+dnl Use:
+dnl		The idea is to distribute rx.[hc] and regex.[hc] together,
+dnl		for a while.  The WITH_REGEX symbol (which should also be
+dnl		documented in acconfig.h) is used to decide which of regex.h
+dnl		or rx.h should be included in the application.  If
+dnl		`./configure --with-regex' is given (the default), the
+dnl		package will use gawk's regex.  If `./configure
+dnl		--without-regex', a check is made to see if rx is already
+dnl		installed, as with newer Linux'es.  If not found, the package
+dnl		will use the rx from the distribution.  If found, the package
+dnl		will use the system's rx which, on Linux at least, will
+dnl		result in a smaller executable file.
+
+AC_DEFUN(AM_WITH_REGEX,
+[AC_MSG_CHECKING(which of GNU rx or gawk's regex is wanted)
+AC_ARG_WITH(regex,
+[  --without-regex         use GNU rx in lieu of gawk's regex for matching],
+[test "$withval" = yes && am_with_regex=1],
+[am_with_regex=1])
+if test -n "$am_with_regex"; then
+  AC_MSG_RESULT(regex)
+  AC_DEFINE(WITH_REGEX)
+  AC_CACHE_CHECK([for GNU regex in libc], am_cv_gnu_regex,
+    AC_TRY_LINK([], [extern int re_max_failures; re_max_failures = 1],
+                am_cv_gnu_regex=yes, am_cv_gnu_regex=no))
+  if test $am_cv_gnu_regex = no; then
+    LIBOBJS="$LIBOBJS regex.o"
+  fi
+else
+  AC_MSG_RESULT(rx)
+  AC_CHECK_FUNC(re_rx_search, , [LIBOBJS="$LIBOBJS rx.o"])
+fi
+AC_SUBST(LIBOBJS)dnl
+])
+
+dnl --- *@-AM_SANITY_CHECK-@*
+dnl
+dnl Author:	Unknown
+dnl
+dnl Synopsis:	AM_SANITY_CHECK
+dnl
+dnl Arguments:	---
+dnl
+dnl Use:	Check for build environment sanity.
+
+AC_DEFUN(AM_SANITY_CHECK,
+[AC_MSG_CHECKING([whether build environment is sane])
+# Just in case
+sleep 1
+echo timestamp > conftestfile
+# Do `set' in a subshell so we don't clobber the current shell's
+# arguments.  Must try -L first in case configure is actually a
+# symlink; some systems play weird games with the mod time of symlinks
+# (eg FreeBSD returns the mod time of the symlink's containing
+# directory).
+if (
+   set X `ls -Lt $srcdir/configure conftestfile 2> /dev/null`
+   if test "$@" = "X"; then
+      # -L didn't work.
+      set X `ls -t $srcdir/configure conftestfile`
+   fi
+   test "[$]2" = conftestfile
+   )
+then
+   # Ok.
+   :
+else
+   AC_MSG_ERROR([newly created file is older than distributed files!
+Check your system clock])
+fi
+rm -f conftest*
+AC_MSG_RESULT(yes)])
+
+dnl --- *@-AM_FUNC_STRDOD-@* ---
+dnl
+dnl Author:	Jim Meyering
+dnl
+dnl Synopsis:	AM_FUNC_STRTOD
+dnl
+dnl Arguments:	---
+dnl
+dnl Use:	Checks for a working strtod function.
+
+## Copyright (C) 1996 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+
+## This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
+## it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
+## the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option)
+## any later version.
+
+## This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+## but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+## MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the
+## GNU General Public License for more details.
+
+## You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+## along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
+## Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA
+## 02111-1307, USA.
+
+## From Jim Meyering.
+
+## serial 1
+
+## @defmac AC_FUNC_STRTOD
+## @maindex FUNC_STRTOD
+## @ovindex LIBOBJS
+## If the @code{strtod} function is not available, or does not work
+## correctly (like the one on SunOS 5.4), add @samp{strtod.o} to output
+## variable @code{LIBOBJS}.
+## @end defmac
+
+AC_DEFUN(AM_FUNC_STRTOD,
+[AC_CACHE_CHECK(for working strtod, am_cv_func_strtod,
+[AC_TRY_RUN([
+double strtod ();
+int
+main()
+{
+  {
+    /* Some versions of Linux strtod mis-parse strings with leading '+'.  */
+    char *string = " +69";
+    char *term;
+    double value;
+    value = strtod (string, &term);
+    if (value != 69 || term != (string + 4))
+      exit (1);
+  }
+
+  {
+    /* Under Solaris 2.4, strtod returns the wrong value for the
+       terminating character under some conditions.  */
+
+## @defmac AC_FUNC_STRTOD
+## @maindex FUNC_STRTOD
+## @ovindex LIBOBJS
+## If the @code{strtod} function is not available, or does not work
+## correctly (like the one on SunOS 5.4), add @samp{strtod.o} to output
+## variable @code{LIBOBJS}.
+## @end defmac
+
+AC_DEFUN(AM_FUNC_STRTOD,
+[AC_CACHE_CHECK(for working strtod, am_cv_func_strtod,
+[AC_TRY_RUN([
+double strtod ();
+int
+main()
+{
+  {
+    /* Some versions of Linux strtod mis-parse strings with leading '+'.  */
+    char *string = " +69";
+    char *term;
+    double value;
+    value = strtod (string, &term);
+    if (value != 69 || term != (string + 4))
+      exit (1);
+  }
+
+  {
+    /* Under Solaris 2.4, strtod returns the wrong value for the
+       terminating character under some conditions.  */
+    char *string = "NaN";
+    char *term;
+    strtod (string, &term);
+    if (term != string && *(term - 1) == 0)
+      exit (1);
+  }
+  exit (0);
+}
+], am_cv_func_strtod=yes, am_cv_func_strtod=no, am_cv_func_strtod=no)])
+test $am_cv_func_strtod = no && LIBOBJS="$LIBOBJS strtod.o"
+AC_SUBST(LIBOBJS)dnl
+am_cv_func_strtod_needs_libm=no
+if test $am_cv_func_strtod = no; then
+  AC_CHECK_FUNCS(pow)
+  if test $ac_cv_func_pow = no; then
+    AC_CHECK_LIB(m, pow, [am_cv_func_strtod_needs_libm=yes],
+                 [AC_MSG_WARN(can't find library containing definition of pow)])
+  fi
+fi
+])
+
+dnl --- *@-AM_SYS_POSIX_TERMIOS-@* ---
+dnl
+dnl Author:	Jim Meyering
+dnl
+dnl Synopsis:	AM_SYS_POSIX_TERMIOS
+dnl
+dnl Arguments:	---
+dnl
+dnl Use:	Checks for a POSIX termios.h.
+
+AC_DEFUN(AM_SYS_POSIX_TERMIOS,
+[AC_CACHE_CHECK([POSIX termios], am_cv_sys_posix_termios,
+  [AC_TRY_LINK([#include <sys/types.h>
+#include <unistd.h>
+#include <termios.h>],
+  [/* SunOS 4.0.3 has termios.h but not the library calls.  */
+   tcgetattr(0, 0);],
+  am_cv_sys_posix_termios=yes,
+  am_cv_sys_posix_termios=no)])
+])
+
+dnl----- Macros by Mark Wooding ------------------------------ *@--IGNORE--@*
+
+dnl --- *@-mdw_REQUIRE-@* ---
+dnl
+dnl Author:	Mark Wooding
+dnl
+dnl Synopsis:	mdw_REQUIRE(MACRO, ARGS...)
+dnl
+dnl Arguments:	MACRO = name of a macro which should have been called
+dnl		ARGS = arguments to pass
+dnl
+dnl Use:	Like `AC_REQUIRE', only it handles arguments.
+
+AC_DEFUN(mdw_REQUIRE,
+[ifdef([AC_PROVIDED_$1], ,
+[AC_DIVERT_PUSH(builtin(eval, AC_DIVERSION_CURRENT - 1))dnl
+indir($@)
+AC_DIVERT_POP()dnl
+])])
+
+dnl --- *@-mdw_CHECK_MANYLIBS-@* ---
+dnl
+dnl Author:	Mark Wooding
+dnl
+dnl Synopsis:	mdw_CHECK_MANYLIBS(FUNC, LIBS, [IF-FOUND], [IF-NOT-FOUND])
+dnl
+dnl Arguments:	FUNC = a function to try to find
+dnl		LIBS = a whitespace-separated list of libraries to search
+dnl		IF-FOUND = what to do when the function is found
+dnl		IF-NOT-FOUND = what to do when the function isn't found
+dnl
+dnl Use:	Searches for a library which defines FUNC.  It first tries
+dnl		without any libraries; then it tries each library specified
+dnl		in LIBS in turn.  If it finds a match, it adds the
+dnl		appropriate library to `LIBS'.
+dnl
+dnl		This is particularly handy under DIREIX: if you link with
+dnl		`-lnsl' then you get non-NIS-aware versions of getpwnam and
+dnl		so on, which is clearly a Bad Thing.
+
+AC_DEFUN(mdw_CHECK_MANYLIBS,
+[AC_CACHE_CHECK([for library containing $1], [mdw_cv_lib_$1],
+[mdw_save_LIBS="$LIBS"
+mdw_cv_lib_$1="no"
+AC_TRY_LINK(,[$1()], [mdw_cv_lib_$1="none required"])
+test "$mdw_cv_lib_$1" = "no" && for i in $2; do
+LIBS="-l$i $mdw_save_LIBS"
+AC_TRY_LINK(,[$1()],
+[mdw_cv_lib_$1="-l$i"
+break])
+done
+LIBS="$mdw_save_LIBS"])
+if test "$mdw_cv_lib_$1" != "no"; then
+  test "$mdw_cv_lib_$1" = "none required" || LIBS="$mdw_cv_lib_$1 $LIBS"
+  $3
+else :
+  $4
+fi])
+
+dnl --- *@-mdw__PERL_VERSION-@* ---
+dnl
+dnl AC_DEFUN relies on `[', `]' being quotes, so I have to drop down a level.
+
+changequote(<<, >>)
+define(mdw__PERL_VERSION, <<$1 -e 'exit ($] < $2);' >&5 2>&5>>)
+changequote([, ])
+
+dnl --- *@-mdw_PROG_PERL-@* ---
+dnl
+dnl Author:	Mark Wooding
+dnl
+dnl Synopsis:	mdw_PROG_PERL(VERSION, [IF-FOUND], [IF-NOT-FOUND])
+dnl
+dnl Arguments:	VERSION = version number of Perl required
+dnl		IF-FOUND = what to do if it's found
+dnl		IF-NOT-FOUND = what to do if it isn't
+dnl
+dnl Use:	Attempts to find a working version of Perl with a late
+dnl		enough version number.  It supplies an option `--with-perl'
+dnl		to allow the user to provide a Perl interpreter.  If one
+dnl		isn't provided explicitly, it searches for `perl' and `perl5'
+dnl		in the current PATH, asking them whether they have a late
+dnl		enough version number.  The path of the working Perl is
+dnl		put into the `PERL' environment variable; `AC_SUBST' is used
+dnl		to substitute its value into Perl scripts.  If there is no
+dnl		Perl to be found, the value of `PERL' is set to be `none'.
+
+AC_DEFUN(mdw_PROG_PERL,
+[AC_ARG_WITH([perl],
+[  --with-perl=PERL	  specify path to Perl version $1 or newer],
+[PERL="$withval"],
+if test -z "$PERL"; then
+[AC_CACHE_CHECK([for Perl version $1 or later], mdw_cv_prog_perl,
+[mdw_cv_prog_perl="none"
+for p in `echo "$PATH:/usr/local/bin" | tr ":" " "`; do
+  case $p in /*) ;; *) p=`pwd`/$p ;; esac
+  if mdw__PERL_VERSION(["$p/perl"], $1); then
+    mdw_cv_prog_perl="$p/perl"
+    break
+  fi
+  if mdw__PERL_VERSION(["$p/perl5"], $1); then
+    mdw_cv_prog_perl="$p/perl5"
+    break
+  fi
+done])
+PERL="$mdw_cv_prog_perl"])
+fi
+
+AC_SUBST(PERL)dnl
+if test "$PERL" = "none"; then :
+  $3
+else :
+  $2
+fi])
+
+dnl --- *@-mdw_CHECK_PERL-@* ---
+dnl
+dnl Author:	Mark Wooding
+dnl
+dnl Synopsis:	mdw_CHECK_PERL(VERSION)
+dnl
+dnl Arguments:	VERSION = version number of Perl required
+dnl
+dnl Use:	Verifies that the Perl interpreter in the `PERL' shell
+dnl		variable actually works and is of the right version.  If it's
+dnl		not, an error is raised and configuration is aborted.
+
+AC_DEFUN(mdw_CHECK_PERL,
+[mdw_REQUIRE([mdw_PROG_PERL], [$1])
+AC_MSG_CHECKING([whether Perl ($PERL) works])
+if test "$PERL" != "none" && mdw__PERL_VERSION("$PERL", $1); then
+  AC_MSG_RESULT([yes])
+else
+  AC_MSG_RESULT([no])
+  AC_MSG_ERROR([Perl version $1 or newer not found.
+If you have a recent enough Perl, and I just failed to find it, try using
+the --with-perl=PERL option to give me an explicit pathname.])
+fi])
+
+dnl --- *@-mdw_PERLLIB_CHECK-@* ---
+dnl
+dnl Author:	Mark Wooding
+dnl
+dnl Synopsis:	mdw_PERLLIB_CHECK(LIBRARY)
+dnl
+dnl Arguments:	LIBRARY = name of a Perl library to check for
+dnl
+dnl Use:	Ensures that a Perl script can `use LIBRARY;'.  If it can,
+dnl		all's well and good; if it can't, `LIBRARY.pm' is added to
+dnl		the variable `NEEDED_PERLLIBS' and a line which adds 
+dnl		`pkgdatadir' to Perl's `@INC' array is placed in the
+dnl		variable `INC_PERLLIBS'; `AC_SUBST' is called for both of
+dnl		these variables.  It's expected that `NEEDED_PERLLIBS' will
+dnl		be used in the `Makefile.in' to decide which versions from
+dnl		the distribution need installing.
+dnl
+dnl		This macro isn't terribly useful in the general case.  It
+dnl		Also implicitly assumes that `$PERL' is Perl 5 or later.
+
+AC_DEFUN(mdw__PERLLIB_INIT,
+[AC_SUBST(INC_PERLLIBS)dnl
+AC_SUBST(NEEDED_PERLLIBS)dnl
+])
+
+AC_DEFUN(mdw_PERLLIB_CHECK,
+[AC_REQUIRE([mdw__PERLLIB_INIT])
+mdw_REQUIRE([mdw_CHECK_PERL], 5)
+AC_CACHE_CHECK([for Perl library $1], mdw_cv_perllib_$1,
+[if $PERL -e 'use $1;' >&5 2>&5; then
+  mdw_cv_perllib_$1="yes"
+else
+  mdw_cv_perllib_$1="no"
+fi])
+
+if test "$mdw_cv_perllib_$1" = "no"; then
+  NEEDED_PERLLIBS="$NEEDED_PERLLIBS $1.pm"
+
+  # --- Deal with autoconf lossage ---
+  #
+  # It doesn't want to define `prefix' until rather later on, so I have
+  # to bodge it here.
+
+  if test -z "$INC_PERLLIBS"; then
+    mdw_old_prefix="$prefix"
+    test "$prefix" = "NONE" && prefix="$ac_default_prefix";
+    INC_PERLLIBS="BEGIN { push @INC, \"`eval echo $datadir/$PACKAGE`\"; }"
+    prefix="$mdw_old_prefix";
+  fi
+fi])
+
+dnl --- *@-mdw_GCC_FLAGS-@* ---
+dnl
+dnl Author:	Mark Wooding
+dnl
+dnl Synopsis:	mdw_GCC_FLAGS([FLAGS], [CFLAGS], [C++FLAGS])
+dnl
+dnl Arguments:	FLAGS = GCC compiler flags to add (default is 
+dnl			`-pedantic -Wall')
+dnl		CFLAGS = GCC C compiler flags to add (default is empty)
+dnl		C++FLAGS = GCC C++ compiler flags to add (default is
+dnl			`-fhandle-exceptions').
+dnl
+dnl Use:	If the C compiler is GCC, add the compiler flags.
+
+AC_DEFUN(mdw_GCC_FLAGS,
+[if test "$GCC" = "yes"; then
+  CFLAGS="$CFLAGS ifelse([$1], [], [-pedantic -Wall], [$1])"
+  CFLAGS="$CFLAGS ifelse([$2], [], [], [$2])"
+fi
+if test "$GXX" = "yes"; then
+  CXXFLAGS="$CXXFLAGS ifelse([$1], [], [-pedantic -Wall], [$1])"
+  CXXFLAGS="$CXXFLAGS ifelse([$3], [], [-fhandle-exceptions], [$3])"
+fi])
+
+dnl --- *@-mdw_OPT_NDEBUG-@* ---
+dnl
+dnl Author:	Mark Wooding
+dnl
+dnl Synopsis:	mdw_OPT_NDEBUG
+dnl
+dnl Arguments:	---
+dnl
+dnl Use:	Turns off the `NDEBUG' flag if the user wants to do
+dnl		debugging.
+
+AC_DEFUN(mdw_OPT_NDEBUG,
+[AC_ARG_ENABLE(debugging,
+[  --enable-debugging      spews vast swathes of useless information],
+[if test "$enableval" = "no"; then
+  AC_DEFINE(NDEBUG, 1)
+fi],
+[AC_DEFINE(NDEBUG, 1)])])
+
+dnl --- *@-mdw_OPT_EFENCE-@* ---
+dnl
+dnl Author:	Mark Wooding
+dnl
+dnl Synopsis:	mdw_OPT_EFENCE
+dnl
+dnl Arguments:	---
+dnl
+dnl Use:	Links with the Electric Fence library.
+
+AC_DEFUN(mdw_OPT_EFENCE,
+[AC_ARG_WITH(electric-fence,
+[  --with-electric-fence   link programs with Electric Fence],
+[if test "$withval" = "yes"; then
+  AC_CHECK_LIB(efence, malloc)
+fi])])
+
+dnl --- *@-mdw_OPT_mLib_DEBUG-@* ---
+dnl
+dnl Author:	Mark Wooding
+dnl
+dnl Synopsis:	mdw_OPT_mLib_DEBUG(PROGRAM)
+dnl
+dnl Arguments:	---
+dnl
+dnl Use:	Provides options for mLib debugging.  In particular, the
+dnl		following are defined:
+dnl
+dnl		  --enable-tracing	  turns off the NTRACE variable
+dnl		  --enable-track	  turns on malloc tracking
+dnl		  --enable-blame-PROGRAM  tracks malloc contexts in PROGRAM
+dnl
+dnl		There must be  a separate `blame' option, so that the various
+dnl		blame options work properly.
+
+AC_DEFUN(mdw_OPT_mLib_DEBUG,
+[mdw_OPT_NDEBUG
+mdw_OPT_EFENCE
+
+AC_ARG_ENABLE(tracing,
+[  --enable-tracing        enable output of tracing information],
+[if test "$enableval" = "no"; then
+  AC_DEFINE(NTRACE, 1)
+fi],
+[AC_DEFINE(NTRACE, 1)])
+
+AC_ARG_ENABLE(track,
+[  --enable-track          enable tracking of malloc and free],
+[AC_DEFINE(TRACK_ENABLE, 1)])
+
+AC_ARG_ENABLE(blame-$1,
+[  --enable-blame-$1
+                          track malloc contexts while in $1],
+[AC_DEFINE(TRACK_BLAME, 1)])])
+
+dnl----- That's all, folks --------------------------------- *@--GLOB-END--@*
diff --git a/ansi2knr.1 b/ansi2knr.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..434ce8f0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/ansi2knr.1
@@ -0,0 +1,19 @@
+.TH ANSI2KNR 1 "31 December 1990" 
+.SH NAME
+ansi2knr \- convert ANSI C to Kernighan & Ritchie C
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.I ansi2knr
+input_file output_file
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+If no output_file is supplied, output goes to stdout.
+.br
+There are no error messages.
+.sp
+.I ansi2knr
+recognizes functions by seeing a non-keyword identifier at the left margin, followed by a left parenthesis, with a right parenthesis as the last character on the line.  It will recognize a multi-line header if the last character on each line but the last is a left parenthesis or comma.  These algorithms ignore whitespace and comments, except that the function name must be the first thing on the line.
+.sp
+The following constructs will confuse it:
+.br
+     - Any other construct that starts at the left margin and follows the above syntax (such as a macro or function call).
+.br
+     - Macros that tinker with the syntax of the function header.
diff --git a/ansi2knr.c b/ansi2knr.c
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..9bcc4adb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/ansi2knr.c
@@ -0,0 +1,439 @@
+/* Copyright (C) 1989, 1991, 1993, 1994 Aladdin Enterprises. All rights reserved. */
+
+/* ansi2knr.c */
+/* Convert ANSI function declarations to K&R syntax */
+
+/*
+ansi2knr is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but
+WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY.  No author or distributor accepts responsibility
+to anyone for the consequences of using it or for whether it serves any
+particular purpose or works at all, unless he says so in writing.  Refer
+to the GNU General Public License for full details.
+
+Everyone is granted permission to copy, modify and redistribute
+ansi2knr, but only under the conditions described in the GNU
+General Public License.  A copy of this license is supposed to have been
+given to you along with ansi2knr so you can know your rights and
+responsibilities.  It should be in a file named COPYLEFT.  Among other
+things, the copyright notice and this notice must be preserved on all
+copies.
+*/
+
+/*
+ * Usage:
+	ansi2knr [--varargs] input_file [output_file]
+ * If no output_file is supplied, output goes to stdout.
+ * There are no error messages.
+ *
+ * ansi2knr recognizes function definitions by seeing a non-keyword
+ * identifier at the left margin, followed by a left parenthesis,
+ * with a right parenthesis as the last character on the line.
+ * It will recognize a multi-line header provided that the last character
+ * of the last line of the header is a right parenthesis,
+ * and no intervening line ends with a left brace or a semicolon.
+ * These algorithms ignore whitespace and comments, except that
+ * the function name must be the first thing on the line.
+ * The following constructs will confuse it:
+ *	- Any other construct that starts at the left margin and
+ *	    follows the above syntax (such as a macro or function call).
+ *	- Macros that tinker with the syntax of the function header.
+ *
+ * If the --varargs switch is supplied, ansi2knr will attempt to
+ * convert a ... argument to va_alist and va_dcl.  If this switch is not
+ * supplied, ansi2knr will simply drop any such arguments.
+ */
+
+/*
+ * The original and principal author of ansi2knr is L. Peter Deutsch
+ * <ghost@aladdin.com>.  Other authors are noted in the change history
+ * that follows (in reverse chronological order):
+	lpd 94-10-10 removed CONFIG_BROKETS conditional
+	lpd 94-07-16 added some conditionals to help GNU `configure',
+		suggested by Francois Pinard <pinard@iro.umontreal.ca>;
+		properly erase prototype args in function parameters,
+		contributed by Jim Avera <jima@netcom.com>;
+		correct error in writeblanks (it shouldn't erase EOLs)
+	lpd 89-xx-xx original version
+ */
+
+/* Most of the conditionals here are to make ansi2knr work with */
+/* the GNU configure machinery. */
+
+#ifdef HAVE_CONFIG_H
+# include <config.h>
+#endif
+
+#include <stdio.h>
+#include <ctype.h>
+
+#ifdef HAVE_CONFIG_H
+
+/*
+   For properly autoconfiguring ansi2knr, use AC_CONFIG_HEADER(config.h).
+   This will define HAVE_CONFIG_H and so, activate the following lines.
+ */
+
+# if STDC_HEADERS || HAVE_STRING_H
+#  include <string.h>
+# else
+#  include <strings.h>
+# endif
+
+#else /* not HAVE_CONFIG_H */
+
+/*
+   Without AC_CONFIG_HEADER, merely use <string.h> as in the original
+   Ghostscript distribution.  This loses on older BSD systems.
+ */
+
+# include <string.h>
+
+#endif /* not HAVE_CONFIG_H */
+
+#ifdef STDC_HEADERS
+# include <stdlib.h>
+#else
+/*
+   malloc and free should be declared in stdlib.h,
+   but if you've got a K&R compiler, they probably aren't.
+ */
+char *malloc();
+void free();
+#endif
+
+/* Scanning macros */
+#define isidchar(ch) (isalnum(ch) || (ch) == '_')
+#define isidfirstchar(ch) (isalpha(ch) || (ch) == '_')
+
+/* Forward references */
+char *skipspace();
+void writeblanks();
+int test1();
+int convert1();
+
+/* The main program */
+int
+main(argc, argv)
+    int argc;
+    char *argv[];
+{	FILE *in, *out;
+#define bufsize 5000			/* arbitrary size */
+	char *buf;
+	char *line;
+	int convert_varargs = 0;
+	if ( argc > 1 && argv[1][0] == '-' )
+	  {	if ( !strcmp(argv[1], "--varargs") )
+		  {	convert_varargs = 1;
+			argc--;
+			argv++;
+		  }
+		else
+		  {	fprintf(stderr, "Unrecognized switch: %s\n", argv[1]);
+			exit(1);
+		  }
+	  }
+	switch ( argc )
+	   {
+	default:
+		printf("Usage: ansi2knr [--varargs] input_file [output_file]\n");
+		exit(0);
+	case 2:
+		out = stdout;
+		break;
+	case 3:
+		out = fopen(argv[2], "w");
+		if ( out == NULL )
+		   {	fprintf(stderr, "Cannot open output file %s\n", argv[2]);
+			exit(1);
+		   }
+	   }
+	in = fopen(argv[1], "r");
+	if ( in == NULL )
+	   {	fprintf(stderr, "Cannot open input file %s\n", argv[1]);
+		exit(1);
+	   }
+	fprintf(out, "#line 1 \"%s\"\n", argv[1]);
+	buf = malloc(bufsize);
+	line = buf;
+	while ( fgets(line, (unsigned)(buf + bufsize - line), in) != NULL )
+	   {	switch ( test1(buf) )
+		   {
+		case 2:			/* a function header */
+			convert1(buf, out, 1, convert_varargs);
+			break;
+		case 1:			/* a function */
+			convert1(buf, out, 0, convert_varargs);
+			break;
+		case -1:		/* maybe the start of a function */
+			line = buf + strlen(buf);
+			if ( line != buf + (bufsize - 1) ) /* overflow check */
+				continue;
+			/* falls through */
+		default:		/* not a function */
+			fputs(buf, out);
+			break;
+		   }
+		line = buf;
+	   }
+	if ( line != buf ) fputs(buf, out);
+	free(buf);
+	fclose(out);
+	fclose(in);
+	return 0;
+}
+
+/* Skip over space and comments, in either direction. */
+char *
+skipspace(p, dir)
+    register char *p;
+    register int dir;			/* 1 for forward, -1 for backward */
+{	for ( ; ; )
+	   {	while ( isspace(*p) ) p += dir;
+		if ( !(*p == '/' && p[dir] == '*') ) break;
+		p += dir;  p += dir;
+		while ( !(*p == '*' && p[dir] == '/') )
+		   {	if ( *p == 0 ) return p;	/* multi-line comment?? */
+			p += dir;
+		   }
+		p += dir;  p += dir;
+	   }
+	return p;
+}
+
+/*
+ * Write blanks over part of a string.
+ * Don't overwrite end-of-line characters.
+ */
+void
+writeblanks(start, end)
+    char *start;
+    char *end;
+{	char *p;
+	for ( p = start; p < end; p++ )
+	  if ( *p != '\r' && *p != '\n' ) *p = ' ';
+}
+
+/*
+ * Test whether the string in buf is a function definition.
+ * The string may contain and/or end with a newline.
+ * Return as follows:
+ *	0 - definitely not a function definition;
+ *	1 - definitely a function definition;
+ *	2 - definitely a function prototype (NOT USED);
+ *	-1 - may be the beginning of a function definition,
+ *		append another line and look again.
+ * The reason we don't attempt to convert function prototypes is that
+ * Ghostscript's declaration-generating macros look too much like
+ * prototypes, and confuse the algorithms.
+ */
+int
+test1(buf)
+    char *buf;
+{	register char *p = buf;
+	char *bend;
+	char *endfn;
+	int contin;
+	if ( !isidfirstchar(*p) )
+		return 0;		/* no name at left margin */
+	bend = skipspace(buf + strlen(buf) - 1, -1);
+	switch ( *bend )
+	   {
+	case ';': contin = 0 /*2*/; break;
+	case ')': contin = 1; break;
+	case '{': return 0;		/* not a function */
+	default: contin = -1;
+	   }
+	while ( isidchar(*p) ) p++;
+	endfn = p;
+	p = skipspace(p, 1);
+	if ( *p++ != '(' )
+		return 0;		/* not a function */
+	p = skipspace(p, 1);
+	if ( *p == ')' )
+		return 0;		/* no parameters */
+	/* Check that the apparent function name isn't a keyword. */
+	/* We only need to check for keywords that could be followed */
+	/* by a left parenthesis (which, unfortunately, is most of them). */
+	   {	static char *words[] =
+		   {	"asm", "auto", "case", "char", "const", "double",
+			"extern", "float", "for", "if", "int", "long",
+			"register", "return", "short", "signed", "sizeof",
+			"static", "switch", "typedef", "unsigned",
+			"void", "volatile", "while", 0
+		   };
+		char **key = words;
+		char *kp;
+		int len = endfn - buf;
+		while ( (kp = *key) != 0 )
+		   {	if ( strlen(kp) == len && !strncmp(kp, buf, len) )
+				return 0;	/* name is a keyword */
+			key++;
+		   }
+	   }
+	return contin;
+}
+
+/* Convert a recognized function definition or header to K&R syntax. */
+int
+convert1(buf, out, header, convert_varargs)
+    char *buf;
+    FILE *out;
+    int header;			/* Boolean */
+    int convert_varargs;	/* Boolean */
+{	char *endfn;
+	register char *p;
+	char **breaks;
+	unsigned num_breaks = 2;	/* for testing */
+	char **btop;
+	char **bp;
+	char **ap;
+	char *vararg = 0;
+	/* Pre-ANSI implementations don't agree on whether strchr */
+	/* is called strchr or index, so we open-code it here. */
+	for ( endfn = buf; *(endfn++) != '('; ) ;
+top:	p = endfn;
+	breaks = (char **)malloc(sizeof(char *) * num_breaks * 2);
+	if ( breaks == 0 )
+	   {	/* Couldn't allocate break table, give up */
+		fprintf(stderr, "Unable to allocate break table!\n");
+		fputs(buf, out);
+		return -1;
+	   }
+	btop = breaks + num_breaks * 2 - 2;
+	bp = breaks;
+	/* Parse the argument list */
+	do
+	   {	int level = 0;
+		char *lp = NULL;
+		char *rp;
+		char *end = NULL;
+		if ( bp >= btop )
+		   {	/* Filled up break table. */
+			/* Allocate a bigger one and start over. */
+			free((char *)breaks);
+			num_breaks <<= 1;
+			goto top;
+		   }
+		*bp++ = p;
+		/* Find the end of the argument */
+		for ( ; end == NULL; p++ )
+		   {	switch(*p)
+			   {
+			case ',':
+				if ( !level ) end = p;
+				break;
+			case '(':
+				if ( !level ) lp = p;
+				level++;
+				break;
+			case ')':
+				if ( --level < 0 ) end = p;
+				else rp = p;
+				break;
+			case '/':
+				p = skipspace(p, 1) - 1;
+				break;
+			default:
+				;
+			   }
+		   }
+		/* Erase any embedded prototype parameters. */
+		if ( lp )
+		  writeblanks(lp + 1, rp);
+		p--;			/* back up over terminator */
+		/* Find the name being declared. */
+		/* This is complicated because of procedure and */
+		/* array modifiers. */
+		for ( ; ; )
+		   {	p = skipspace(p - 1, -1);
+			switch ( *p )
+			   {
+			case ']':	/* skip array dimension(s) */
+			case ')':	/* skip procedure args OR name */
+			   {	int level = 1;
+				while ( level )
+				 switch ( *--p )
+				   {
+				case ']': case ')': level++; break;
+				case '[': case '(': level--; break;
+				case '/': p = skipspace(p, -1) + 1; break;
+				default: ;
+				   }
+			   }
+				if ( *p == '(' && *skipspace(p + 1, 1) == '*' )
+				   {	/* We found the name being declared */
+					while ( !isidfirstchar(*p) )
+						p = skipspace(p, 1) + 1;
+					goto found;
+				   }
+				break;
+			default: goto found;
+			   }
+		   }
+found:		if ( *p == '.' && p[-1] == '.' && p[-2] == '.' )
+		  {	if ( convert_varargs )
+			  {	*bp++ = "va_alist";
+				vararg = p-2;
+			  }
+			else
+			  {	p++;
+				if ( bp == breaks + 1 )	/* sole argument */
+				  writeblanks(breaks[0], p);
+				else
+				  writeblanks(bp[-1] - 1, p);
+				bp--;
+			  }
+		   }
+		else
+		   {	while ( isidchar(*p) ) p--;
+			*bp++ = p+1;
+		   }
+		p = end;
+	   }
+	while ( *p++ == ',' );
+	*bp = p;
+	/* Make a special check for 'void' arglist */
+	if ( bp == breaks+2 )
+	   {	p = skipspace(breaks[0], 1);
+		if ( !strncmp(p, "void", 4) )
+		   {	p = skipspace(p+4, 1);
+			if ( p == breaks[2] - 1 )
+			   {	bp = breaks;	/* yup, pretend arglist is empty */
+				writeblanks(breaks[0], p + 1);
+			   }
+		   }
+	   }
+	/* Put out the function name and left parenthesis. */
+	p = buf;
+	while ( p != endfn ) putc(*p, out), p++;
+	/* Put out the declaration. */
+	if ( header )
+	  {	fputs(");", out);
+		for ( p = breaks[0]; *p; p++ )
+		  if ( *p == '\r' || *p == '\n' )
+		    putc(*p, out);
+	  }
+	else
+	  {	for ( ap = breaks+1; ap < bp; ap += 2 )
+		  {	p = *ap;
+			while ( isidchar(*p) )
+			  putc(*p, out), p++;
+			if ( ap < bp - 1 )
+			  fputs(", ", out);
+		  }
+		fputs(")  ", out);
+		/* Put out the argument declarations */
+		for ( ap = breaks+2; ap <= bp; ap += 2 )
+		  (*ap)[-1] = ';';
+		if ( vararg != 0 )
+		  {	*vararg = 0;
+			fputs(breaks[0], out);		/* any prior args */
+			fputs("va_dcl", out);		/* the final arg */
+			fputs(bp[0], out);
+		  }
+		else
+		  fputs(breaks[0], out);
+	  }
+	free((char *)breaks);
+	return 0;
+}
diff --git a/common.texi b/common.texi
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..d480dee0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/common.texi
@@ -0,0 +1,329 @@
+\input texinfo.tex @c -*-texinfo-*-
+@c
+@c $Id: common.texi,v 1.1 1999/05/05 19:23:47 mdw Exp $
+@c
+@c Documentation for `common'
+@c
+@c (c) 1997 Mark Wooding
+@c
+
+@c ----- Licensing notice ---------------------------------------------------
+@c
+@c This file is part of the Common Files Distribution (`common').
+@c
+@c `Common' is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
+@c it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
+@c the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
+@c (at your option) any later version.
+@c
+@c `Common' is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+@c but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+@c MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the
+@c GNU General Public License for more details.
+@c
+@c You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+@c along with `common'; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation,
+@c Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.
+
+@c ----- Standard boilerplate header ----------------------------------------
+
+@c --- Formatting header ---
+
+@c %**start of header
+@setfilename common.info
+@settitle The Common Files Distribution
+@paragraphindent 0
+@iftex
+@input texinice
+@afourpaper
+@end iftex
+@include version.texi
+@c %**end of header
+
+@c --- Info directory entry ---
+
+@direntry
+* Common: (common).             The Common Files Distribution.
+@end direntry
+
+@c ----- Introductory stuff and copyright pages -----------------------------
+@c
+@c Yes indeed, by the way: I'm willing to allow a translation approved
+@c by the FSF, not me.  I can't be bothered to vet translations.
+
+@c --- Info version ---
+
+@ifinfo
+
+This file documents version @value{VERSION} of the Common Files Distribution.
+
+Copyright (c) 1997 Mark Wooding
+
+Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of this
+manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice are
+preserved on all copies.
+
+@ignore
+Permission is granted to process this file through TeX and print the
+results, provided the printed document carries a copying permission
+notice identical to this one except for the removal of this paragraph
+(this paragraph not being relevant to the printed manual).
+
+@end ignore
+Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this
+manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided also that the
+sections entitled `Copying' and `GNU General Public License' are
+included exactly as in the original, and provided that the entire
+resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a permission
+notice identical to this one.
+
+Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this manual
+into another language, under the above conditions for modified versions,
+except that this permission notice may be stated in a translation
+approved by the Free Software Foundation.
+
+@end ifinfo
+
+@c --- Printed version ---
+
+@titlepage
+@title The Common Files Distribution
+@subtitle version @value{VERSION}
+@author Mark Wooding
+@page
+@vskip 0pt plus 1 filll
+
+Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of this
+manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice are
+preserved on all copies.
+
+Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this
+manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided also that the
+sections entitled `Copying' and `GNU General Public License' are
+included exactly as in the original, and provided that the entire
+resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a permission
+notice identical to this one.
+
+Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this manual
+into another language, under the above conditions for modified versions,
+except that this permission notice may be stated in a translation
+approved by the Free Software Foundation.
+
+@end titlepage
+
+
+@c --------------------------------------------------------------------------
+@ifinfo
+@node Top, Copying, (dir), (dir)
+@unnumbered The Common Files Distribution
+
+
+The Common Files Distribution provides a convenient way to manage files
+shared between a number of developments.
+
+This manual documents version @value{VERSION} of the Common Files
+Distribution.
+
+@end ifinfo
+
+@menu
+* Copying::                     
+* Introduction::                
+* The file repository::         
+* Text libraries::              
+
+ --- The Detailed Node Listing ---
+
+The file repository
+
+* The mklinks command::         
+* The findlinks command::       
+
+Text libraries
+
+* Anatomy::                     Structure of a text library.
+* The txtlib program::          
+@end menu
+
+@c --------------------------------------------------------------------------
+@node Copying, Introduction, Top, Top
+@unnumbered The GNU General Public License
+
+@include gpl.texi
+
+@c --------------------------------------------------------------------------
+@node Introduction, The file repository, Copying, Top
+@unnumbered Introduction
+
+
+When you have a number of development trees, managing files which are common
+to all of them starts to become a real pain.  When a new version of some file
+comes out, checking out all your source directories, replacing the old
+version with the new one, and committing all the changes back gets to be
+very tiresome rather quickly.
+
+The Common File Distribution attempts to be a solution to some of the
+problems caused sharing files between source trees.  It provides a single
+repository for shared files, and lets you create links to the shared copies
+from your source trees.  It also provides a simple method for constructing
+text files from small bits of `text libraries'.
+
+The whole lot is held together by a collection of small shell scripts.  They
+can easily be modified to suit the requirements of an individual site, or
+used as the basis of other similar scripts.
+
+
+@c --------------------------------------------------------------------------
+@node The file repository, Text libraries, Introduction, Top
+@chapter The file repository
+
+
+When the Common File Distribution is installed, it creates a repository where
+shared files can be placed, and it places a few standard GNU files there.  By
+default, the repository is @file{@var{prefix}/share/common}, although this
+can be set using the @code{--datadir} option to the configuration script.
+
+You can place your own files in the repository if you like.  If you do,
+they'll be treated in exactly the same way as ones in the distribution.
+
+The command @code{mklinks} reads a list of filenames and creates symbolic
+links to the corresponding names in the repository.  This ensures that when a
+file in the repository gets updated, any source trees automatically use the
+new version.  Obviously, when you build a source distribution, you must
+ensure that links are followed, rather than saved as links; the @code{h}
+option to @code{tar} does this (this is the default in Automake; @pxref{Top,
+, Overview, automake, GNU Automake}).
+
+The command @code{findlinks} scans the current directory (and its
+subdirectories) for files whose names match those in the repository.
+
+@menu
+* The mklinks command::         
+* The findlinks command::       
+@end menu
+
+
+
+@node The mklinks command, The findlinks command, The file repository, The file repository
+@section The @code{mklinks} command
+
+Links into the file repository are made with the @code{mklinks} command:
+
+@example
+mklinks [@var{file}]...
+@end example
+
+If you don't specify any @code{file}s, it reads @file{.links} from the
+current directory; you can pass @samp{-} to read standard input.  The program
+expects the files to contain a list of filenames; for each name read, it
+creates a symbolic link to the appropriate file in the repository.
+
+You can create a list of files which probably need linking using the
+@code{findlinks} command.  @xref{The findlinks command}.
+
+
+
+@node The findlinks command,  , The mklinks command, The file repository
+@section The @code{findlinks} command
+
+The @code{findlinks} searches the current directory and any subdirectories
+and writes to standard output a list of files whose names match files in the
+file repository.  It takes no arguments, although typically output will be
+redirected to the file @file{.links}, which the @code{mklinks} command reads
+by default:
+
+@example
+findlinks >.links
+@end example
+
+
+@c --------------------------------------------------------------------------
+@node Text libraries,  , The file repository, Top
+@chapter Text libraries
+
+
+Just being able to share files isn't always good enough: it's sometimes
+useful to able to share small parts of files.  The Common Files Distribution
+comes with a simple system for extracting requested parts from a @dfn{text
+library}.
+
+
+@menu
+* Anatomy::                     Structure of a text library.
+* The txtlib program::          
+@end menu
+
+
+
+@node Anatomy, The txtlib program, Text libraries, Text libraries
+@section Anatomy of a library file
+
+Text libraries contain a @dfn{header} followed by a number of @dfn{chunks}.
+The start of a chunk is marked by a line containing a string of the form
+@samp{*@@-@var{name}-@@*}; the chunk continues until the start of the next
+chunk, or the end of the file.  The header is simply the text preceding the
+first chunk.
+
+Here's a simple example of a text library.
+
+@example
+% -*-tex-*-
+%
+% Collection of useful macros
+%
+
+% *@@-todo-@@*
+
+\newcommand\todo[1]@{%
+  \par%
+  \dimen@@\linewidth%
+  \advance\dimen@@-\tw@@\fboxsep%
+  \advance\dimen@@-\tw@@\fboxrule%
+  \fbox@{\expandafter\parbox\expandafter@{\the\dimen@@@}@{%
+    \begin@{note@}[To do:]%
+    #1%
+    \end@{note@}%
+  @}@}%
+  \par%
+@}
+
+% *@@-indexing-@@*
+
+\newindex@{default@}@{idx@}@{ind@}@{Index@}
+\atdef^@{\index@}
+\atdef_@{\index*@}
+@end example
+
+The file contains a short header containing a line to tell Emacs what mode
+to use when editing it and a brief description of the file.  It contains two
+chunks, named @code{todo} and @code{indexing}
+
+
+@node The txtlib program,  , Anatomy, Text libraries
+@section The @code{txtlib} program
+
+The @code{txtlib} program can be used to perform some simple operations on
+text libraries:
+
+@example
+txtlib [-x] [-o @var{file}] @var{library}...
+txtlib -l @var{library}...
+@end example
+
+By default, or if the @code{-x} option is given, @code{txtlib} extracts
+chunks from libraries.  It reads a list of chunk names from standard input,
+one per line.  It then examines each @var{library} named on the command line,
+and extracts the requested chunks, writing them to standard output, or to a
+named file.  Note that the chunks are extracted in the order they appear in
+the libraries, not the order in which their chunk names were listed.
+
+If the @code{-l} option is given, @code{txtlib} scans each @var{library} in
+turn, writing the names of all the chunks it finds to standard output.
+
+
+
+
+@c --------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+@contents
+@bye
diff --git a/config.guess b/config.guess
new file mode 100755
index 00000000..ea44a2a9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/config.guess
@@ -0,0 +1,740 @@
+#! /bin/sh
+# Attempt to guess a canonical system name.
+#   Copyright (C) 1992, 93, 94, 95, 96, 1997 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+#
+# This file is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it
+# under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
+# the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
+# (at your option) any later version.
+#
+# This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but
+# WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+# MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+# General Public License for more details.
+#
+# You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+# along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
+# Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.
+#
+# As a special exception to the GNU General Public License, if you
+# distribute this file as part of a program that contains a
+# configuration script generated by Autoconf, you may include it under
+# the same distribution terms that you use for the rest of that program.
+
+# Written by Per Bothner <bothner@cygnus.com>.
+# The master version of this file is at the FSF in /home/gd/gnu/lib.
+#
+# This script attempts to guess a canonical system name similar to
+# config.sub.  If it succeeds, it prints the system name on stdout, and
+# exits with 0.  Otherwise, it exits with 1.
+#
+# The plan is that this can be called by configure scripts if you
+# don't specify an explicit system type (host/target name).
+#
+# Only a few systems have been added to this list; please add others
+# (but try to keep the structure clean).
+#
+
+# This is needed to find uname on a Pyramid OSx when run in the BSD universe.
+# (ghazi@noc.rutgers.edu 8/24/94.)
+if (test -f /.attbin/uname) >/dev/null 2>&1 ; then
+	PATH=$PATH:/.attbin ; export PATH
+fi
+
+UNAME_MACHINE=`(uname -m) 2>/dev/null` || UNAME_MACHINE=unknown
+UNAME_RELEASE=`(uname -r) 2>/dev/null` || UNAME_RELEASE=unknown
+UNAME_SYSTEM=`(uname -s) 2>/dev/null` || UNAME_SYSTEM=unknown
+UNAME_VERSION=`(uname -v) 2>/dev/null` || UNAME_VERSION=unknown
+
+trap 'rm -f dummy.c dummy.o dummy; exit 1' 1 2 15
+
+# Note: order is significant - the case branches are not exclusive.
+
+case "${UNAME_MACHINE}:${UNAME_SYSTEM}:${UNAME_RELEASE}:${UNAME_VERSION}" in
+    alpha:OSF1:*:*)
+	# A Vn.n version is a released version.
+	# A Tn.n version is a released field test version.
+	# A Xn.n version is an unreleased experimental baselevel.
+	# 1.2 uses "1.2" for uname -r.
+	echo alpha-dec-osf`echo ${UNAME_RELEASE} | sed -e 's/^[VTX]//'`
+	exit 0 ;;
+    21064:Windows_NT:50:3)
+	echo alpha-dec-winnt3.5
+	exit 0 ;;
+    Amiga*:UNIX_System_V:4.0:*)
+	echo m68k-cbm-sysv4
+	exit 0;;
+    amiga:NetBSD:*:*)
+      echo m68k-cbm-netbsd${UNAME_RELEASE}
+      exit 0 ;;
+    amiga:OpenBSD:*:*)
+	echo m68k-unknown-openbsd${UNAME_RELEASE}
+	exit 0 ;;
+    arc64:OpenBSD:*:*)
+	echo mips64el-unknown-openbsd${UNAME_RELEASE}
+	exit 0 ;;
+    arc:OpenBSD:*:*)
+	echo mipsel-unknown-openbsd${UNAME_RELEASE}
+	exit 0 ;;
+    hkmips:OpenBSD:*:*)
+	echo mips-unknown-openbsd${UNAME_RELEASE}
+	exit 0 ;;
+    pmax:OpenBSD:*:*)
+	echo mipsel-unknown-openbsd${UNAME_RELEASE}
+	exit 0 ;;
+    sgi:OpenBSD:*:*)
+	echo mips-unknown-openbsd${UNAME_RELEASE}
+	exit 0 ;;
+    wgrisc:OpenBSD:*:*)
+	echo mipsel-unknown-openbsd${UNAME_RELEASE}
+	exit 0 ;;
+    arm:RISC*:1.[012]*:*|arm:riscix:1.[012]*:*)
+	echo arm-acorn-riscix${UNAME_RELEASE}
+	exit 0;;
+    SR2?01:HI-UX/MPP:*:*)
+	echo hppa1.1-hitachi-hiuxmpp
+	exit 0;;
+    Pyramid*:OSx*:*:*|MIS*:OSx*:*:*)
+	# akee@wpdis03.wpafb.af.mil (Earle F. Ake) contributed MIS and NILE.
+	if test "`(/bin/universe) 2>/dev/null`" = att ; then
+		echo pyramid-pyramid-sysv3
+	else
+		echo pyramid-pyramid-bsd
+	fi
+	exit 0 ;;
+    NILE:*:*:dcosx)
+	echo pyramid-pyramid-svr4
+	exit 0 ;;
+    sun4*:SunOS:5.*:* | tadpole*:SunOS:5.*:*)
+	echo sparc-sun-solaris2`echo ${UNAME_RELEASE}|sed -e 's/[^.]*//'`
+	exit 0 ;;
+    i86pc:SunOS:5.*:*)
+	echo i386-pc-solaris2`echo ${UNAME_RELEASE}|sed -e 's/[^.]*//'`
+	exit 0 ;;
+    sun4*:SunOS:6*:*)
+	# According to config.sub, this is the proper way to canonicalize
+	# SunOS6.  Hard to guess exactly what SunOS6 will be like, but
+	# it's likely to be more like Solaris than SunOS4.
+	echo sparc-sun-solaris3`echo ${UNAME_RELEASE}|sed -e 's/[^.]*//'`
+	exit 0 ;;
+    sun4*:SunOS:*:*)
+	case "`/usr/bin/arch -k`" in
+	    Series*|S4*)
+		UNAME_RELEASE=`uname -v`
+		;;
+	esac
+	# Japanese Language versions have a version number like `4.1.3-JL'.
+	echo sparc-sun-sunos`echo ${UNAME_RELEASE}|sed -e 's/-/_/'`
+	exit 0 ;;
+    sun3*:SunOS:*:*)
+	echo m68k-sun-sunos${UNAME_RELEASE}
+	exit 0 ;;
+    aushp:SunOS:*:*)
+	echo sparc-auspex-sunos${UNAME_RELEASE}
+	exit 0 ;;
+    atari*:NetBSD:*:*)
+	echo m68k-atari-netbsd${UNAME_RELEASE}
+	exit 0 ;;
+    atari*:OpenBSD:*:*)
+	echo m68k-unknown-openbsd${UNAME_RELEASE}
+	exit 0 ;;
+    sun3*:NetBSD:*:*)
+	echo m68k-sun-netbsd${UNAME_RELEASE}
+	exit 0 ;;
+    sun3*:OpenBSD:*:*)
+	echo m68k-unknown-openbsd${UNAME_RELEASE}
+	exit 0 ;;
+    mac68k:NetBSD:*:*)
+	echo m68k-apple-netbsd${UNAME_RELEASE}
+	exit 0 ;;
+    mac68k:OpenBSD:*:*)
+	echo m68k-unknown-openbsd${UNAME_RELEASE}
+	exit 0 ;;
+    mvme68k:OpenBSD:*:*)
+	echo m68k-unknown-openbsd${UNAME_RELEASE}
+	exit 0 ;;
+    mvme88k:OpenBSD:*:*)
+	echo m88k-unknown-openbsd${UNAME_RELEASE}
+	exit 0 ;;
+    powerpc:machten:*:*)
+	echo powerpc-apple-machten${UNAME_RELEASE}
+	exit 0 ;;
+    RISC*:Mach:*:*)
+	echo mips-dec-mach_bsd4.3
+	exit 0 ;;
+    RISC*:ULTRIX:*:*)
+	echo mips-dec-ultrix${UNAME_RELEASE}
+	exit 0 ;;
+    VAX*:ULTRIX*:*:*)
+	echo vax-dec-ultrix${UNAME_RELEASE}
+	exit 0 ;;
+    2020:CLIX:*:*)
+	echo clipper-intergraph-clix${UNAME_RELEASE}
+	exit 0 ;;
+    mips:*:*:UMIPS | mips:*:*:RISCos)
+	sed 's/^	//' << EOF >dummy.c
+	int main (argc, argv) int argc; char **argv; {
+	#if defined (host_mips) && defined (MIPSEB)
+	#if defined (SYSTYPE_SYSV)
+	  printf ("mips-mips-riscos%ssysv\n", argv[1]); exit (0);
+	#endif
+	#if defined (SYSTYPE_SVR4)
+	  printf ("mips-mips-riscos%ssvr4\n", argv[1]); exit (0);
+	#endif
+	#if defined (SYSTYPE_BSD43) || defined(SYSTYPE_BSD)
+	  printf ("mips-mips-riscos%sbsd\n", argv[1]); exit (0);
+	#endif
+	#endif
+	  exit (-1);
+	}
+EOF
+	${CC-cc} dummy.c -o dummy \
+	  && ./dummy `echo "${UNAME_RELEASE}" | sed -n 's/\([0-9]*\).*/\1/p'` \
+	  && rm dummy.c dummy && exit 0
+	rm -f dummy.c dummy
+	echo mips-mips-riscos${UNAME_RELEASE}
+	exit 0 ;;
+    Night_Hawk:Power_UNIX:*:*)
+	echo powerpc-harris-powerunix
+	exit 0 ;;
+    m88k:CX/UX:7*:*)
+	echo m88k-harris-cxux7
+	exit 0 ;;
+    m88k:*:4*:R4*)
+	echo m88k-motorola-sysv4
+	exit 0 ;;
+    m88k:*:3*:R3*)
+	echo m88k-motorola-sysv3
+	exit 0 ;;
+    AViiON:dgux:*:*)
+        # DG/UX returns AViiON for all architectures
+        UNAME_PROCESSOR=`/usr/bin/uname -p`
+        if [ $UNAME_PROCESSOR = mc88100 -o $UNAME_PROCESSOR = mc88110 ] ; then
+	if [ ${TARGET_BINARY_INTERFACE}x = m88kdguxelfx \
+	     -o ${TARGET_BINARY_INTERFACE}x = x ] ; then
+		echo m88k-dg-dgux${UNAME_RELEASE}
+	else
+		echo m88k-dg-dguxbcs${UNAME_RELEASE}
+	fi
+        else echo i586-dg-dgux${UNAME_RELEASE}
+        fi
+ 	exit 0 ;;
+    M88*:DolphinOS:*:*)	# DolphinOS (SVR3)
+	echo m88k-dolphin-sysv3
+	exit 0 ;;
+    M88*:*:R3*:*)
+	# Delta 88k system running SVR3
+	echo m88k-motorola-sysv3
+	exit 0 ;;
+    XD88*:*:*:*) # Tektronix XD88 system running UTekV (SVR3)
+	echo m88k-tektronix-sysv3
+	exit 0 ;;
+    Tek43[0-9][0-9]:UTek:*:*) # Tektronix 4300 system running UTek (BSD)
+	echo m68k-tektronix-bsd
+	exit 0 ;;
+    *:IRIX*:*:*)
+	echo mips-sgi-irix`echo ${UNAME_RELEASE}|sed -e 's/-/_/g'`
+	exit 0 ;;
+    ????????:AIX?:[12].1:2)   # AIX 2.2.1 or AIX 2.1.1 is RT/PC AIX.
+	echo romp-ibm-aix      # uname -m gives an 8 hex-code CPU id
+	exit 0 ;;              # Note that: echo "'`uname -s`'" gives 'AIX '
+    i?86:AIX:*:*)
+	echo i386-ibm-aix
+	exit 0 ;;
+    *:AIX:2:3)
+	if grep bos325 /usr/include/stdio.h >/dev/null 2>&1; then
+		sed 's/^		//' << EOF >dummy.c
+		#include <sys/systemcfg.h>
+
+		main()
+			{
+			if (!__power_pc())
+				exit(1);
+			puts("powerpc-ibm-aix3.2.5");
+			exit(0);
+			}
+EOF
+		${CC-cc} dummy.c -o dummy && ./dummy && rm dummy.c dummy && exit 0
+		rm -f dummy.c dummy
+		echo rs6000-ibm-aix3.2.5
+	elif grep bos324 /usr/include/stdio.h >/dev/null 2>&1; then
+		echo rs6000-ibm-aix3.2.4
+	else
+		echo rs6000-ibm-aix3.2
+	fi
+	exit 0 ;;
+    *:AIX:*:4)
+	if /usr/sbin/lsattr -EHl proc0 | grep POWER >/dev/null 2>&1; then
+		IBM_ARCH=rs6000
+	else
+		IBM_ARCH=powerpc
+	fi
+	if [ -x /usr/bin/oslevel ] ; then
+		IBM_REV=`/usr/bin/oslevel`
+	else
+		IBM_REV=4.${UNAME_RELEASE}
+	fi
+	echo ${IBM_ARCH}-ibm-aix${IBM_REV}
+	exit 0 ;;
+    *:AIX:*:*)
+	echo rs6000-ibm-aix
+	exit 0 ;;
+    ibmrt:4.4BSD:*|romp-ibm:BSD:*)
+	echo romp-ibm-bsd4.4
+	exit 0 ;;
+    ibmrt:*BSD:*|romp-ibm:BSD:*)            # covers RT/PC NetBSD and
+	echo romp-ibm-bsd${UNAME_RELEASE}   # 4.3 with uname added to
+	exit 0 ;;                           # report: romp-ibm BSD 4.3
+    *:BOSX:*:*)
+	echo rs6000-bull-bosx
+	exit 0 ;;
+    DPX/2?00:B.O.S.:*:*)
+	echo m68k-bull-sysv3
+	exit 0 ;;
+    9000/[34]??:4.3bsd:1.*:*)
+	echo m68k-hp-bsd
+	exit 0 ;;
+    hp300:4.4BSD:*:* | 9000/[34]??:4.3bsd:2.*:*)
+	echo m68k-hp-bsd4.4
+	exit 0 ;;
+    9000/[3478]??:HP-UX:*:*)
+	case "${UNAME_MACHINE}" in
+	    9000/31? )            HP_ARCH=m68000 ;;
+	    9000/[34]?? )         HP_ARCH=m68k ;;
+	    9000/7?? | 9000/8?[1679] ) HP_ARCH=hppa1.1 ;;
+	    9000/8?? )            HP_ARCH=hppa1.0 ;;
+	esac
+	HPUX_REV=`echo ${UNAME_RELEASE}|sed -e 's/[^.]*.[0B]*//'`
+	echo ${HP_ARCH}-hp-hpux${HPUX_REV}
+	exit 0 ;;
+    3050*:HI-UX:*:*)
+	sed 's/^	//' << EOF >dummy.c
+	#include <unistd.h>
+	int
+	main ()
+	{
+	  long cpu = sysconf (_SC_CPU_VERSION);
+	  /* The order matters, because CPU_IS_HP_MC68K erroneously returns
+	     true for CPU_PA_RISC1_0.  CPU_IS_PA_RISC returns correct
+	     results, however.  */
+	  if (CPU_IS_PA_RISC (cpu))
+	    {
+	      switch (cpu)
+		{
+		  case CPU_PA_RISC1_0: puts ("hppa1.0-hitachi-hiuxwe2"); break;
+		  case CPU_PA_RISC1_1: puts ("hppa1.1-hitachi-hiuxwe2"); break;
+		  case CPU_PA_RISC2_0: puts ("hppa2.0-hitachi-hiuxwe2"); break;
+		  default: puts ("hppa-hitachi-hiuxwe2"); break;
+		}
+	    }
+	  else if (CPU_IS_HP_MC68K (cpu))
+	    puts ("m68k-hitachi-hiuxwe2");
+	  else puts ("unknown-hitachi-hiuxwe2");
+	  exit (0);
+	}
+EOF
+	${CC-cc} dummy.c -o dummy && ./dummy && rm dummy.c dummy && exit 0
+	rm -f dummy.c dummy
+	echo unknown-hitachi-hiuxwe2
+	exit 0 ;;
+    9000/7??:4.3bsd:*:* | 9000/8?[79]:4.3bsd:*:* )
+	echo hppa1.1-hp-bsd
+	exit 0 ;;
+    9000/8??:4.3bsd:*:*)
+	echo hppa1.0-hp-bsd
+	exit 0 ;;
+    hp7??:OSF1:*:* | hp8?[79]:OSF1:*:* )
+	echo hppa1.1-hp-osf
+	exit 0 ;;
+    hp8??:OSF1:*:*)
+	echo hppa1.0-hp-osf
+	exit 0 ;;
+    i?86:OSF1:*:*)
+	if [ -x /usr/sbin/sysversion ] ; then
+	    echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-unknown-osf1mk
+	else
+	    echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-unknown-osf1
+	fi
+	exit 0 ;;
+    parisc*:Lites*:*:*)
+	echo hppa1.1-hp-lites
+	exit 0 ;;
+    C1*:ConvexOS:*:* | convex:ConvexOS:C1*:*)
+	echo c1-convex-bsd
+        exit 0 ;;
+    C2*:ConvexOS:*:* | convex:ConvexOS:C2*:*)
+	if getsysinfo -f scalar_acc
+	then echo c32-convex-bsd
+	else echo c2-convex-bsd
+	fi
+        exit 0 ;;
+    C34*:ConvexOS:*:* | convex:ConvexOS:C34*:*)
+	echo c34-convex-bsd
+        exit 0 ;;
+    C38*:ConvexOS:*:* | convex:ConvexOS:C38*:*)
+	echo c38-convex-bsd
+        exit 0 ;;
+    C4*:ConvexOS:*:* | convex:ConvexOS:C4*:*)
+	echo c4-convex-bsd
+        exit 0 ;;
+    CRAY*X-MP:*:*:*)
+	echo xmp-cray-unicos
+        exit 0 ;;
+    CRAY*Y-MP:*:*:*)
+	echo ymp-cray-unicos${UNAME_RELEASE}
+	exit 0 ;;
+    CRAY*[A-Z]90:*:*:*)
+	echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-cray-unicos${UNAME_RELEASE} \
+	| sed -e 's/CRAY.*\([A-Z]90\)/\1/' \
+	      -e y/ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ/abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz/
+	exit 0 ;;
+    CRAY*TS:*:*:*)
+	echo t90-cray-unicos${UNAME_RELEASE}
+	exit 0 ;;
+    CRAY-2:*:*:*)
+	echo cray2-cray-unicos
+        exit 0 ;;
+    F300:UNIX_System_V:*:*)
+        FUJITSU_SYS=`uname -p | tr [A-Z] [a-z] | sed -e 's/\///'`
+        FUJITSU_REL=`echo ${UNAME_RELEASE} | sed -e 's/ /_/'`
+        echo "f300-fujitsu-${FUJITSU_SYS}${FUJITSU_REL}"
+        exit 0 ;;
+    F301:UNIX_System_V:*:*)
+       echo f301-fujitsu-uxpv`echo $UNAME_RELEASE | sed 's/ .*//'`
+       exit 0 ;;
+    hp3[0-9][05]:NetBSD:*:*)
+	echo m68k-hp-netbsd${UNAME_RELEASE}
+	exit 0 ;;
+    hp300:OpenBSD:*:*)
+	echo m68k-unknown-openbsd${UNAME_RELEASE}
+	exit 0 ;;
+    i?86:BSD/386:*:* | *:BSD/OS:*:*)
+	echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-pc-bsdi${UNAME_RELEASE}
+	exit 0 ;;
+    *:FreeBSD:*:*)
+	echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-unknown-freebsd`echo ${UNAME_RELEASE}|sed -e 's/[-(].*//'`
+	exit 0 ;;
+    *:NetBSD:*:*)
+	echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-unknown-netbsd`echo ${UNAME_RELEASE}|sed -e 's/[-_].*/\./'`
+	exit 0 ;;
+    *:OpenBSD:*:*)
+	echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-unknown-openbsd`echo ${UNAME_RELEASE}|sed -e 's/[-_].*/\./'`
+	exit 0 ;;
+    i*:CYGWIN*:*)
+	echo i386-pc-cygwin32
+	exit 0 ;;
+    p*:CYGWIN*:*)
+	echo powerpcle-unknown-cygwin32
+	exit 0 ;;
+    prep*:SunOS:5.*:*)
+	echo powerpcle-unknown-solaris2`echo ${UNAME_RELEASE}|sed -e 's/[^.]*//'`
+	exit 0 ;;
+    *:GNU:*:*)
+	echo `echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}|sed -e 's,[-/].*$,,'`-unknown-gnu`echo ${UNAME_RELEASE}|sed -e 's,/.*$,,'`
+	exit 0 ;;
+    *:Linux:*:*)
+	# The BFD linker knows what the default object file format is, so
+	# first see if it will tell us.
+	ld_help_string=`ld --help 2>&1`
+	if echo "$ld_help_string" | grep >/dev/null 2>&1 "supported emulations: elf_i.86"; then
+	  echo "${UNAME_MACHINE}-pc-linux-gnu" ; exit 0
+	elif echo "$ld_help_string" | grep >/dev/null 2>&1 "supported emulations: i.86linux"; then
+	  echo "${UNAME_MACHINE}-pc-linux-gnuaout" ; exit 0
+	elif echo "$ld_help_string" | grep >/dev/null 2>&1 "supported emulations: i.86coff"; then
+	  echo "${UNAME_MACHINE}-pc-linux-gnucoff" ; exit 0
+	elif echo "$ld_help_string" | grep >/dev/null 2>&1 "supported emulations: m68kelf"; then
+	  echo "${UNAME_MACHINE}-unknown-linux-gnu" ; exit 0
+	elif echo "$ld_help_string" | grep >/dev/null 2>&1 "supported emulations: m68klinux"; then
+	  echo "${UNAME_MACHINE}-unknown-linux-gnuaout" ; exit 0
+	elif echo "$ld_help_string" | grep >/dev/null 2>&1 "supported emulations: elf32ppc"; then
+	  echo "powerpc-unknown-linux-gnu" ; exit 0
+	elif test "${UNAME_MACHINE}" = "alpha" ; then
+	  echo alpha-unknown-linux-gnu ; exit 0
+	elif test "${UNAME_MACHINE}" = "sparc" ; then
+	  echo sparc-unknown-linux-gnu ; exit 0
+	elif test "${UNAME_MACHINE}" = "mips" ; then
+	  cat >dummy.c <<EOF
+main(argc, argv)
+int argc;
+char *argv[];
+{
+#ifdef __MIPSEB__
+  printf ("%s-unknown-linux-gnu\n", argv[1]);
+#endif
+#ifdef __MIPSEL__
+  printf ("%sel-unknown-linux-gnu\n", argv[1]);
+#endif
+  return 0;
+}
+EOF
+	  ${CC-cc} dummy.c -o dummy 2>/dev/null && ./dummy "${UNAME_MACHINE}" && rm dummy.c dummy && exit 0
+	  rm -f dummy.c dummy
+	else
+	  # Either a pre-BFD a.out linker (linux-gnuoldld) or one that does not give us
+	  # useful --help.  Gcc wants to distinguish between linux-gnuoldld and linux-gnuaout.
+	  test ! -d /usr/lib/ldscripts/. \
+	    && echo "${UNAME_MACHINE}-pc-linux-gnuoldld" && exit 0
+	  # Determine whether the default compiler is a.out or elf
+	  cat >dummy.c <<EOF
+main(argc, argv)
+int argc;
+char *argv[];
+{
+#ifdef __ELF__
+  printf ("%s-pc-linux-gnu\n", argv[1]);
+#else
+  printf ("%s-pc-linux-gnuaout\n", argv[1]);
+#endif
+  return 0;
+}
+EOF
+	  ${CC-cc} dummy.c -o dummy 2>/dev/null && ./dummy "${UNAME_MACHINE}" && rm dummy.c dummy && exit 0
+	  rm -f dummy.c dummy
+	fi ;;
+# ptx 4.0 does uname -s correctly, with DYNIX/ptx in there.  earlier versions
+# are messed up and put the nodename in both sysname and nodename.
+    i?86:DYNIX/ptx:4*:*)
+	echo i386-sequent-sysv4
+	exit 0 ;;
+    i?86:*:4.*:* | i?86:SYSTEM_V:4.*:*)
+	if grep Novell /usr/include/link.h >/dev/null 2>/dev/null; then
+		echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-univel-sysv${UNAME_RELEASE}
+	else
+		echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-pc-sysv${UNAME_RELEASE}
+	fi
+	exit 0 ;;
+    i?86:*:3.2:*)
+	if test -f /usr/options/cb.name; then
+		UNAME_REL=`sed -n 's/.*Version //p' </usr/options/cb.name`
+		echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-pc-isc$UNAME_REL
+	elif /bin/uname -X 2>/dev/null >/dev/null ; then
+		UNAME_REL=`(/bin/uname -X|egrep Release|sed -e 's/.*= //')`
+		(/bin/uname -X|egrep i80486 >/dev/null) && UNAME_MACHINE=i486
+		(/bin/uname -X|egrep '^Machine.*Pentium' >/dev/null) \
+			&& UNAME_MACHINE=i586
+		echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-pc-sco$UNAME_REL
+	else
+		echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-pc-sysv32
+	fi
+	exit 0 ;;
+    Intel:Mach:3*:*)
+	echo i386-pc-mach3
+	exit 0 ;;
+    paragon:*:*:*)
+	echo i860-intel-osf1
+	exit 0 ;;
+    i860:*:4.*:*) # i860-SVR4
+	if grep Stardent /usr/include/sys/uadmin.h >/dev/null 2>&1 ; then
+	  echo i860-stardent-sysv${UNAME_RELEASE} # Stardent Vistra i860-SVR4
+	else # Add other i860-SVR4 vendors below as they are discovered.
+	  echo i860-unknown-sysv${UNAME_RELEASE}  # Unknown i860-SVR4
+	fi
+	exit 0 ;;
+    mini*:CTIX:SYS*5:*)
+	# "miniframe"
+	echo m68010-convergent-sysv
+	exit 0 ;;
+    M68*:*:R3V[567]*:*)
+	test -r /sysV68 && echo 'm68k-motorola-sysv' && exit 0 ;;
+    3[34]??:*:4.0:3.0 | 3[34]??,*:*:4.0:3.0 | 4850:*:4.0:3.0)
+	OS_REL=''
+	test -r /etc/.relid \
+	&& OS_REL=.`sed -n 's/[^ ]* [^ ]* \([0-9][0-9]\).*/\1/p' < /etc/.relid`
+	/bin/uname -p 2>/dev/null | grep 86 >/dev/null \
+	  && echo i486-ncr-sysv4.3${OS_REL} && exit 0
+	/bin/uname -p 2>/dev/null | /bin/grep entium >/dev/null \
+	  && echo i586-ncr-sysv4.3${OS_REL} && exit 0 ;;
+    3[34]??:*:4.0:* | 3[34]??,*:*:4.0:*)
+        /bin/uname -p 2>/dev/null | grep 86 >/dev/null \
+          && echo i486-ncr-sysv4 && exit 0 ;;
+    m68*:LynxOS:2.*:*)
+	echo m68k-unknown-lynxos${UNAME_RELEASE}
+	exit 0 ;;
+    mc68030:UNIX_System_V:4.*:*)
+	echo m68k-atari-sysv4
+	exit 0 ;;
+    i?86:LynxOS:2.*:*)
+	echo i386-unknown-lynxos${UNAME_RELEASE}
+	exit 0 ;;
+    TSUNAMI:LynxOS:2.*:*)
+	echo sparc-unknown-lynxos${UNAME_RELEASE}
+	exit 0 ;;
+    rs6000:LynxOS:2.*:* | PowerPC:LynxOS:2.*:*)
+	echo rs6000-unknown-lynxos${UNAME_RELEASE}
+	exit 0 ;;
+    SM[BE]S:UNIX_SV:*:*)
+	echo mips-dde-sysv${UNAME_RELEASE}
+	exit 0 ;;
+    RM*:SINIX-*:*:*)
+	echo mips-sni-sysv4
+	exit 0 ;;
+    *:SINIX-*:*:*)
+	if uname -p 2>/dev/null >/dev/null ; then
+		UNAME_MACHINE=`(uname -p) 2>/dev/null`
+		echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-sni-sysv4
+	else
+		echo ns32k-sni-sysv
+	fi
+	exit 0 ;;
+    PENTIUM:CPunix:4.0*:*) # Unisys `ClearPath HMP IX 4000' SVR4/MP effort
+                           # says <Richard.M.Bartel@ccMail.Census.GOV>
+        echo i586-unisys-sysv4
+        exit 0 ;;
+    *:UNIX_System_V:4*:FTX*)
+	# From Gerald Hewes <hewes@openmarket.com>.
+	# How about differentiating between stratus architectures? -djm
+	echo hppa1.1-stratus-sysv4
+	exit 0 ;;
+    *:*:*:FTX*)
+	# From seanf@swdc.stratus.com.
+	echo i860-stratus-sysv4
+	exit 0 ;;
+    mc68*:A/UX:*:*)
+	echo m68k-apple-aux${UNAME_RELEASE}
+	exit 0 ;;
+    R3000:*System_V*:*:* | R4000:UNIX_SYSV:*:*)
+	if [ -d /usr/nec ]; then
+	        echo mips-nec-sysv${UNAME_RELEASE}
+	else
+	        echo mips-unknown-sysv${UNAME_RELEASE}
+	fi
+        exit 0 ;;
+esac
+
+#echo '(No uname command or uname output not recognized.)' 1>&2
+#echo "${UNAME_MACHINE}:${UNAME_SYSTEM}:${UNAME_RELEASE}:${UNAME_VERSION}" 1>&2
+
+cat >dummy.c <<EOF
+#ifdef _SEQUENT_
+# include <sys/types.h>
+# include <sys/utsname.h>
+#endif
+main ()
+{
+#if defined (sony)
+#if defined (MIPSEB)
+  /* BFD wants "bsd" instead of "newsos".  Perhaps BFD should be changed,
+     I don't know....  */
+  printf ("mips-sony-bsd\n"); exit (0);
+#else
+#include <sys/param.h>
+  printf ("m68k-sony-newsos%s\n",
+#ifdef NEWSOS4
+          "4"
+#else
+	  ""
+#endif
+         ); exit (0);
+#endif
+#endif
+
+#if defined (__arm) && defined (__acorn) && defined (__unix)
+  printf ("arm-acorn-riscix"); exit (0);
+#endif
+
+#if defined (hp300) && !defined (hpux)
+  printf ("m68k-hp-bsd\n"); exit (0);
+#endif
+
+#if defined (NeXT)
+#if !defined (__ARCHITECTURE__)
+#define __ARCHITECTURE__ "m68k"
+#endif
+  int version;
+  version=`(hostinfo | sed -n 's/.*NeXT Mach \([0-9]*\).*/\1/p') 2>/dev/null`;
+  printf ("%s-next-nextstep%d\n", __ARCHITECTURE__, version);
+  exit (0);
+#endif
+
+#if defined (MULTIMAX) || defined (n16)
+#if defined (UMAXV)
+  printf ("ns32k-encore-sysv\n"); exit (0);
+#else
+#if defined (CMU)
+  printf ("ns32k-encore-mach\n"); exit (0);
+#else
+  printf ("ns32k-encore-bsd\n"); exit (0);
+#endif
+#endif
+#endif
+
+#if defined (__386BSD__)
+  printf ("i386-pc-bsd\n"); exit (0);
+#endif
+
+#if defined (sequent)
+#if defined (i386)
+  printf ("i386-sequent-dynix\n"); exit (0);
+#endif
+#if defined (ns32000)
+  printf ("ns32k-sequent-dynix\n"); exit (0);
+#endif
+#endif
+
+#if defined (_SEQUENT_)
+    struct utsname un;
+
+    uname(&un);
+
+    if (strncmp(un.version, "V2", 2) == 0) {
+	printf ("i386-sequent-ptx2\n"); exit (0);
+    }
+    if (strncmp(un.version, "V1", 2) == 0) { /* XXX is V1 correct? */
+	printf ("i386-sequent-ptx1\n"); exit (0);
+    }
+    printf ("i386-sequent-ptx\n"); exit (0);
+
+#endif
+
+#if defined (vax)
+#if !defined (ultrix)
+  printf ("vax-dec-bsd\n"); exit (0);
+#else
+  printf ("vax-dec-ultrix\n"); exit (0);
+#endif
+#endif
+
+#if defined (alliant) && defined (i860)
+  printf ("i860-alliant-bsd\n"); exit (0);
+#endif
+
+  exit (1);
+}
+EOF
+
+${CC-cc} dummy.c -o dummy 2>/dev/null && ./dummy && rm dummy.c dummy && exit 0
+rm -f dummy.c dummy
+
+# Apollos put the system type in the environment.
+
+test -d /usr/apollo && { echo ${ISP}-apollo-${SYSTYPE}; exit 0; }
+
+# Convex versions that predate uname can use getsysinfo(1)
+
+if [ -x /usr/convex/getsysinfo ]
+then
+    case `getsysinfo -f cpu_type` in
+    c1*)
+	echo c1-convex-bsd
+	exit 0 ;;
+    c2*)
+	if getsysinfo -f scalar_acc
+	then echo c32-convex-bsd
+	else echo c2-convex-bsd
+	fi
+	exit 0 ;;
+    c34*)
+	echo c34-convex-bsd
+	exit 0 ;;
+    c38*)
+	echo c38-convex-bsd
+	exit 0 ;;
+    c4*)
+	echo c4-convex-bsd
+	exit 0 ;;
+    esac
+fi
+
+#echo '(Unable to guess system type)' 1>&2
+
+exit 1
diff --git a/config.sub b/config.sub
new file mode 100755
index 00000000..0131946b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/config.sub
@@ -0,0 +1,939 @@
+#! /bin/sh
+# Configuration validation subroutine script, version 1.1.
+#   Copyright (C) 1991, 92, 93, 94, 95, 1996 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+# This file is (in principle) common to ALL GNU software.
+# The presence of a machine in this file suggests that SOME GNU software
+# can handle that machine.  It does not imply ALL GNU software can.
+#
+# This file is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
+# it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
+# the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
+# (at your option) any later version.
+#
+# This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+# but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+# MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the
+# GNU General Public License for more details.
+#
+# You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+# along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
+# Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330,
+# Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.
+
+# As a special exception to the GNU General Public License, if you
+# distribute this file as part of a program that contains a
+# configuration script generated by Autoconf, you may include it under
+# the same distribution terms that you use for the rest of that program.
+
+# Configuration subroutine to validate and canonicalize a configuration type.
+# Supply the specified configuration type as an argument.
+# If it is invalid, we print an error message on stderr and exit with code 1.
+# Otherwise, we print the canonical config type on stdout and succeed.
+
+# This file is supposed to be the same for all GNU packages
+# and recognize all the CPU types, system types and aliases
+# that are meaningful with *any* GNU software.
+# Each package is responsible for reporting which valid configurations
+# it does not support.  The user should be able to distinguish
+# a failure to support a valid configuration from a meaningless
+# configuration.
+
+# The goal of this file is to map all the various variations of a given
+# machine specification into a single specification in the form:
+#	CPU_TYPE-MANUFACTURER-OPERATING_SYSTEM
+# or in some cases, the newer four-part form:
+#	CPU_TYPE-MANUFACTURER-KERNEL-OPERATING_SYSTEM
+# It is wrong to echo any other type of specification.
+
+if [ x$1 = x ]
+then
+	echo Configuration name missing. 1>&2
+	echo "Usage: $0 CPU-MFR-OPSYS" 1>&2
+	echo "or     $0 ALIAS" 1>&2
+	echo where ALIAS is a recognized configuration type. 1>&2
+	exit 1
+fi
+
+# First pass through any local machine types.
+case $1 in
+	*local*)
+		echo $1
+		exit 0
+		;;
+	*)
+	;;
+esac
+
+# Separate what the user gave into CPU-COMPANY and OS or KERNEL-OS (if any).
+# Here we must recognize all the valid KERNEL-OS combinations.
+maybe_os=`echo $1 | sed 's/^\(.*\)-\([^-]*-[^-]*\)$/\2/'`
+case $maybe_os in
+  linux-gnu*)
+    os=-$maybe_os
+    basic_machine=`echo $1 | sed 's/^\(.*\)-\([^-]*-[^-]*\)$/\1/'`
+    ;;
+  *)
+    basic_machine=`echo $1 | sed 's/-[^-]*$//'`
+    if [ $basic_machine != $1 ]
+    then os=`echo $1 | sed 's/.*-/-/'`
+    else os=; fi
+    ;;
+esac
+
+### Let's recognize common machines as not being operating systems so
+### that things like config.sub decstation-3100 work.  We also
+### recognize some manufacturers as not being operating systems, so we
+### can provide default operating systems below.
+case $os in
+	-sun*os*)
+		# Prevent following clause from handling this invalid input.
+		;;
+	-dec* | -mips* | -sequent* | -encore* | -pc532* | -sgi* | -sony* | \
+	-att* | -7300* | -3300* | -delta* | -motorola* | -sun[234]* | \
+	-unicom* | -ibm* | -next | -hp | -isi* | -apollo | -altos* | \
+	-convergent* | -ncr* | -news | -32* | -3600* | -3100* | -hitachi* |\
+	-c[123]* | -convex* | -sun | -crds | -omron* | -dg | -ultra | -tti* | \
+	-harris | -dolphin | -highlevel | -gould | -cbm | -ns | -masscomp | \
+	-apple)
+		os=
+		basic_machine=$1
+		;;
+	-hiux*)
+		os=-hiuxwe2
+		;;
+	-sco5)
+		os=sco3.2v5
+		basic_machine=`echo $1 | sed -e 's/86-.*/86-pc/'`
+		;;
+	-sco4)
+		os=-sco3.2v4
+		basic_machine=`echo $1 | sed -e 's/86-.*/86-pc/'`
+		;;
+	-sco3.2.[4-9]*)
+		os=`echo $os | sed -e 's/sco3.2./sco3.2v/'`
+		basic_machine=`echo $1 | sed -e 's/86-.*/86-pc/'`
+		;;
+	-sco3.2v[4-9]*)
+		# Don't forget version if it is 3.2v4 or newer.
+		basic_machine=`echo $1 | sed -e 's/86-.*/86-pc/'`
+		;;
+	-sco*)
+		os=-sco3.2v2
+		basic_machine=`echo $1 | sed -e 's/86-.*/86-pc/'`
+		;;
+	-isc)
+		os=-isc2.2
+		basic_machine=`echo $1 | sed -e 's/86-.*/86-pc/'`
+		;;
+	-clix*)
+		basic_machine=clipper-intergraph
+		;;
+	-isc*)
+		basic_machine=`echo $1 | sed -e 's/86-.*/86-pc/'`
+		;;
+	-lynx*)
+		os=-lynxos
+		;;
+	-ptx*)
+		basic_machine=`echo $1 | sed -e 's/86-.*/86-sequent/'`
+		;;
+	-windowsnt*)
+		os=`echo $os | sed -e 's/windowsnt/winnt/'`
+		;;
+	-psos*)
+		os=-psos
+		;;
+esac
+
+# Decode aliases for certain CPU-COMPANY combinations.
+case $basic_machine in
+	# Recognize the basic CPU types without company name.
+	# Some are omitted here because they have special meanings below.
+	tahoe | i860 | m32r | m68k | m68000 | m88k | ns32k | arm \
+		| arme[lb] | pyramid | mn10300 \
+		| tron | a29k | 580 | i960 | h8300 | hppa | hppa1.0 | hppa1.1 \
+		| alpha | we32k | ns16k | clipper | i370 | sh \
+		| powerpc | powerpcle | 1750a | dsp16xx | mips64 | mipsel \
+		| pdp11 | mips64el | mips64orion | mips64orionel \
+		| sparc | sparclet | sparclite | sparc64)
+		basic_machine=$basic_machine-unknown
+		;;
+	# We use `pc' rather than `unknown'
+	# because (1) that's what they normally are, and
+	# (2) the word "unknown" tends to confuse beginning users.
+	i[3456]86)
+	  basic_machine=$basic_machine-pc
+	  ;;
+	# Object if more than one company name word.
+	*-*-*)
+		echo Invalid configuration \`$1\': machine \`$basic_machine\' not recognized 1>&2
+		exit 1
+		;;
+	# Recognize the basic CPU types with company name.
+	vax-* | tahoe-* | i[3456]86-* | i860-* | m32r-* | m68k-* | m68000-* \
+	      | m88k-* | sparc-* | ns32k-* | fx80-* | arm-* | c[123]* \
+	      | mips-* | pyramid-* | tron-* | a29k-* | romp-* | rs6000-* | power-* \
+	      | none-* | 580-* | cray2-* | h8300-* | i960-* | xmp-* | ymp-* \
+	      | hppa-* | hppa1.0-* | hppa1.1-* | alpha-* | we32k-* | cydra-* | ns16k-* \
+	      | pn-* | np1-* | xps100-* | clipper-* | orion-* | sparclite-* \
+	      | pdp11-* | sh-* | powerpc-* | powerpcle-* | sparc64-* | mips64-* | mipsel-* \
+	      | mips64el-* | mips64orion-* | mips64orionel-* | f301-*)
+		;;
+	# Recognize the various machine names and aliases which stand
+	# for a CPU type and a company and sometimes even an OS.
+	3b1 | 7300 | 7300-att | att-7300 | pc7300 | safari | unixpc)
+		basic_machine=m68000-att
+		;;
+	3b*)
+		basic_machine=we32k-att
+		;;
+	alliant | fx80)
+		basic_machine=fx80-alliant
+		;;
+	altos | altos3068)
+		basic_machine=m68k-altos
+		;;
+	am29k)
+		basic_machine=a29k-none
+		os=-bsd
+		;;
+	amdahl)
+		basic_machine=580-amdahl
+		os=-sysv
+		;;
+	amiga | amiga-*)
+		basic_machine=m68k-cbm
+		;;
+	amigados)
+		basic_machine=m68k-cbm
+		os=-amigados
+		;;
+	amigaunix | amix)
+		basic_machine=m68k-cbm
+		os=-sysv4
+		;;
+	apollo68)
+		basic_machine=m68k-apollo
+		os=-sysv
+		;;
+	aux)
+		basic_machine=m68k-apple
+		os=-aux
+		;;
+	balance)
+		basic_machine=ns32k-sequent
+		os=-dynix
+		;;
+	convex-c1)
+		basic_machine=c1-convex
+		os=-bsd
+		;;
+	convex-c2)
+		basic_machine=c2-convex
+		os=-bsd
+		;;
+	convex-c32)
+		basic_machine=c32-convex
+		os=-bsd
+		;;
+	convex-c34)
+		basic_machine=c34-convex
+		os=-bsd
+		;;
+	convex-c38)
+		basic_machine=c38-convex
+		os=-bsd
+		;;
+	cray | ymp)
+		basic_machine=ymp-cray
+		os=-unicos
+		;;
+	cray2)
+		basic_machine=cray2-cray
+		os=-unicos
+		;;
+	[ctj]90-cray)
+		basic_machine=c90-cray
+		os=-unicos
+		;;
+	crds | unos)
+		basic_machine=m68k-crds
+		;;
+	da30 | da30-*)
+		basic_machine=m68k-da30
+		;;
+	decstation | decstation-3100 | pmax | pmax-* | pmin | dec3100 | decstatn)
+		basic_machine=mips-dec
+		;;
+	delta | 3300 | motorola-3300 | motorola-delta \
+	      | 3300-motorola | delta-motorola)
+		basic_machine=m68k-motorola
+		;;
+	delta88)
+		basic_machine=m88k-motorola
+		os=-sysv3
+		;;
+	dpx20 | dpx20-*)
+		basic_machine=rs6000-bull
+		os=-bosx
+		;;
+	dpx2* | dpx2*-bull)
+		basic_machine=m68k-bull
+		os=-sysv3
+		;;
+	ebmon29k)
+		basic_machine=a29k-amd
+		os=-ebmon
+		;;
+	elxsi)
+		basic_machine=elxsi-elxsi
+		os=-bsd
+		;;
+	encore | umax | mmax)
+		basic_machine=ns32k-encore
+		;;
+	fx2800)
+		basic_machine=i860-alliant
+		;;
+	genix)
+		basic_machine=ns32k-ns
+		;;
+	gmicro)
+		basic_machine=tron-gmicro
+		os=-sysv
+		;;
+	h3050r* | hiux*)
+		basic_machine=hppa1.1-hitachi
+		os=-hiuxwe2
+		;;
+	h8300hms)
+		basic_machine=h8300-hitachi
+		os=-hms
+		;;
+	harris)
+		basic_machine=m88k-harris
+		os=-sysv3
+		;;
+	hp300-*)
+		basic_machine=m68k-hp
+		;;
+	hp300bsd)
+		basic_machine=m68k-hp
+		os=-bsd
+		;;
+	hp300hpux)
+		basic_machine=m68k-hp
+		os=-hpux
+		;;
+	hp9k2[0-9][0-9] | hp9k31[0-9])
+		basic_machine=m68000-hp
+		;;
+	hp9k3[2-9][0-9])
+		basic_machine=m68k-hp
+		;;
+	hp9k7[0-9][0-9] | hp7[0-9][0-9] | hp9k8[0-9]7 | hp8[0-9]7)
+		basic_machine=hppa1.1-hp
+		;;
+	hp9k8[0-9][0-9] | hp8[0-9][0-9])
+		basic_machine=hppa1.0-hp
+		;;
+	hppa-next)
+		os=-nextstep3
+		;;
+	i370-ibm* | ibm*)
+		basic_machine=i370-ibm
+		os=-mvs
+		;;
+# I'm not sure what "Sysv32" means.  Should this be sysv3.2?
+	i[3456]86v32)
+		basic_machine=`echo $1 | sed -e 's/86.*/86-pc/'`
+		os=-sysv32
+		;;
+	i[3456]86v4*)
+		basic_machine=`echo $1 | sed -e 's/86.*/86-pc/'`
+		os=-sysv4
+		;;
+	i[3456]86v)
+		basic_machine=`echo $1 | sed -e 's/86.*/86-pc/'`
+		os=-sysv
+		;;
+	i[3456]86sol2)
+		basic_machine=`echo $1 | sed -e 's/86.*/86-pc/'`
+		os=-solaris2
+		;;
+	iris | iris4d)
+		basic_machine=mips-sgi
+		case $os in
+		    -irix*)
+			;;
+		    *)
+			os=-irix4
+			;;
+		esac
+		;;
+	isi68 | isi)
+		basic_machine=m68k-isi
+		os=-sysv
+		;;
+	m88k-omron*)
+		basic_machine=m88k-omron
+		;;
+	magnum | m3230)
+		basic_machine=mips-mips
+		os=-sysv
+		;;
+	merlin)
+		basic_machine=ns32k-utek
+		os=-sysv
+		;;
+	miniframe)
+		basic_machine=m68000-convergent
+		;;
+	mipsel*-linux*)
+		basic_machine=mipsel-unknown
+		os=-linux
+		;;
+	mips*-linux*)
+		basic_machine=mips-unknown
+		os=-linux
+		;;
+	mips3*-*)
+		basic_machine=`echo $basic_machine | sed -e 's/mips3/mips64/'`
+		;;
+	mips3*)
+		basic_machine=`echo $basic_machine | sed -e 's/mips3/mips64/'`-unknown
+		;;
+	ncr3000)
+		basic_machine=i486-ncr
+		os=-sysv4
+		;;
+	news | news700 | news800 | news900)
+		basic_machine=m68k-sony
+		os=-newsos
+		;;
+	news1000)
+		basic_machine=m68030-sony
+		os=-newsos
+		;;
+	news-3600 | risc-news)
+		basic_machine=mips-sony
+		os=-newsos
+		;;
+	next | m*-next )
+		basic_machine=m68k-next
+		case $os in
+		    -nextstep* )
+			;;
+		    -ns2*)
+		      os=-nextstep2
+			;;
+		    *)
+		      os=-nextstep3
+			;;
+		esac
+		;;
+	nh3000)
+		basic_machine=m68k-harris
+		os=-cxux
+		;;
+	nh[45]000)
+		basic_machine=m88k-harris
+		os=-cxux
+		;;
+	nindy960)
+		basic_machine=i960-intel
+		os=-nindy
+		;;
+	np1)
+		basic_machine=np1-gould
+		;;
+	pa-hitachi)
+		basic_machine=hppa1.1-hitachi
+		os=-hiuxwe2
+		;;
+	paragon)
+		basic_machine=i860-intel
+		os=-osf
+		;;
+	pbd)
+		basic_machine=sparc-tti
+		;;
+	pbb)
+		basic_machine=m68k-tti
+		;;
+        pc532 | pc532-*)
+		basic_machine=ns32k-pc532
+		;;
+	pentium | p5)
+		basic_machine=i586-intel
+		;;
+	pentiumpro | p6)
+		basic_machine=i686-intel
+		;;
+	pentium-* | p5-*)
+		basic_machine=i586-`echo $basic_machine | sed 's/^[^-]*-//'`
+		;;
+	pentiumpro-* | p6-*)
+		basic_machine=i686-`echo $basic_machine | sed 's/^[^-]*-//'`
+		;;
+	k5)
+		# We don't have specific support for AMD's K5 yet, so just call it a Pentium
+		basic_machine=i586-amd
+		;;
+	nexen)
+		# We don't have specific support for Nexgen yet, so just call it a Pentium
+		basic_machine=i586-nexgen
+		;;
+	pn)
+		basic_machine=pn-gould
+		;;
+	power)	basic_machine=rs6000-ibm
+		;;
+	ppc)	basic_machine=powerpc-unknown
+	        ;;
+	ppc-*)	basic_machine=powerpc-`echo $basic_machine | sed 's/^[^-]*-//'`
+		;;
+	ppcle | powerpclittle | ppc-le | powerpc-little)
+		basic_machine=powerpcle-unknown
+	        ;;
+	ppcle-* | powerpclittle-*)
+		basic_machine=powerpcle-`echo $basic_machine | sed 's/^[^-]*-//'`
+		;;
+	ps2)
+		basic_machine=i386-ibm
+		;;
+	rm[46]00)
+		basic_machine=mips-siemens
+		;;
+	rtpc | rtpc-*)
+		basic_machine=romp-ibm
+		;;
+	sequent)
+		basic_machine=i386-sequent
+		;;
+	sh)
+		basic_machine=sh-hitachi
+		os=-hms
+		;;
+	sps7)
+		basic_machine=m68k-bull
+		os=-sysv2
+		;;
+	spur)
+		basic_machine=spur-unknown
+		;;
+	sun2)
+		basic_machine=m68000-sun
+		;;
+	sun2os3)
+		basic_machine=m68000-sun
+		os=-sunos3
+		;;
+	sun2os4)
+		basic_machine=m68000-sun
+		os=-sunos4
+		;;
+	sun3os3)
+		basic_machine=m68k-sun
+		os=-sunos3
+		;;
+	sun3os4)
+		basic_machine=m68k-sun
+		os=-sunos4
+		;;
+	sun4os3)
+		basic_machine=sparc-sun
+		os=-sunos3
+		;;
+	sun4os4)
+		basic_machine=sparc-sun
+		os=-sunos4
+		;;
+	sun4sol2)
+		basic_machine=sparc-sun
+		os=-solaris2
+		;;
+	sun3 | sun3-*)
+		basic_machine=m68k-sun
+		;;
+	sun4)
+		basic_machine=sparc-sun
+		;;
+	sun386 | sun386i | roadrunner)
+		basic_machine=i386-sun
+		;;
+	symmetry)
+		basic_machine=i386-sequent
+		os=-dynix
+		;;
+	tower | tower-32)
+		basic_machine=m68k-ncr
+		;;
+	udi29k)
+		basic_machine=a29k-amd
+		os=-udi
+		;;
+	ultra3)
+		basic_machine=a29k-nyu
+		os=-sym1
+		;;
+	vaxv)
+		basic_machine=vax-dec
+		os=-sysv
+		;;
+	vms)
+		basic_machine=vax-dec
+		os=-vms
+		;;
+       vpp*|vx|vx-*)
+               basic_machine=f301-fujitsu
+               ;;
+	vxworks960)
+		basic_machine=i960-wrs
+		os=-vxworks
+		;;
+	vxworks68)
+		basic_machine=m68k-wrs
+		os=-vxworks
+		;;
+	vxworks29k)
+		basic_machine=a29k-wrs
+		os=-vxworks
+		;;
+	xmp)
+		basic_machine=xmp-cray
+		os=-unicos
+		;;
+        xps | xps100)
+		basic_machine=xps100-honeywell
+		;;
+	none)
+		basic_machine=none-none
+		os=-none
+		;;
+
+# Here we handle the default manufacturer of certain CPU types.  It is in
+# some cases the only manufacturer, in others, it is the most popular.
+	mips)
+		if [ x$os = x-linux ]; then
+			basic_machine=mips-unknown
+		else
+			basic_machine=mips-mips
+		fi
+		;;
+	romp)
+		basic_machine=romp-ibm
+		;;
+	rs6000)
+		basic_machine=rs6000-ibm
+		;;
+	vax)
+		basic_machine=vax-dec
+		;;
+	pdp11)
+		basic_machine=pdp11-dec
+		;;
+	we32k)
+		basic_machine=we32k-att
+		;;
+	sparc)
+		basic_machine=sparc-sun
+		;;
+        cydra)
+		basic_machine=cydra-cydrome
+		;;
+	orion)
+		basic_machine=orion-highlevel
+		;;
+	orion105)
+		basic_machine=clipper-highlevel
+		;;
+	*)
+		echo Invalid configuration \`$1\': machine \`$basic_machine\' not recognized 1>&2
+		exit 1
+		;;
+esac
+
+# Here we canonicalize certain aliases for manufacturers.
+case $basic_machine in
+	*-digital*)
+		basic_machine=`echo $basic_machine | sed 's/digital.*/dec/'`
+		;;
+	*-commodore*)
+		basic_machine=`echo $basic_machine | sed 's/commodore.*/cbm/'`
+		;;
+	*)
+		;;
+esac
+
+# Decode manufacturer-specific aliases for certain operating systems.
+
+if [ x"$os" != x"" ]
+then
+case $os in
+        # First match some system type aliases
+        # that might get confused with valid system types.
+	# -solaris* is a basic system type, with this one exception.
+	-solaris1 | -solaris1.*)
+		os=`echo $os | sed -e 's|solaris1|sunos4|'`
+		;;
+	-solaris)
+		os=-solaris2
+		;;
+	-unixware* | svr4*)
+		os=-sysv4
+		;;
+	-gnu/linux*)
+		os=`echo $os | sed -e 's|gnu/linux|linux-gnu|'`
+		;;
+	# First accept the basic system types.
+	# The portable systems comes first.
+	# Each alternative MUST END IN A *, to match a version number.
+	# -sysv* is not here because it comes later, after sysvr4.
+	-gnu* | -bsd* | -mach* | -minix* | -genix* | -ultrix* | -irix* \
+	      | -*vms* | -sco* | -esix* | -isc* | -aix* | -sunos | -sunos[34]*\
+	      | -hpux* | -unos* | -osf* | -luna* | -dgux* | -solaris* | -sym* \
+	      | -amigados* | -msdos* | -newsos* | -unicos* | -aof* | -aos* \
+	      | -nindy* | -vxsim* | -vxworks* | -ebmon* | -hms* | -mvs* \
+	      | -clix* | -riscos* | -uniplus* | -iris* | -rtu* | -xenix* \
+	      | -hiux* | -386bsd* | -netbsd* | -openbsd* | -freebsd* | -riscix* \
+	      | -lynxos* | -bosx* | -nextstep* | -cxux* | -aout* | -elf* \
+	      | -ptx* | -coff* | -ecoff* | -winnt* | -domain* | -vsta* \
+	      | -udi* | -eabi* | -lites* | -ieee* | -go32* | -aux* \
+	      | -cygwin32* | -pe* | -psos* | -moss* | -proelf* | -rtems* \
+	      | -linux-gnu* | -uxpv*)
+	# Remember, each alternative MUST END IN *, to match a version number.
+		;;
+	-linux*)
+		os=`echo $os | sed -e 's|linux|linux-gnu|'`
+		;;
+	-sunos5*)
+		os=`echo $os | sed -e 's|sunos5|solaris2|'`
+		;;
+	-sunos6*)
+		os=`echo $os | sed -e 's|sunos6|solaris3|'`
+		;;
+	-osfrose*)
+		os=-osfrose
+		;;
+	-osf*)
+		os=-osf
+		;;
+	-utek*)
+		os=-bsd
+		;;
+	-dynix*)
+		os=-bsd
+		;;
+	-acis*)
+		os=-aos
+		;;
+	-ctix* | -uts*)
+		os=-sysv
+		;;
+	-ns2 )
+	        os=-nextstep2
+		;;
+	# Preserve the version number of sinix5.
+	-sinix5.*)
+		os=`echo $os | sed -e 's|sinix|sysv|'`
+		;;
+	-sinix*)
+		os=-sysv4
+		;;
+	-triton*)
+		os=-sysv3
+		;;
+	-oss*)
+		os=-sysv3
+		;;
+	-svr4)
+		os=-sysv4
+		;;
+	-svr3)
+		os=-sysv3
+		;;
+	-sysvr4)
+		os=-sysv4
+		;;
+	# This must come after -sysvr4.
+	-sysv*)
+		;;
+	-xenix)
+		os=-xenix
+		;;
+	-none)
+		;;
+	*)
+		# Get rid of the `-' at the beginning of $os.
+		os=`echo $os | sed 's/[^-]*-//'`
+		echo Invalid configuration \`$1\': system \`$os\' not recognized 1>&2
+		exit 1
+		;;
+esac
+else
+
+# Here we handle the default operating systems that come with various machines.
+# The value should be what the vendor currently ships out the door with their
+# machine or put another way, the most popular os provided with the machine.
+
+# Note that if you're going to try to match "-MANUFACTURER" here (say,
+# "-sun"), then you have to tell the case statement up towards the top
+# that MANUFACTURER isn't an operating system.  Otherwise, code above
+# will signal an error saying that MANUFACTURER isn't an operating
+# system, and we'll never get to this point.
+
+case $basic_machine in
+	*-acorn)
+		os=-riscix1.2
+		;;
+	arm*-semi)
+		os=-aout
+		;;
+        pdp11-*)
+		os=-none
+		;;
+	*-dec | vax-*)
+		os=-ultrix4.2
+		;;
+	m68*-apollo)
+		os=-domain
+		;;
+	i386-sun)
+		os=-sunos4.0.2
+		;;
+	m68000-sun)
+		os=-sunos3
+		# This also exists in the configure program, but was not the
+		# default.
+		# os=-sunos4
+		;;
+	*-tti)	# must be before sparc entry or we get the wrong os.
+		os=-sysv3
+		;;
+	sparc-* | *-sun)
+		os=-sunos4.1.1
+		;;
+	*-ibm)
+		os=-aix
+		;;
+	*-hp)
+		os=-hpux
+		;;
+	*-hitachi)
+		os=-hiux
+		;;
+	i860-* | *-att | *-ncr | *-altos | *-motorola | *-convergent)
+		os=-sysv
+		;;
+	*-cbm)
+		os=-amigados
+		;;
+	*-dg)
+		os=-dgux
+		;;
+	*-dolphin)
+		os=-sysv3
+		;;
+	m68k-ccur)
+		os=-rtu
+		;;
+	m88k-omron*)
+		os=-luna
+		;;
+	*-next )
+		os=-nextstep
+		;;
+	*-sequent)
+		os=-ptx
+		;;
+	*-crds)
+		os=-unos
+		;;
+	*-ns)
+		os=-genix
+		;;
+	i370-*)
+		os=-mvs
+		;;
+	*-next)
+		os=-nextstep3
+		;;
+        *-gould)
+		os=-sysv
+		;;
+        *-highlevel)
+		os=-bsd
+		;;
+	*-encore)
+		os=-bsd
+		;;
+        *-sgi)
+		os=-irix
+		;;
+        *-siemens)
+		os=-sysv4
+		;;
+	*-masscomp)
+		os=-rtu
+		;;
+	f301-fujitsu)
+		os=-uxpv
+		;;
+	*)
+		os=-none
+		;;
+esac
+fi
+
+# Here we handle the case where we know the os, and the CPU type, but not the
+# manufacturer.  We pick the logical manufacturer.
+vendor=unknown
+case $basic_machine in
+	*-unknown)
+		case $os in
+			-riscix*)
+				vendor=acorn
+				;;
+			-sunos*)
+				vendor=sun
+				;;
+			-aix*)
+				vendor=ibm
+				;;
+			-hpux*)
+				vendor=hp
+				;;
+			-hiux*)
+				vendor=hitachi
+				;;
+			-unos*)
+				vendor=crds
+				;;
+			-dgux*)
+				vendor=dg
+				;;
+			-luna*)
+				vendor=omron
+				;;
+			-genix*)
+				vendor=ns
+				;;
+			-mvs*)
+				vendor=ibm
+				;;
+			-ptx*)
+				vendor=sequent
+				;;
+			-vxsim* | -vxworks*)
+				vendor=wrs
+				;;
+			-aux*)
+				vendor=apple
+				;;
+		esac
+		basic_machine=`echo $basic_machine | sed "s/unknown/$vendor/"`
+		;;
+esac
+
+echo $basic_machine$os
diff --git a/configure.in b/configure.in
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..069f6bdc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/configure.in
@@ -0,0 +1,42 @@
+dnl -*-fundamental-*-
+dnl
+dnl $Id: configure.in,v 1.1 1999/05/05 19:23:47 mdw Exp $
+dnl
+dnl Configuring the Common Files Distribution
+dnl
+dnl (c) 1997 Mark Wooding
+dnl
+
+dnl----- Licensing notice ---------------------------------------------------
+dnl
+dnl This file is part of the Common Files Distribution (`common')
+dnl 
+dnl `Common' is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
+dnl it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
+dnl the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
+dnl (at your option) any later version.
+dnl 
+dnl `Common' is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+dnl but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+dnl MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the
+dnl GNU General Public License for more details.
+dnl 
+dnl You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+dnl along with `common'; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation,
+dnl Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.
+
+dnl----- Revision history ---------------------------------------------------
+dnl
+dnl $Log: configure.in,v $
+dnl Revision 1.1  1999/05/05 19:23:47  mdw
+dnl Initial revision
+dnl
+dnl Revision 1.1.1.1  1999/05/05 19:23:47  mdw
+dnl New import.  The old CVS repository was lost in a disk disaster.
+AM_INIT_AUTOMAKE(common, 1.2.0)
+
+AC_INIT(mklinks.in)
+AM_INIT_AUTOMAKE(common, 1.2.4)
+AM_PROG_INSTALL
+AC_ARG_PROGRAM
+AC_OUTPUT(Makefile mklinks findlinks txtlib mkaclocal)
diff --git a/elisp-comp b/elisp-comp
new file mode 100755
index 00000000..96e4aa58
--- /dev/null
+++ b/elisp-comp
@@ -0,0 +1,49 @@
+#!/bin/sh
+# Copyright (C) 1995 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+# François Pinard <pinard@iro.umontreal.ca>, 1995.
+#
+# This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
+# it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
+# the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option)
+# any later version.
+#
+# This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+# but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+# MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the
+# GNU General Public License for more details.
+#
+# You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+# along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
+# Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.
+
+# This script byte-compiles all `.el' files which are part of its
+# arguments, using GNU Emacs, and put the resulting `.elc' files into
+# the current directory, so disregarding the original directories used
+# in `.el' arguments.
+#
+# This script manages in such a way that all Emacs LISP files to
+# be compiled are made visible between themselves, in the event
+# they require or load-library one another.
+
+if test $# = 0; then
+   echo 1>&2 "No files given to $0"
+   exit 1
+else
+   if test -z "$EMACS" || test "$EMACS" = "t"; then
+      # Value of "t" means we are running in a shell under Emacs.
+      # Just assume Emacs is called "emacs".
+      EMACS=emacs
+   fi
+
+   tempdir=elc.$$
+   mkdir $tempdir
+   cp $* $tempdir
+   cd $tempdir
+
+   echo "(setq load-path (cons nil load-path))" > script
+   $EMACS -q -batch -l script -f batch-byte-compile *.el
+   mv *.elc ..
+
+   cd ..
+   rm -fr $tempdir
+fi
diff --git a/findlinks.in b/findlinks.in
new file mode 100755
index 00000000..c3c575df
--- /dev/null
+++ b/findlinks.in
@@ -0,0 +1,104 @@
+#! /bin/sh
+# -*-sh-*-
+#
+# $Id: findlinks.in,v 1.1 1999/05/05 19:23:47 mdw Exp $
+#
+# Find files which could be links to the repository
+#
+# (c) 1997 Mark Wooding
+#
+
+#----- Licensing notice -----------------------------------------------------
+#
+# This file is part of the Common Files Distribution (`common').
+#
+# `Common' is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
+# it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
+# the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
+# (at your option) any later version.
+#
+# `Common' is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+# but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+# MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the
+# GNU General Public License for more details.
+#
+# You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+# along with `common'; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation,
+# Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.
+
+#----- Revision history -----------------------------------------------------
+#
+# $Log: findlinks.in,v $
+# Revision 1.1  1999/05/05 19:23:47  mdw
+# Initial revision
+#
+
+# --- Configuration variables ---
+
+prefix=@prefix@
+datadir=@datadir@/@PACKAGE@
+
+# --- Parse command line arguments ---
+
+while [ $# -gt 0 ]; do
+  case $1 in
+    -h | --h | --he | --hel | --help)
+      cat <<EOF
+Usage: findlinks
+
+Scans the current directory and any subdirectories, writing the names of
+files which could be linked into the shared files repository to standard
+output.  This list could be used as input to the \`mklinks' command.
+EOF
+      exit 0
+      ;;
+    -v | --v | --ve | --ver | --vers | --versi | --versio | --version)
+      version=`echo '$Revision: 1.1 $' |
+	sed -n -e 's;^.*: \([0-9.]*\)\\$;\1;p'`
+      echo "findlinks $version; Common Files Distribution version @VERSION@"
+      exit 0
+      ;;
+    *)
+      echo "findlinks: unknown option \`$1'" >&2
+      exit 1
+      ;;
+  esac
+  shift
+done  
+
+# --- Read the names of all the files I support ---
+#
+# Yes, this is ugly and hacky: well spotted.  Shells have a nasty habit of
+# spontaneously forking when redirection gets too hard for them to think
+# about, so instead of something nice along the lines of
+#
+#   find ... | while read name; do <build `files'> done
+#
+# I have to stick the whole lot in backticks and echo the result when it's
+# all done.  Yuk.
+#
+# Oh, I almost forgot: that colon on the end there, that's to make sure that
+# all the entries are surrounded by colons on both sides, which makes the
+# pattern match in the `case' below work properly.
+
+files=`
+  files=""
+  find $datadir -type f -print | { while read name; do
+    files="$files:\`echo $name | sed -e 's;^.*/;;'\`"
+  done
+  echo $files; } `:
+
+# --- Now examine the current directory ---
+#
+# Remember to include things which are already linked, so that users can say
+# `findlinks >.links' without any problems.
+
+find . \( -type f -o -type l \) -print | while read name; do
+  base="`echo $name | sed -e 's;^.*/;;'`"
+  case "$files" in
+    *:$base:*)
+      echo $name
+      ;;
+    *)
+  esac
+done | sed -e 's,^\./,,' | sort
diff --git a/gpl.tex b/gpl.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..95cc8e13
--- /dev/null
+++ b/gpl.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,459 @@
+% \iffalse <meta-comment>
+%
+% $Id: gpl.tex,v 1.1 1999/05/05 19:23:47 mdw Exp $
+%
+% The GNU General Public License as a LaTeX section
+%
+% (c) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+%   LaTeX markup and minor formatting changes by Mark Wooding
+%
+
+%----- Revision history -----------------------------------------------------
+%
+% $Log: gpl.tex,v $
+% Revision 1.1  1999/05/05 19:23:47  mdw
+% Initial revision
+%
+% --- Previous lives ---
+%
+% %Log: gpl.tex,v %
+% Revision 1.3  1997/07/29 19:49:51  mdw
+% Fix address of the FSF.
+%
+% Revision 1.2  1997/04/28 19:32:26  mdw
+% Fix spelling of `License' so that it's American and wrong.
+% Also use copyright symbol since I have one, and reformat the verbatim
+% text a lttle.
+%
+% Revision 1.1  1996/11/19 20:51:14  mdw
+% Initial revision
+%
+
+% --- Chapter heading ---
+%
+% We don't know whether this ought to be a section or a chapter.  Easy.
+% We'll see if chapters are possible.
+%
+% \fi
+
+\begingroup
+\makeatletter
+
+\edef\next#1#2#3{\relax
+  \ifx\chapter\@@undefined
+    \ifx\documentclass\@notprerr#2\else#3\fi
+  \else#1\fi
+}
+
+\expandafter\endgroup\next
+{
+  \let\gpltoplevel\chapter
+  \let\gplsec\section
+  \let\gplend\endinput
+}{
+  \let\gpltoplevel\section
+  \let\gplsec\subsection
+  \let\gplend\endinput
+}{
+  \documentclass[a4paper]{article}
+  \def\gpltoplevel#1{%
+    \vspace*{1in}%
+    \hbox to\hsize{\hfil\LARGE\bfseries#1\hfil}%
+    \vspace{1in}%
+  }
+  \let\gplsec\section
+  \def\gplend{\end{document}}
+  \advance\textwidth1in
+  \advance\oddsidemargin-.5in
+  \sloppy
+  \begin{document}
+}
+
+%^^A-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+\gpltoplevel{The GNU General Public License}
+
+
+The following is the text of the GNU General Public License, under the terms
+of which this software is distrubuted.
+
+\vspace{12pt}
+
+\begin{center}
+\textbf{GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE} \\
+Version 2, June 1991
+\end{center}
+
+\begin{center}
+Copyright \copyright\ 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc. \\
+59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA
+
+Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies \\
+of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
+\end{center}
+
+
+\gplsec{Preamble}
+
+The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to
+share and change it.  By contrast, the GNU General Public License is intended
+to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software---to make sure
+the software is free for all its users.  This General Public License applies
+to most of the Free Software Foundation's software and to any other program
+whose authors commit to using it.  (Some other Free Software Foundation
+software is covered by the GNU Library General Public License instead.)  You
+can apply it to your programs, too.
+
+When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price.  Our
+General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom
+to distribute copies of free software (and charge for this service if you
+wish), that you receive source code or can get it if you want it, that you
+can change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs; and that
+you know you can do these things.
+
+To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone to
+deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights.  These
+restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute
+copies of the software, or if you modify it.
+
+For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether gratis or
+for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that you have.  You
+must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code.  And you
+must show them these terms so they know their rights.
+
+We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and (2)
+offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy, distribute
+and/or modify the software.
+
+Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make certain that
+everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free software.  If
+the software is modified by someone else and passed on, we want its
+recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so that any
+problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original authors'
+reputations.
+
+Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software patents.  We
+wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free program will
+individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the program
+proprietary.  To prevent this, we have made it clear that any patent must be
+licensed for everyone's free use or not licensed at all.
+
+The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification
+follow.
+
+
+\gplsec{Terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification}
+
+\begin{enumerate}
+
+\makeatletter \setcounter{\@listctr}{-1} \makeatother
+
+\item [0.] This License applies to any program or other work which contains a
+      notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed
+      under the terms of this General Public License.  The ``Program'',
+      below, refers to any such program or work, and a ``work based on the
+      Program'' means either the Program or any derivative work under
+      copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Program or a
+      portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated
+      into another language.  (Hereinafter, translation is included without
+      limitation in the term ``modification''.)  Each licensee is addressed
+      as ``you''.
+
+      Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not
+      covered by this License; they are outside its scope.  The act of
+      running the Program is not restricted, and the output from the Program
+      is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Program
+      (independent of having been made by running the Program).  Whether that
+      is true depends on what the Program does.
+
+\item [1.] You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program's
+      source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you
+      conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate
+      copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the
+      notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty;
+      and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License
+      along with the Program.
+
+      You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and
+      you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee.
+
+\item [2.] You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion
+      of it, thus forming a work based on the Program, and copy and
+      distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1
+      above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions:
+
+      \begin{enumerate}
+
+      \item [(a)] You must cause the modified files to carry prominent
+            notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any
+            change.
+
+      \item [(b)] You must cause any work that you distribute or publish,
+            that in whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program
+            or any part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to
+            all third parties under the terms of this License.
+
+      \item [(c)] If the modified program normally reads commands
+            interactively when run, you must cause it, when started running
+            for such interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or
+            display an announcement including an appropriate copyright notice
+            and a notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that you
+            provide a warranty) and that users may redistribute the program
+            under these conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy
+            of this License.  (Exception: if the Program itself is
+            interactive but does not normally print such an announcement,
+            your work based on the Program is not required to print an
+            announcement.)
+
+      \end{enumerate}
+
+      These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole.  If
+      identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Program,
+      and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in
+      themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those
+      sections when you distribute them as separate works.  But when you
+      distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based
+      on the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of
+      this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the
+      entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote
+      it.
+
+      Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest
+      your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to
+      exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or
+      collective works based on the Program.
+
+      In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program
+      with the Program (or with a work based on the Program) on a volume of a
+      storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the
+      scope of this License.
+
+\item [3.] You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it,
+      under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of
+      Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following:
+
+      \begin{enumerate}
+
+      \item [(a)] Accompany it with the complete corresponding
+            machine-readable source code, which must be distributed under the
+            terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for
+            software interchange; or,
+
+      \item [(b)] Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three
+            years, to give any third party, for a charge no more than your
+            cost of physically performing source distribution, a complete
+            machine-readable copy of the corresponding source code, to be
+            distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium
+            customarily used for software interchange; or,
+
+      \item [(c)] Accompany it with the information you received as to the
+            offer to distribute corresponding source code.  (This alternative
+            is allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you
+            received the program in object code or executable form with such
+            an offer, in accord with Subsection b above.)
+
+      \end{enumerate}
+
+      The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for
+      making modifications to it.  For an executable work, complete source
+      code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any
+      associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control
+      compilation and installation of the executable.  However, as a special
+      exception, the source code distributed need not include anything that
+      is normally distributed (in either source or binary form) with the
+      major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system
+      on which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies
+      the executable.
+
+      If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering access
+      to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent access to
+      copy the source code from the same place counts as distribution of the
+      source code, even though third parties are not compelled to copy the
+      source along with the object code.
+
+\item [4.] You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program
+      except as expressly provided under this License.  Any attempt otherwise
+      to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is void, and will
+      automatically terminate your rights under this License.  However,
+      parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under this
+      License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties
+      remain in full compliance.
+
+\item [5.] You are not required to accept this License, since you have not
+      signed it.  However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or
+      distribute the Program or its derivative works.  These actions are
+      prohibited by law if you do not accept this License.  Therefore, by
+      modifying or distributing the Program (or any work based on the
+      Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and
+      all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the
+      Program or works based on it.
+
+\item [6.] Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the
+      Program), the recipient automatically receives a license from the
+      original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program subject to
+      these terms and conditions.  You may not impose any further
+      restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein.
+      You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to
+      this License.
+
+\item [7.] If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent
+      infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues),
+      conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or
+      otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not
+      excuse you from the conditions of this License.  If you cannot
+      distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this
+      License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you
+      may not distribute the Program at all.  For example, if a patent
+      license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Program by
+      all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then
+      the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to
+      refrain entirely from distribution of the Program.
+
+      If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under
+      any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to
+      apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other
+      circumstances.
+
+      It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any
+      patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any
+      such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the
+      integrity of the free software distribution system, which is
+      implemented by public license practices.  Many people have made
+      generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed
+      through that system in reliance on consistent application of that
+      system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing
+      to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot
+      impose that choice.
+
+      This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to
+      be a consequence of the rest of this License.
+
+\item [8.] If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in
+      certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the
+      original copyright holder who places the Program under this License may
+      add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those
+      countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries
+      not thus excluded.  In such case, this License incorporates the
+      limitation as if written in the body of this License.
+
+\item [9.] The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new
+      versions of the General Public License from time to time.  Such new
+      versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may
+      differ in detail to address new problems or concerns.
+
+      Each version is given a distinguishing version number.  If the Program
+      specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and
+      ``any later version'', you have the option of following the terms and
+      conditions either of that version or of any later version published by
+      the Free Software Foundation.  If the Program does not specify a
+      version number of this License, you may choose any version ever
+      published by the Free Software Foundation.
+
+\item [10.] If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free
+      programs whose distribution conditions are different, write to the
+      author to ask for permission.  For software which is copyrighted by the
+      Free Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we
+      sometimes make exceptions for this.  Our decision will be guided by the
+      two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free
+      software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally.
+
+\begin{center}
+NO WARRANTY
+\end{center}
+
+\bfseries
+
+\item [11.] Because the Program is licensed free of charge, there is no
+      warranty for the Program, to the extent permitted by applicable law.
+      except when otherwise stated in writing the copyright holders and/or
+      other parties provide the program ``as is'' without warranty of any
+      kind, either expressed or implied, including, but not limited to, the
+      implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular
+      purpose.  The entire risk as to the quality and performance of the
+      Program is with you.  Should the Program prove defective, you assume
+      the cost of all necessary servicing, repair or correction.
+
+\item [12.] In no event unless required by applicable law or agreed to in
+      writing will any copyright holder, or any other party who may modify
+      and/or redistribute the program as permitted above, be liable to you
+      for damages, including any general, special, incidental or
+      consequential damages arising out of the use or inability to use the
+      program (including but not limited to loss of data or data being
+      rendered inaccurate or losses sustained by you or third parties or a
+      failure of the Program to operate with any other programs), even if
+      such holder or other party has been advised of the possibility of such
+      damages.
+
+\end{enumerate}
+
+\begin{center}
+\textbf{END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS}
+\end{center}
+
+
+\gplsec{Appendix: How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs}
+
+If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest possible
+use to the public, the best way to achieve this is to make it free software
+which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms.
+
+To do so, attach the following notices to the program.  It is safest to
+attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively convey the
+exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least the ``copyright''
+line and a pointer to where the full notice is found.
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+<one line to give the program's name and a brief idea of what it does.>
+Copyright (C) 19yy  <name of author>
+
+This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
+it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
+the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
+(at your option) any later version.
+
+This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the
+GNU General Public License for more details.
+
+You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation,
+Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.
+\end{verbatim}
+
+Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.
+
+If the program is interactive, make it output a short notice like this when
+it starts in an interactive mode:
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+Gnomovision version 69, Copyright (C) 19yy name of author
+Gnomovision comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details type
+`show w'.
+This is free software, and you are welcome to redistribute it
+under certain conditions; type `show c' for details.
+\end{verbatim}
+
+The hypothetical commands `show w' and `show c' should show the appropriate
+parts of the General Public License.  Of course, the commands you use may be
+called something other than `show w' and `show c'; they could even be
+mouse-clicks or menu items--whatever suits your program.
+
+You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your
+school, if any, to sign a ``copyright disclaimer'' for the program, if
+necessary.  Here is a sample; alter the names:
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the program
+`Gnomovision' (which makes passes at compilers) written by James Hacker.
+
+<signature of Ty Coon>, 1 April 1989
+Ty Coon, President of Vice
+\end{verbatim}
+
+This General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into
+proprietary programs.  If your program is a subroutine library, you may
+consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with the
+library.  If this is what you want to do, use the GNU Library General Public
+License instead of this License.
+
+\gplend
diff --git a/gpl.texi b/gpl.texi
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..23ba2610
--- /dev/null
+++ b/gpl.texi
@@ -0,0 +1,398 @@
+@c This GPL is meant to be included from other files.
+@c To format a standalone GPL, use license.texi.
+
+@center Version 2, June 1991
+
+@display
+Copyright @copyright{} 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA
+
+Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
+of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
+@end display
+
+@unnumberedsec Preamble
+
+  The licenses for most software are designed to take away your
+freedom to share and change it.  By contrast, the GNU General Public
+License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free
+software---to make sure the software is free for all its users.  This
+General Public License applies to most of the Free Software
+Foundation's software and to any other program whose authors commit to
+using it.  (Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by
+the GNU Library General Public License instead.)  You can apply it to
+your programs, too.
+
+  When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not
+price.  Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you
+have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for
+this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it
+if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it
+in new free programs; and that you know you can do these things.
+
+  To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid
+anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights.
+These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you
+distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it.
+
+  For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether
+gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that
+you have.  You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the
+source code.  And you must show them these terms so they know their
+rights.
+
+  We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and
+(2) offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy,
+distribute and/or modify the software.
+
+  Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make certain
+that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free
+software.  If the software is modified by someone else and passed on, we
+want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so
+that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original
+authors' reputations.
+
+  Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software
+patents.  We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free
+program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the
+program proprietary.  To prevent this, we have made it clear that any
+patent must be licensed for everyone's free use or not licensed at all.
+
+  The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and
+modification follow.
+
+@iftex
+@unnumberedsec TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
+@end iftex
+@ifinfo
+@center TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
+@end ifinfo
+
+@enumerate 0
+@item
+This License applies to any program or other work which contains
+a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed
+under the terms of this General Public License.  The ``Program'', below,
+refers to any such program or work, and a ``work based on the Program''
+means either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law:
+that is to say, a work containing the Program or a portion of it,
+either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated into another
+language.  (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in
+the term ``modification''.)  Each licensee is addressed as ``you''.
+
+Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not
+covered by this License; they are outside its scope.  The act of
+running the Program is not restricted, and the output from the Program
+is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the
+Program (independent of having been made by running the Program).
+Whether that is true depends on what the Program does.
+
+@item
+You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program's
+source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you
+conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate
+copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the
+notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty;
+and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License
+along with the Program.
+
+You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and
+you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee.
+
+@item
+You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion
+of it, thus forming a work based on the Program, and copy and
+distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1
+above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions:
+
+@enumerate a
+@item
+You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices
+stating that you changed the files and the date of any change.
+
+@item
+You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in
+whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or any
+part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third
+parties under the terms of this License.
+
+@item
+If the modified program normally reads commands interactively
+when run, you must cause it, when started running for such
+interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display an
+announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a
+notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that you provide
+a warranty) and that users may redistribute the program under
+these conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy of this
+License.  (Exception: if the Program itself is interactive but
+does not normally print such an announcement, your work based on
+the Program is not required to print an announcement.)
+@end enumerate
+
+These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole.  If
+identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Program,
+and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in
+themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those
+sections when you distribute them as separate works.  But when you
+distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based
+on the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of
+this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the
+entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it.
+
+Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest
+your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to
+exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or
+collective works based on the Program.
+
+In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program
+with the Program (or with a work based on the Program) on a volume of
+a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under
+the scope of this License.
+
+@item
+You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it,
+under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of
+Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following:
+
+@enumerate a
+@item
+Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable
+source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections
+1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or,
+
+@item
+Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three
+years, to give any third party, for a charge no more than your
+cost of physically performing source distribution, a complete
+machine-readable copy of the corresponding source code, to be
+distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium
+customarily used for software interchange; or,
+
+@item
+Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer
+to distribute corresponding source code.  (This alternative is
+allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you
+received the program in object code or executable form with such
+an offer, in accord with Subsection b above.)
+@end enumerate
+
+The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for
+making modifications to it.  For an executable work, complete source
+code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any
+associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to
+control compilation and installation of the executable.  However, as a
+special exception, the source code distributed need not include
+anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary
+form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the
+operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component
+itself accompanies the executable.
+
+If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering
+access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent
+access to copy the source code from the same place counts as
+distribution of the source code, even though third parties are not
+compelled to copy the source along with the object code.
+
+@item
+You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program
+except as expressly provided under this License.  Any attempt
+otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is
+void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License.
+However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under
+this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such
+parties remain in full compliance.
+
+@item
+You are not required to accept this License, since you have not
+signed it.  However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or
+distribute the Program or its derivative works.  These actions are
+prohibited by law if you do not accept this License.  Therefore, by
+modifying or distributing the Program (or any work based on the
+Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and
+all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying
+the Program or works based on it.
+
+@item
+Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the
+Program), the recipient automatically receives a license from the
+original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program subject to
+these terms and conditions.  You may not impose any further
+restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein.
+You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to
+this License.
+
+@item
+If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent
+infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues),
+conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or
+otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not
+excuse you from the conditions of this License.  If you cannot
+distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this
+License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you
+may not distribute the Program at all.  For example, if a patent
+license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Program by
+all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then
+the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to
+refrain entirely from distribution of the Program.
+
+If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under
+any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to
+apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other
+circumstances.
+
+It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any
+patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any
+such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the
+integrity of the free software distribution system, which is
+implemented by public license practices.  Many people have made
+generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed
+through that system in reliance on consistent application of that
+system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing
+to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot
+impose that choice.
+
+This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to
+be a consequence of the rest of this License.
+
+@item
+If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in
+certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the
+original copyright holder who places the Program under this License
+may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding
+those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among
+countries not thus excluded.  In such case, this License incorporates
+the limitation as if written in the body of this License.
+
+@item
+The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions
+of the General Public License from time to time.  Such new versions will
+be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to
+address new problems or concerns.
+
+Each version is given a distinguishing version number.  If the Program
+specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and ``any
+later version'', you have the option of following the terms and conditions
+either of that version or of any later version published by the Free
+Software Foundation.  If the Program does not specify a version number of
+this License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software
+Foundation.
+
+@item
+If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free
+programs whose distribution conditions are different, write to the author
+to ask for permission.  For software which is copyrighted by the Free
+Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes
+make exceptions for this.  Our decision will be guided by the two goals
+of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and
+of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally.
+
+@iftex
+@vskip -@baselineskip
+@vskip -@baselineskip
+@heading NO WARRANTY
+@end iftex
+@ifinfo
+@center NO WARRANTY
+@end ifinfo
+
+@item
+BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY
+FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW.  EXCEPT WHEN
+OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES
+PROVIDE THE PROGRAM ``AS IS'' WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED
+OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
+MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  THE ENTIRE RISK AS
+TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU.  SHOULD THE
+PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING,
+REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
+
+@item
+IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING
+WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR
+REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES,
+INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING
+OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED
+TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY
+YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER
+PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE
+POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
+@end enumerate
+
+@iftex
+@heading END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
+@end iftex
+@ifinfo
+@center END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
+@end ifinfo
+
+@page
+@unnumberedsec How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs
+
+  If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest
+possible use to the public, the best way to achieve this is to make it
+free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms.
+
+  To do so, attach the following notices to the program.  It is safest
+to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively
+convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least
+the ``copyright'' line and a pointer to where the full notice is found.
+
+@smallexample
+@var{one line to give the program's name and an idea of what it does.}
+Copyright (C) 19@var{yy}  @var{name of author}
+
+This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License
+as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2
+of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+
+This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the
+GNU General Public License for more details.
+
+You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
+Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.
+@end smallexample
+
+Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.
+
+If the program is interactive, make it output a short notice like this
+when it starts in an interactive mode:
+
+@smallexample
+Gnomovision version 69, Copyright (C) 19@var{yy} @var{name of author}
+Gnomovision comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details
+type `show w'.  This is free software, and you are welcome
+to redistribute it under certain conditions; type `show c' 
+for details.
+@end smallexample
+
+The hypothetical commands @samp{show w} and @samp{show c} should show
+the appropriate parts of the General Public License.  Of course, the
+commands you use may be called something other than @samp{show w} and
+@samp{show c}; they could even be mouse-clicks or menu items---whatever
+suits your program.
+
+You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your
+school, if any, to sign a ``copyright disclaimer'' for the program, if
+necessary.  Here is a sample; alter the names:
+
+@example
+@group
+Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright
+interest in the program `Gnomovision'
+(which makes passes at compilers) written 
+by James Hacker.
+
+@var{signature of Ty Coon}, 1 April 1989
+Ty Coon, President of Vice
+@end group
+@end example
+
+This General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into
+proprietary programs.  If your program is a subroutine library, you may
+consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with the
+library.  If this is what you want to do, use the GNU Library General
+Public License instead of this License.
diff --git a/install-sh b/install-sh
new file mode 100755
index 00000000..e8436696
--- /dev/null
+++ b/install-sh
@@ -0,0 +1,250 @@
+#!/bin/sh
+#
+# install - install a program, script, or datafile
+# This comes from X11R5 (mit/util/scripts/install.sh).
+#
+# Copyright 1991 by the Massachusetts Institute of Technology
+#
+# Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its
+# documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that
+# the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+# copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+# documentation, and that the name of M.I.T. not be used in advertising or
+# publicity pertaining to distribution of the software without specific,
+# written prior permission.  M.I.T. makes no representations about the
+# suitability of this software for any purpose.  It is provided "as is"
+# without express or implied warranty.
+#
+# Calling this script install-sh is preferred over install.sh, to prevent
+# `make' implicit rules from creating a file called install from it
+# when there is no Makefile.
+#
+# This script is compatible with the BSD install script, but was written
+# from scratch.  It can only install one file at a time, a restriction
+# shared with many OS's install programs.
+
+
+# set DOITPROG to echo to test this script
+
+# Don't use :- since 4.3BSD and earlier shells don't like it.
+doit="${DOITPROG-}"
+
+
+# put in absolute paths if you don't have them in your path; or use env. vars.
+
+mvprog="${MVPROG-mv}"
+cpprog="${CPPROG-cp}"
+chmodprog="${CHMODPROG-chmod}"
+chownprog="${CHOWNPROG-chown}"
+chgrpprog="${CHGRPPROG-chgrp}"
+stripprog="${STRIPPROG-strip}"
+rmprog="${RMPROG-rm}"
+mkdirprog="${MKDIRPROG-mkdir}"
+
+transformbasename=""
+transform_arg=""
+instcmd="$mvprog"
+chmodcmd="$chmodprog 0755"
+chowncmd=""
+chgrpcmd=""
+stripcmd=""
+rmcmd="$rmprog -f"
+mvcmd="$mvprog"
+src=""
+dst=""
+dir_arg=""
+
+while [ x"$1" != x ]; do
+    case $1 in
+	-c) instcmd="$cpprog"
+	    shift
+	    continue;;
+
+	-d) dir_arg=true
+	    shift
+	    continue;;
+
+	-m) chmodcmd="$chmodprog $2"
+	    shift
+	    shift
+	    continue;;
+
+	-o) chowncmd="$chownprog $2"
+	    shift
+	    shift
+	    continue;;
+
+	-g) chgrpcmd="$chgrpprog $2"
+	    shift
+	    shift
+	    continue;;
+
+	-s) stripcmd="$stripprog"
+	    shift
+	    continue;;
+
+	-t=*) transformarg=`echo $1 | sed 's/-t=//'`
+	    shift
+	    continue;;
+
+	-b=*) transformbasename=`echo $1 | sed 's/-b=//'`
+	    shift
+	    continue;;
+
+	*)  if [ x"$src" = x ]
+	    then
+		src=$1
+	    else
+		# this colon is to work around a 386BSD /bin/sh bug
+		:
+		dst=$1
+	    fi
+	    shift
+	    continue;;
+    esac
+done
+
+if [ x"$src" = x ]
+then
+	echo "install:	no input file specified"
+	exit 1
+else
+	true
+fi
+
+if [ x"$dir_arg" != x ]; then
+	dst=$src
+	src=""
+	
+	if [ -d $dst ]; then
+		instcmd=:
+	else
+		instcmd=mkdir
+	fi
+else
+
+# Waiting for this to be detected by the "$instcmd $src $dsttmp" command
+# might cause directories to be created, which would be especially bad 
+# if $src (and thus $dsttmp) contains '*'.
+
+	if [ -f $src -o -d $src ]
+	then
+		true
+	else
+		echo "install:  $src does not exist"
+		exit 1
+	fi
+	
+	if [ x"$dst" = x ]
+	then
+		echo "install:	no destination specified"
+		exit 1
+	else
+		true
+	fi
+
+# If destination is a directory, append the input filename; if your system
+# does not like double slashes in filenames, you may need to add some logic
+
+	if [ -d $dst ]
+	then
+		dst="$dst"/`basename $src`
+	else
+		true
+	fi
+fi
+
+## this sed command emulates the dirname command
+dstdir=`echo $dst | sed -e 's,[^/]*$,,;s,/$,,;s,^$,.,'`
+
+# Make sure that the destination directory exists.
+#  this part is taken from Noah Friedman's mkinstalldirs script
+
+# Skip lots of stat calls in the usual case.
+if [ ! -d "$dstdir" ]; then
+defaultIFS='	
+'
+IFS="${IFS-${defaultIFS}}"
+
+oIFS="${IFS}"
+# Some sh's can't handle IFS=/ for some reason.
+IFS='%'
+set - `echo ${dstdir} | sed -e 's@/@%@g' -e 's@^%@/@'`
+IFS="${oIFS}"
+
+pathcomp=''
+
+while [ $# -ne 0 ] ; do
+	pathcomp="${pathcomp}${1}"
+	shift
+
+	if [ ! -d "${pathcomp}" ] ;
+        then
+		$mkdirprog "${pathcomp}"
+	else
+		true
+	fi
+
+	pathcomp="${pathcomp}/"
+done
+fi
+
+if [ x"$dir_arg" != x ]
+then
+	$doit $instcmd $dst &&
+
+	if [ x"$chowncmd" != x ]; then $doit $chowncmd $dst; else true ; fi &&
+	if [ x"$chgrpcmd" != x ]; then $doit $chgrpcmd $dst; else true ; fi &&
+	if [ x"$stripcmd" != x ]; then $doit $stripcmd $dst; else true ; fi &&
+	if [ x"$chmodcmd" != x ]; then $doit $chmodcmd $dst; else true ; fi
+else
+
+# If we're going to rename the final executable, determine the name now.
+
+	if [ x"$transformarg" = x ] 
+	then
+		dstfile=`basename $dst`
+	else
+		dstfile=`basename $dst $transformbasename | 
+			sed $transformarg`$transformbasename
+	fi
+
+# don't allow the sed command to completely eliminate the filename
+
+	if [ x"$dstfile" = x ] 
+	then
+		dstfile=`basename $dst`
+	else
+		true
+	fi
+
+# Make a temp file name in the proper directory.
+
+	dsttmp=$dstdir/#inst.$$#
+
+# Move or copy the file name to the temp name
+
+	$doit $instcmd $src $dsttmp &&
+
+	trap "rm -f ${dsttmp}" 0 &&
+
+# and set any options; do chmod last to preserve setuid bits
+
+# If any of these fail, we abort the whole thing.  If we want to
+# ignore errors from any of these, just make sure not to ignore
+# errors from the above "$doit $instcmd $src $dsttmp" command.
+
+	if [ x"$chowncmd" != x ]; then $doit $chowncmd $dsttmp; else true;fi &&
+	if [ x"$chgrpcmd" != x ]; then $doit $chgrpcmd $dsttmp; else true;fi &&
+	if [ x"$stripcmd" != x ]; then $doit $stripcmd $dsttmp; else true;fi &&
+	if [ x"$chmodcmd" != x ]; then $doit $chmodcmd $dsttmp; else true;fi &&
+
+# Now rename the file to the real destination.
+
+	$doit $rmcmd -f $dstdir/$dstfile &&
+	$doit $mvcmd $dsttmp $dstdir/$dstfile 
+
+fi &&
+
+
+exit 0
diff --git a/lgpl.tex b/lgpl.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..a52b9cd5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/lgpl.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,577 @@
+% \iffalse <meta-comment>
+%
+% $Id: lgpl.tex,v 1.1 1999/05/05 19:23:47 mdw Exp $
+%
+% The GNU Library General Public License as a LaTeX section
+%
+% (c) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+%   LaTeX markup and minor formatting changes by Mark Wooding
+%
+
+%----- Revision history -----------------------------------------------------
+%
+% $Log: lgpl.tex,v $
+% Revision 1.1  1999/05/05 19:23:47  mdw
+% Initial revision
+%
+
+% --- Chapter heading ---
+%
+% We don't know whether this ought to be a section or a chapter.  Easy.
+% We'll see if chapters are possible.
+%
+% \fi
+
+\begingroup
+\makeatletter
+
+\edef\next#1#2#3{\relax
+  \ifx\chapter\@@undefined
+    \ifx\documentclass\@notprerr#2\else#3\fi
+  \else#1\fi
+}
+
+\expandafter\endgroup\next
+{
+  \let\gpltoplevel\chapter
+  \let\gplsec\section
+  \let\gplend\endinput
+}{
+  \let\gpltoplevel\section
+  \let\gplsec\subsection
+  \let\gplend\endinput
+}{
+  \documentclass[a4paper]{article}
+  \def\gpltoplevel#1{%
+    \vspace*{1in}%
+    \hbox to\hsize{\hfil\LARGE\bfseries#1\hfil}%
+    \vspace{1in}%
+  }
+  \let\gplsec\section
+  \def\gplend{\end{document}}
+  \advance\textwidth1in
+  \advance\oddsidemargin-.5in
+  \sloppy
+  \begin{document}
+}
+
+%^^A-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+\gpltoplevel{The GNU Library General Public License}
+
+The following is the text of the GNU Library General Public License, under
+the terms of which this software is distrubuted.
+
+\vspace{12pt}
+
+\begin{center}
+\textbf{GNU LIBRARY GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE} \\
+Version 2, June 1991
+\end{center}
+
+\begin{center}
+Copyright \copyright\ 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc. \\
+59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA
+
+Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies \\
+of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
+\end{center}
+
+
+\gplsec{Preamble}
+
+The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to
+share and change it.  By contrast, the GNU General Public Licenses are
+intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software--to make
+sure the software is free for all its users.
+
+This license, the Library General Public License, applies to some specially
+designated Free Software Foundation software, and to any other libraries
+whose authors decide to use it.  You can use it for your libraries, too.
+
+When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price.  Our
+General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom
+to distribute copies of free software (and charge for this service if you
+wish), that you receive source code or can get it if you want it, that you
+can change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs; and that
+you know you can do these things.
+
+To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone to
+deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights.  These
+restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute
+copies of the library, or if you modify it.
+
+For example, if you distribute copies of the library, whether gratis or for a
+fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that we gave you.  You must
+make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code.  If you link a
+program with the library, you must provide complete object files to the
+recipients so that they can relink them with the library, after making
+changes to the library and recompiling it.  And you must show them these
+terms so they know their rights.
+
+Our method of protecting your rights has two steps: (1) copyright the
+library, and (2) offer you this license which gives you legal permission to
+copy, distribute and/or modify the library.
+
+Also, for each distributor's protection, we want to make certain that
+everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free library.  If the
+library is modified by someone else and passed on, we want its recipients to
+know that what they have is not the original version, so that any problems
+introduced by others will not reflect on the original authors' reputations.
+
+Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software patents.  We
+wish to avoid the danger that companies distributing free software will
+individually obtain patent licenses, thus in effect transforming the program
+into proprietary software.  To prevent this, we have made it clear that any
+patent must be licensed for everyone's free use or not licensed at all.
+
+Most GNU software, including some libraries, is covered by the ordinary GNU
+General Public License, which was designed for utility programs.  This
+license, the GNU Library General Public License, applies to certain
+designated libraries.  This license is quite different from the ordinary one;
+be sure to read it in full, and don't assume that anything in it is the same
+as in the ordinary license.
+
+The reason we have a separate public license for some libraries is that they
+blur the distinction we usually make between modifying or adding to a program
+and simply using it.  Linking a program with a library, without changing the
+library, is in some sense simply using the library, and is analogous to
+running a utility program or application program.  However, in a textual and
+legal sense, the linked executable is a combined work, a derivative of the
+original library, and the ordinary General Public License treats it as such.
+
+Because of this blurred distinction, using the ordinary General Public
+License for libraries did not effectively promote software sharing, because
+most developers did not use the libraries.  We concluded that weaker
+conditions might promote sharing better.
+
+However, unrestricted linking of non-free programs would deprive the users of
+those programs of all benefit from the free status of the libraries
+themselves.  This Library General Public License is intended to permit
+developers of non-free programs to use free libraries, while preserving your
+freedom as a user of such programs to change the free libraries that are
+incorporated in them.  (We have not seen how to achieve this as regards
+changes in header files, but we have achieved it as regards changes in the
+actual functions of the Library.)  The hope is that this will lead to faster
+development of free libraries.
+
+The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification
+follow.  Pay close attention to the difference between a ``work based on the
+library'' and a ``work that uses the library''.  The former contains code
+derived from the library, while the latter only works together with the
+library.
+
+Note that it is possible for a library to be covered by the ordinary General
+Public License rather than by this special one.
+
+
+\gplsec{Terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification}
+
+\begin{enumerate}
+
+\makeatletter \setcounter{\@listctr}{-1} \makeatother
+
+\item [0.] This License Agreement applies to any software library which
+      contains a notice placed by the copyright holder or other authorized
+      party saying it may be distributed under the terms of this Library
+      General Public License (also called ``this License'').  Each licensee
+      is addressed as ``you''.
+
+      A ``library'' means a collection of software functions and/or data
+      prepared so as to be conveniently linked with application programs
+      (which use some of those functions and data) to form executables.
+
+      The ``Library'', below, refers to any such software library or work
+      which has been distributed under these terms.  A ``work based on the
+      Library'' means either the Library or any derivative work under
+      copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Library or a
+      portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated
+      straightforwardly into another language.  (Hereinafter, translation is
+      included without limitation in the term ``modification''.)
+
+      ``Source code'' for a work means the preferred form of the work for
+      making modifications to it.  For a library, complete source code means
+      all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any associated
+      interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control
+      compilation and installation of the library.
+
+      Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not
+      covered by this License; they are outside its scope.  The act of
+      running a program using the Library is not restricted, and output from
+      such a program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based
+      on the Library (independent of the use of the Library in a tool for
+      writing it).  Whether that is true depends on what the Library does and
+      what the program that uses the Library does.
+  
+\item [1.] You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Library's
+      complete source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that
+      you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate
+      copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the
+      notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty;
+      and distribute a copy of this License along with the Library.
+
+      You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and
+      you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee.
+
+\item [2.] You may modify your copy or copies of the Library or any portion
+      of it, thus forming a work based on the Library, and copy and
+      distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1
+      above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions:
+
+      \begin{enumerate}
+
+      \item [(a)] The modified work must itself be a software library.
+
+      \item [(b)] You must cause the files modified to carry prominent
+            notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any
+            change.
+
+      \item [(c)] You must cause the whole of the work to be licensed at no
+            charge to all third parties under the terms of this License.
+
+      \item [(d)] If a facility in the modified Library refers to a function
+            or a table of data to be supplied by an application program that
+            uses the facility, other than as an argument passed when the
+            facility is invoked, then you must make a good faith effort to
+            ensure that, in the event an application does not supply such
+            function or table, the facility still operates, and performs
+            whatever part of its purpose remains meaningful.
+
+            (For example, a function in a library to compute square roots has
+            a purpose that is entirely well-defined independent of the
+            application.  Therefore, Subsection 2d requires that any
+            application-supplied function or table used by this function must
+            be optional: if the application does not supply it, the square
+            root function must still compute square roots.)
+
+      \end{enumerate}
+
+      These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole.  If
+      identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Library,
+      and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in
+      themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those
+      sections when you distribute them as separate works.  But when you
+      distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based
+      on the Library, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of
+      this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the
+      entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote
+      it.
+
+      Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest
+      your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to
+      exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or
+      collective works based on the Library.
+
+      In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Library
+      with the Library (or with a work based on the Library) on a volume of a
+      storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the
+      scope of this License.
+
+\item [3.] You may opt to apply the terms of the ordinary GNU General Public
+      License instead of this License to a given copy of the Library.  To do
+      this, you must alter all the notices that refer to this License, so
+      that they refer to the ordinary GNU General Public License, version 2,
+      instead of to this License.  (If a newer version than version 2 of the
+      ordinary GNU General Public License has appeared, then you can specify
+      that version instead if you wish.)  Do not make any other change in
+      these notices.
+
+      Once this change is made in a given copy, it is irreversible for that
+      copy, so the ordinary GNU General Public License applies to all
+      subsequent copies and derivative works made from that copy.
+
+      This option is useful when you wish to copy part of the code of the
+      Library into a program that is not a library.
+
+\item [4.] You may copy and distribute the Library (or a portion or
+      derivative of it, under Section 2) in object code or executable form
+      under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you accompany
+      it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code, which
+      must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a
+      medium customarily used for software interchange.
+
+      If distribution of object code is made by offering access to copy from
+      a designated place, then offering equivalent access to copy the source
+      code from the same place satisfies the requirement to distribute the
+      source code, even though third parties are not compelled to copy the
+      source along with the object code.
+
+\item [5.] A program that contains no derivative of any portion of the
+      Library, but is designed to work with the Library by being compiled or
+      linked with it, is called a ``work that uses the Library''.  Such a
+      work, in isolation, is not a derivative work of the Library, and
+      therefore falls outside the scope of this License.
+
+      However, linking a ``work that uses the Library'' with the Library
+      creates an executable that is a derivative of the Library (because it
+      contains portions of the Library), rather than a ``work that uses the
+      library''.  The executable is therefore covered by this License.
+      Section 6 states terms for distribution of such executables.
+
+      When a ``work that uses the Library'' uses material from a header file
+      that is part of the Library, the object code for the work may be a
+      derivative work of the Library even though the source code is not.
+      Whether this is true is especially significant if the work can be
+      linked without the Library, or if the work is itself a library.  The
+      threshold for this to be true is not precisely defined by law.
+
+      If such an object file uses only numerical parameters, data structure
+      layouts and accessors, and small macros and small inline functions (ten
+      lines or less in length), then the use of the object file is
+      unrestricted, regardless of whether it is legally a derivative work.
+      (Executables containing this object code plus portions of the Library
+      will still fall under Section 6.)
+
+      Otherwise, if the work is a derivative of the Library, you may
+      distribute the object code for the work under the terms of Section 6.
+      Any executables containing that work also fall under Section 6, whether
+      or not they are linked directly with the Library itself.
+
+\item [6.] As an exception to the Sections above, you may also compile or
+      link a ``work that uses the Library'' with the Library to produce a
+      work containing portions of the Library, and distribute that work under
+      terms of your choice, provided that the terms permit modification of
+      the work for the customer's own use and reverse engineering for
+      debugging such modifications.
+
+      You must give prominent notice with each copy of the work that the
+      Library is used in it and that the Library and its use are covered by
+      this License.  You must supply a copy of this License.  If the work
+      during execution displays copyright notices, you must include the
+      copyright notice for the Library among them, as well as a reference
+      directing the user to the copy of this License.  Also, you must do one
+      of these things:
+
+      \begin{enumerate}
+
+      \item [(a)] Accompany the work with the complete corresponding
+            machine-readable source code for the Library including whatever
+            changes were used in the work (which must be distributed under
+            Sections 1 and 2 above); and, if the work is an executable linked
+            with the Library, with the complete machine-readable ``work that
+            uses the Library'', as object code and/or source code, so that
+            the user can modify the Library and then relink to produce a
+            modified executable containing the modified Library.  (It is
+            understood that the user who changes the contents of definitions
+            files in the Library will not necessarily be able to recompile
+            the application to use the modified definitions.)
+
+      \item [(b)] Accompany the work with a written offer, valid for at
+            least three years, to give the same user the materials specified
+            in Subsection 6a, above, for a charge no more than the cost of
+            performing this distribution.
+
+      \item [(c)] If distribution of the work is made by offering access to
+            copy from a designated place, offer equivalent access to copy the
+            above specified materials from the same place.
+
+      \item [(d)] Verify that the user has already received a copy of these
+            materials or that you have already sent this user a copy.
+
+      \end{enumerate}
+
+      For an executable, the required form of the ``work that uses the
+      Library'' must include any data and utility programs needed for
+      reproducing the executable from it.  However, as a special exception,
+      the source code distributed need not include anything that is normally
+      distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major
+      components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on
+      which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies
+      the executable.
+
+      It may happen that this requirement contradicts the license
+      restrictions of other proprietary libraries that do not normally
+      accompany the operating system.  Such a contradiction means you cannot
+      use both them and the Library together in an executable that you
+      distribute.
+
+\item [7.] You may place library facilities that are a work based on the
+      Library side-by-side in a single library together with other library
+      facilities not covered by this License, and distribute such a combined
+      library, provided that the separate distribution of the work based on
+      the Library and of the other library facilities is otherwise
+      permitted, and provided that you do these two things:
+
+      \begin{enumerate}
+
+      \item [(a)] Accompany the combined library with a copy of the same work
+            based on the Library, uncombined with any other library
+            facilities.  This must be distributed under the terms of the
+            Sections above.
+
+      \item [(b)] Give prominent notice with the combined library of the fact
+            that part of it is a work based on the Library, and explaining
+            where to find the accompanying uncombined form of the same work.
+
+      \end{enumerate}
+
+\item [8.] You may not copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute
+      the Library except as expressly provided under this License.  Any
+      attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute
+      the Library is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under
+      this License.  However, parties who have received copies, or rights,
+      from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so
+      long as such parties remain in full compliance.
+
+\item [9.] You are not required to accept this License, since you have not
+      signed it.  However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or
+      distribute the Library or its derivative works.  These actions are
+      prohibited by law if you do not accept this License.  Therefore, by
+      modifying or distributing the Library (or any work based on the
+      Library), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and
+      all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the
+      Library or works based on it.
+
+\item [10.] Each time you redistribute the Library (or any work based on the
+      Library), the recipient automatically receives a license from the
+      original licensor to copy, distribute, link with or modify the Library
+      subject to these terms and conditions.  You may not impose any further
+      restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein.
+      You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to
+      this License.
+
+\item [11.] If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent
+      infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues),
+      conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or
+      otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not
+      excuse you from the conditions of this License.  If you cannot
+      distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this
+      License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you
+      may not distribute the Library at all.  For example, if a patent
+      license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Library by
+      all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then
+      the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to
+      refrain entirely from distribution of the Library.
+
+      If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under
+      any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to
+      apply, and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other
+      circumstances.
+
+      It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any
+      patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any
+      such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the
+      integrity of the free software distribution system which is implemented
+      by public license practices.  Many people have made generous
+      contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that
+      system in reliance on consistent application of that system; it is up
+      to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute
+      software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that
+      choice.
+
+      This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to
+      be a consequence of the rest of this License.
+
+\item [12.] If the distribution and/or use of the Library is restricted in
+      certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the
+      original copyright holder who places the Library under this License may
+      add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those
+      countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries
+      not thus excluded.  In such case, this License incorporates the
+      limitation as if written in the body of this License.
+
+\item [13.] The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new
+      versions of the Library General Public License from time to time.  Such
+      new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may
+      differ in detail to address new problems or concerns.
+
+      Each version is given a distinguishing version number.  If the Library
+      specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and
+      ``any later version'', you have the option of following the terms and
+      conditions either of that version or of any later version published by
+      the Free Software Foundation.  If the Library does not specify a
+      license version number, you may choose any version ever published by
+      the Free Software Foundation.
+
+\item [14.] If you wish to incorporate parts of the Library into other free
+      programs whose distribution conditions are incompatible with these,
+      write to the author to ask for permission.  For software which is
+      copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation, write to the Free Software
+      Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this.  Our decision will
+      be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all
+      derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse
+      of software generally.
+
+\begin{center}
+NO WARRANTY
+\end{center}
+
+\bfseries
+
+\item [15.] Because the Library is licensed free of charge, there is no
+      warranty for the Library, to the extent permitted by applicable law.
+      Except when otherwise stated in writing the copyright holders and/or
+      other parties provide the Library ``as is'' without warranty of any
+      kind, either expressed or implied, including, but not limited to, the
+      implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular
+      purpose.  The entire risk as to the quality and performance of the
+      Library is with you.  Should the Library prove defective, you assume
+      the cost of all necessary servicing, repair or correction.
+
+\item [16.] In no event unless required by applicable law or agreed to in
+      writing will any copyright holder, or any other party who may modify
+      and/or redistribute the Library as permitted above, be liable to you
+      for damages, including any general, special, incidental or
+      consequential damages arising out of the use or inability to use the
+      Library (including but not limited to loss of data or data being
+      rendered inaccurate or losses sustained by you or third parties or a
+      failure of the Library to operate with any other software), even if
+      such holder or other party has been advised of the possibility of such
+      damages.
+
+\end{enumerate}
+
+\begin{center}
+\textbf{END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS}
+\end{center}
+
+
+\gplsec{Appendix: How to apply these terms to your new libraries}
+
+If you develop a new library, and you want it to be of the greatest possible
+use to the public, we recommend making it free software that everyone can
+redistribute and change.  You can do so by permitting redistribution under
+these terms (or, alternatively, under the terms of the ordinary General
+Public License).
+
+To apply these terms, attach the following notices to the library.  It is
+safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively
+convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least the
+``copyright'' line and a pointer to where the full notice is found.
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+<one line to give the library's name and a brief idea of what it does.>
+Copyright (C) <year>  <name of author>
+
+This library is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+modify it under the terms of the GNU Library General Public
+License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+
+This library is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+Library General Public License for more details.
+
+You should have received a copy of the GNU Library General Public License
+along with this library; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation,
+Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.
+\end{verbatim}
+
+Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.
+
+You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your
+school, if any, to sign a ``copyright disclaimer'' for the library, if
+necessary.  Here is a sample; alter the names:
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the
+library `Frob' (a library for tweaking knobs) written by James
+Random Hacker.
+
+<signature of Ty Coon>, 1 April 1990
+Ty Coon, President of Vice
+\end{verbatim}
+
+That's all there is to it!
+
+\gplend
diff --git a/lgpl.texi b/lgpl.texi
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..2db17b4b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/lgpl.texi
@@ -0,0 +1,549 @@
+@c This LGPL is meant to be included from other files.
+@c To format a standalone LGPL, use liblic.texi.
+
+@ifset lgpl-appendix
+@appendix GNU LIBRARY GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
+@end ifset
+
+@ifclear lgpl-appendix
+@unnumbered GNU LIBRARY GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
+@end ifclear
+@center Version 2, June 1991
+
+@display
+Copyright @copyright{} 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA
+
+Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
+of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
+
+[This is the first released version of the library GPL.  It is
+ numbered 2 because it goes with version 2 of the ordinary GPL.]
+@end display
+
+@unnumberedsec Preamble
+
+  The licenses for most software are designed to take away your
+freedom to share and change it.  By contrast, the GNU General Public
+Licenses are intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change
+free software---to make sure the software is free for all its users.
+
+  This license, the Library General Public License, applies to some
+specially designated Free Software Foundation software, and to any
+other libraries whose authors decide to use it.  You can use it for
+your libraries, too.
+
+  When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not
+price.  Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you
+have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for
+this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it
+if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it
+in new free programs; and that you know you can do these things.
+
+  To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid
+anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights.
+These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if
+you distribute copies of the library, or if you modify it.
+
+  For example, if you distribute copies of the library, whether gratis
+or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that we gave
+you.  You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source
+code.  If you link a program with the library, you must provide
+complete object files to the recipients so that they can relink them
+with the library, after making changes to the library and recompiling
+it.  And you must show them these terms so they know their rights.
+
+  Our method of protecting your rights has two steps: (1) copyright
+the library, and (2) offer you this license which gives you legal
+permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the library.
+
+  Also, for each distributor's protection, we want to make certain
+that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free
+library.  If the library is modified by someone else and passed on, we
+want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original
+version, so that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on
+the original authors' reputations.
+
+  Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software
+patents.  We wish to avoid the danger that companies distributing free
+software will individually obtain patent licenses, thus in effect
+transforming the program into proprietary software.  To prevent this,
+we have made it clear that any patent must be licensed for everyone's
+free use or not licensed at all.
+
+  Most GNU software, including some libraries, is covered by the ordinary
+GNU General Public License, which was designed for utility programs.  This
+license, the GNU Library General Public License, applies to certain
+designated libraries.  This license is quite different from the ordinary
+one; be sure to read it in full, and don't assume that anything in it is
+the same as in the ordinary license.
+
+  The reason we have a separate public license for some libraries is that
+they blur the distinction we usually make between modifying or adding to a
+program and simply using it.  Linking a program with a library, without
+changing the library, is in some sense simply using the library, and is
+analogous to running a utility program or application program.  However, in
+a textual and legal sense, the linked executable is a combined work, a
+derivative of the original library, and the ordinary General Public License
+treats it as such.
+
+  Because of this blurred distinction, using the ordinary General
+Public License for libraries did not effectively promote software
+sharing, because most developers did not use the libraries.  We
+concluded that weaker conditions might promote sharing better.
+
+  However, unrestricted linking of non-free programs would deprive the
+users of those programs of all benefit from the free status of the
+libraries themselves.  This Library General Public License is intended to
+permit developers of non-free programs to use free libraries, while
+preserving your freedom as a user of such programs to change the free
+libraries that are incorporated in them.  (We have not seen how to achieve
+this as regards changes in header files, but we have achieved it as regards
+changes in the actual functions of the Library.)  The hope is that this
+will lead to faster development of free libraries.
+
+  The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and
+modification follow.  Pay close attention to the difference between a
+``work based on the library'' and a ``work that uses the library''.  The
+former contains code derived from the library, while the latter only
+works together with the library.
+
+  Note that it is possible for a library to be covered by the ordinary
+General Public License rather than by this special one.
+
+@iftex
+@unnumberedsec TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
+@end iftex
+@ifinfo
+@center TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
+@end ifinfo
+
+@enumerate 0
+@item
+This License Agreement applies to any software library which
+contains a notice placed by the copyright holder or other authorized
+party saying it may be distributed under the terms of this Library
+General Public License (also called ``this License'').  Each licensee is
+addressed as ``you''.
+
+  A ``library'' means a collection of software functions and/or data
+prepared so as to be conveniently linked with application programs
+(which use some of those functions and data) to form executables.
+
+  The ``Library'', below, refers to any such software library or work
+which has been distributed under these terms.  A ``work based on the
+Library'' means either the Library or any derivative work under
+copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Library or a
+portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated
+straightforwardly into another language.  (Hereinafter, translation is
+included without limitation in the term ``modification''.)
+
+  ``Source code'' for a work means the preferred form of the work for
+making modifications to it.  For a library, complete source code means
+all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any associated
+interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control compilation
+and installation of the library.
+
+  Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not
+covered by this License; they are outside its scope.  The act of
+running a program using the Library is not restricted, and output from
+such a program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based
+on the Library (independent of the use of the Library in a tool for
+writing it).  Whether that is true depends on what the Library does
+and what the program that uses the Library does.
+  
+@item
+You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Library's
+complete source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that
+you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an
+appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact
+all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any
+warranty; and distribute a copy of this License along with the
+Library.
+
+  You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy,
+and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a
+fee.
+
+@item
+You may modify your copy or copies of the Library or any portion
+of it, thus forming a work based on the Library, and copy and
+distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1
+above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions:
+
+@enumerate a
+@item
+The modified work must itself be a software library.
+
+@item
+You must cause the files modified to carry prominent notices
+stating that you changed the files and the date of any change.
+
+@item
+You must cause the whole of the work to be licensed at no
+charge to all third parties under the terms of this License.
+
+@item
+If a facility in the modified Library refers to a function or a
+table of data to be supplied by an application program that uses
+the facility, other than as an argument passed when the facility
+is invoked, then you must make a good faith effort to ensure that,
+in the event an application does not supply such function or
+table, the facility still operates, and performs whatever part of
+its purpose remains meaningful.
+
+(For example, a function in a library to compute square roots has
+a purpose that is entirely well-defined independent of the
+application.  Therefore, Subsection 2d requires that any
+application-supplied function or table used by this function must
+be optional: if the application does not supply it, the square
+root function must still compute square roots.)
+@end enumerate
+
+These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole.  If
+identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Library,
+and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in
+themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those
+sections when you distribute them as separate works.  But when you
+distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based
+on the Library, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of
+this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the
+entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote
+it.
+
+Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest
+your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to
+exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or
+collective works based on the Library.
+
+In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Library
+with the Library (or with a work based on the Library) on a volume of
+a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under
+the scope of this License.
+
+@item
+You may opt to apply the terms of the ordinary GNU General Public
+License instead of this License to a given copy of the Library.  To do
+this, you must alter all the notices that refer to this License, so
+that they refer to the ordinary GNU General Public License, version 2,
+instead of to this License.  (If a newer version than version 2 of the
+ordinary GNU General Public License has appeared, then you can specify
+that version instead if you wish.)  Do not make any other change in
+these notices.
+
+  Once this change is made in a given copy, it is irreversible for
+that copy, so the ordinary GNU General Public License applies to all
+subsequent copies and derivative works made from that copy.
+
+  This option is useful when you wish to copy part of the code of
+the Library into a program that is not a library.
+
+@item
+You may copy and distribute the Library (or a portion or
+derivative of it, under Section 2) in object code or executable form
+under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you accompany
+it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code, which
+must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a
+medium customarily used for software interchange.
+
+  If distribution of object code is made by offering access to copy
+from a designated place, then offering equivalent access to copy the
+source code from the same place satisfies the requirement to
+distribute the source code, even though third parties are not
+compelled to copy the source along with the object code.
+
+@item
+A program that contains no derivative of any portion of the
+Library, but is designed to work with the Library by being compiled or
+linked with it, is called a ``work that uses the Library''.  Such a
+work, in isolation, is not a derivative work of the Library, and
+therefore falls outside the scope of this License.
+
+  However, linking a ``work that uses the Library'' with the Library
+creates an executable that is a derivative of the Library (because it
+contains portions of the Library), rather than a ``work that uses the
+library''.  The executable is therefore covered by this License.
+Section 6 states terms for distribution of such executables.
+
+  When a ``work that uses the Library'' uses material from a header file
+that is part of the Library, the object code for the work may be a
+derivative work of the Library even though the source code is not.
+Whether this is true is especially significant if the work can be
+linked without the Library, or if the work is itself a library.  The
+threshold for this to be true is not precisely defined by law.
+
+  If such an object file uses only numerical parameters, data
+structure layouts and accessors, and small macros and small inline
+functions (ten lines or less in length), then the use of the object
+file is unrestricted, regardless of whether it is legally a derivative
+work.  (Executables containing this object code plus portions of the
+Library will still fall under Section 6.)
+
+  Otherwise, if the work is a derivative of the Library, you may
+distribute the object code for the work under the terms of Section 6.
+Any executables containing that work also fall under Section 6,
+whether or not they are linked directly with the Library itself.
+
+@item
+As an exception to the Sections above, you may also compile or
+link a ``work that uses the Library'' with the Library to produce a
+work containing portions of the Library, and distribute that work
+under terms of your choice, provided that the terms permit
+modification of the work for the customer's own use and reverse
+engineering for debugging such modifications.
+
+  You must give prominent notice with each copy of the work that the
+Library is used in it and that the Library and its use are covered by
+this License.  You must supply a copy of this License.  If the work
+during execution displays copyright notices, you must include the
+copyright notice for the Library among them, as well as a reference
+directing the user to the copy of this License.  Also, you must do one
+of these things:
+
+@enumerate a
+@item
+Accompany the work with the complete corresponding
+machine-readable source code for the Library including whatever
+changes were used in the work (which must be distributed under
+Sections 1 and 2 above); and, if the work is an executable linked
+with the Library, with the complete machine-readable ``work that
+uses the Library'', as object code and/or source code, so that the
+user can modify the Library and then relink to produce a modified
+executable containing the modified Library.  (It is understood
+that the user who changes the contents of definitions files in the
+Library will not necessarily be able to recompile the application
+to use the modified definitions.)
+
+@item
+Accompany the work with a written offer, valid for at
+least three years, to give the same user the materials
+specified in Subsection 6a, above, for a charge no more
+than the cost of performing this distribution.
+
+@item
+If distribution of the work is made by offering access to copy
+from a designated place, offer equivalent access to copy the above
+specified materials from the same place.
+
+@item
+Verify that the user has already received a copy of these
+materials or that you have already sent this user a copy.
+@end enumerate
+
+  For an executable, the required form of the ``work that uses the
+Library'' must include any data and utility programs needed for
+reproducing the executable from it.  However, as a special exception,
+the source code distributed need not include anything that is normally
+distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major
+components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on
+which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies
+the executable.
+
+  It may happen that this requirement contradicts the license
+restrictions of other proprietary libraries that do not normally
+accompany the operating system.  Such a contradiction means you cannot
+use both them and the Library together in an executable that you
+distribute.
+
+@item
+You may place library facilities that are a work based on the
+Library side-by-side in a single library together with other library
+facilities not covered by this License, and distribute such a combined
+library, provided that the separate distribution of the work based on
+the Library and of the other library facilities is otherwise
+permitted, and provided that you do these two things:
+
+@enumerate a
+@item
+Accompany the combined library with a copy of the same work
+based on the Library, uncombined with any other library
+facilities.  This must be distributed under the terms of the
+Sections above.
+
+@item
+Give prominent notice with the combined library of the fact
+that part of it is a work based on the Library, and explaining
+where to find the accompanying uncombined form of the same work.
+@end enumerate
+
+@item
+You may not copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute
+the Library except as expressly provided under this License.  Any
+attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or
+distribute the Library is void, and will automatically terminate your
+rights under this License.  However, parties who have received copies,
+or rights, from you under this License will not have their licenses
+terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance.
+
+@item
+You are not required to accept this License, since you have not
+signed it.  However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or
+distribute the Library or its derivative works.  These actions are
+prohibited by law if you do not accept this License.  Therefore, by
+modifying or distributing the Library (or any work based on the
+Library), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and
+all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying
+the Library or works based on it.
+
+@item
+Each time you redistribute the Library (or any work based on the
+Library), the recipient automatically receives a license from the
+original licensor to copy, distribute, link with or modify the Library
+subject to these terms and conditions.  You may not impose any further
+restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein.
+You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to
+this License.
+
+@item
+If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent
+infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues),
+conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or
+otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not
+excuse you from the conditions of this License.  If you cannot
+distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this
+License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you
+may not distribute the Library at all.  For example, if a patent
+license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Library by
+all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then
+the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to
+refrain entirely from distribution of the Library.
+
+If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any
+particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to apply,
+and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances.
+
+It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any
+patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any
+such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the
+integrity of the free software distribution system which is
+implemented by public license practices.  Many people have made
+generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed
+through that system in reliance on consistent application of that
+system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing
+to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot
+impose that choice.
+
+This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to
+be a consequence of the rest of this License.
+
+@item
+If the distribution and/or use of the Library is restricted in
+certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the
+original copyright holder who places the Library under this License may add
+an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries,
+so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus
+excluded.  In such case, this License incorporates the limitation as if
+written in the body of this License.
+
+@item
+The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new
+versions of the Library General Public License from time to time.
+Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version,
+but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns.
+
+Each version is given a distinguishing version number.  If the Library
+specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and
+``any later version'', you have the option of following the terms and
+conditions either of that version or of any later version published by
+the Free Software Foundation.  If the Library does not specify a
+license version number, you may choose any version ever published by
+the Free Software Foundation.
+
+@item
+If you wish to incorporate parts of the Library into other free
+programs whose distribution conditions are incompatible with these,
+write to the author to ask for permission.  For software which is
+copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation, write to the Free
+Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this.  Our
+decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status
+of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing
+and reuse of software generally.
+
+@iftex
+@heading NO WARRANTY
+@end iftex
+@ifinfo
+@center NO WARRANTY
+@end ifinfo
+
+@item
+BECAUSE THE LIBRARY IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO
+WARRANTY FOR THE LIBRARY, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW.
+EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR
+OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE LIBRARY ``AS IS'' WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY
+KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
+IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
+PURPOSE.  THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE
+LIBRARY IS WITH YOU.  SHOULD THE LIBRARY PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME
+THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
+
+@item
+IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN
+WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY
+AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE LIBRARY AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU
+FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR
+CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE
+LIBRARY (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING
+RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A
+FAILURE OF THE LIBRARY TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER SOFTWARE), EVEN IF
+SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
+DAMAGES.
+@end enumerate
+
+@iftex
+@heading END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
+@end iftex
+@ifinfo
+@center END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
+@end ifinfo
+
+@page
+@unnumberedsec How to Apply These Terms to Your New Libraries
+
+  If you develop a new library, and you want it to be of the greatest
+possible use to the public, we recommend making it free software that
+everyone can redistribute and change.  You can do so by permitting
+redistribution under these terms (or, alternatively, under the terms of the
+ordinary General Public License).
+
+  To apply these terms, attach the following notices to the library.  It is
+safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively
+convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least the
+``copyright'' line and a pointer to where the full notice is found.
+
+@smallexample
+@var{one line to give the library's name and an idea of what it does.}
+Copyright (C) @var{year}  @var{name of author}
+
+This library is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+modify it under the terms of the GNU Library General Public
+License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+
+This library is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+Library General Public License for more details.
+
+You should have received a copy of the GNU Library General Public
+License along with this library; if not, write to the
+Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Cambridge,
+MA 02139, USA.
+@end smallexample
+
+Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.
+
+You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your
+school, if any, to sign a ``copyright disclaimer'' for the library, if
+necessary.  Here is a sample; alter the names:
+
+@example
+Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in
+the library `Frob' (a library for tweaking knobs) written
+by James Random Hacker.
+
+@var{signature of Ty Coon}, 1 April 1990
+Ty Coon, President of Vice
+@end example
+
+That's all there is to it!
diff --git a/mdate-sh b/mdate-sh
new file mode 100755
index 00000000..37171f21
--- /dev/null
+++ b/mdate-sh
@@ -0,0 +1,92 @@
+#!/bin/sh
+# Get modification time of a file or directory and pretty-print it.
+# Copyright (C) 1995, 1996, 1997 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+# written by Ulrich Drepper <drepper@gnu.ai.mit.edu>, June 1995
+#
+# This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
+# it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
+# the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option)
+# any later version.
+#
+# This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+# but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+# MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the
+# GNU General Public License for more details.
+#
+# You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+# along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation,
+# Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.
+
+# Prevent date giving response in another language.
+LANG=C
+export LANG
+LC_ALL=C
+export LC_ALL
+LC_TIME=C
+export LC_TIME
+
+# Get the extended ls output of the file or directory.
+# On HPUX /bin/sh, "set" interprets "-rw-r--r--" as options, so the "x" below.
+if ls -L /dev/null 1>/dev/null 2>&1; then
+  set - x`ls -L -l -d $1`
+else
+  set - x`ls -l -d $1`
+fi
+# The month is at least the fourth argument
+# (3 shifts here, the next inside the loop).
+shift
+shift
+shift
+
+# Find the month.  Next argument is day, followed by the year or time.
+month=
+until test $month
+do
+  shift
+  case $1 in
+    Jan) month=January; nummonth=1;;
+    Feb) month=February; nummonth=2;;
+    Mar) month=March; nummonth=3;;
+    Apr) month=April; nummonth=4;;
+    May) month=May; nummonth=5;;
+    Jun) month=June; nummonth=6;;
+    Jul) month=July; nummonth=7;;
+    Aug) month=August; nummonth=8;;
+    Sep) month=September; nummonth=9;;
+    Oct) month=October; nummonth=10;;
+    Nov) month=November; nummonth=11;;
+    Dec) month=December; nummonth=12;;
+  esac
+done
+
+day=$2
+
+# Here we have to deal with the problem that the ls output gives either
+# the time of day or the year.
+case $3 in
+  *:*) set `date`; eval year=\$$#
+       case $2 in
+	 Jan) nummonthtod=1;;
+	 Feb) nummonthtod=2;;
+	 Mar) nummonthtod=3;;
+	 Apr) nummonthtod=4;;
+	 May) nummonthtod=5;;
+	 Jun) nummonthtod=6;;
+	 Jul) nummonthtod=7;;
+	 Aug) nummonthtod=8;;
+	 Sep) nummonthtod=9;;
+	 Oct) nummonthtod=10;;
+	 Nov) nummonthtod=11;;
+	 Dec) nummonthtod=12;;
+       esac
+       # For the first six month of the year the time notation can also
+       # be used for files modified in the last year.
+       if (expr $nummonth \> $nummonthtod) > /dev/null;
+       then
+	 year=`expr $year - 1`
+       fi;;
+  *) year=$3;;
+esac
+
+# The result.
+echo $day $month $year
diff --git a/mdwopt.c b/mdwopt.c
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..37d6581d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/mdwopt.c
@@ -0,0 +1,785 @@
+/* -*-c-*-
+ *
+ * $Id: mdwopt.c,v 1.1 1999/05/05 19:23:47 mdw Exp $
+ *
+ * Options parsing, similar to GNU @getopt_long@
+ *
+ * (c) 1996 Mark Wooding
+ */
+
+/*----- Licensing notice --------------------------------------------------*
+ *
+ * This file is part of many programs.
+ *
+ * `mdwopt' is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
+ * it under the terms of the GNU Library General Public License as
+ * published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the
+ * License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * `mdwopt' is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the
+ * GNU Library General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Library General Public
+ * License along with `mdwopt'; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.
+ */
+
+/*----- Revision history --------------------------------------------------*
+ *
+ * $Log: mdwopt.c,v $
+ * Revision 1.1  1999/05/05 19:23:47  mdw
+ * Initial revision
+ *
+ * --- Previous lives ---
+ *
+ * %Log: mdwopt.c,v %
+ * Revision 1.7  1997/09/11 09:19:11  mdw
+ * (mo__nextWord): Arrrgh.  Don't free the environment variable buffer!
+ * People are still using it!
+ *
+ * Revision 1.6  1997/09/11 09:05:54  mdw
+ * (mo__nextWord): Fix bug which returns too many words from environment
+ * variables.
+ *
+ * Revision 1.5  1997/08/09 20:27:59  mdw
+ * Fix spelling of `Licensing'.
+ *
+ * Revision 1.4  1997/07/29 21:11:35  mdw
+ * Reformatted.  Fixed buffer overflow when dealing with environment
+ * variables.  Included NT in list of daft operating systems with `\' as a
+ * path separator.  Fixed address of the FSF.
+ *
+ * Revision 1.3  1997/02/26 00:41:10  mdw
+ * Added GPL notice to the top.  Slight formatting changes.
+ *
+ * Revision 1.2  1996/10/28 13:12:13  mdw
+ * Fixed calls to ctype.h routines.  Arguments are cast to unsigned char
+ * to avoid invoking undefined behaviour caused by signedness of chars.
+ *
+ * Revision 1.1  1996/09/24 18:01:28  mdw
+ * Initial revision
+ *
+ */
+
+/*----- External dependencies ---------------------------------------------*/
+
+#include <ctype.h>
+#include <stdio.h>
+#include <stdlib.h>
+#include <string.h>
+
+#include "mdwopt.h"
+
+/*----- Configuration things ----------------------------------------------*/
+
+#if defined(__riscos)
+#  define PATHSEP '.'
+#elif defined(__OS2__) || defined(__MSDOS__) || defined(__WINNT__)
+#  define PATHSEP '\\'
+#else /* Assume a sane filing system */
+#  define PATHSEP '/'
+#endif
+
+/*----- Global variables --------------------------------------------------*/
+
+mdwopt_data mdwopt_global = {0, 0, 0, 1, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0};
+
+enum {
+  ord__permute = 0,			/* Permute the options (default) */
+  ord__return = 1,			/* Return non-option things */
+  ord__posix = 2,			/* Do POSIX-type hacking */
+  ord__negate = 4			/* Magic negate-next-thing flag */
+};
+
+/*----- Main code ---------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+/* --- @mo__nextWord@ --- *
+ *
+ * Arguments:   @int argc@ = number of command line options
+ *              @char *argv[]@ = pointer to command line options
+ *              @mdwopt_data *data@ = pointer to persistent state
+ *
+ * Returns:     Pointer to the next word to handle, or 0
+ *
+ * Use:         Extracts the next word from the command line or environment
+ *              variable.
+ */
+
+static char *mo__nextWord(int argc, char *const *argv, mdwopt_data *data)
+{
+  if (data->ind == -1) {
+    char *p = data->env;
+    char *q;
+    while (isspace((unsigned char)*p))
+      p++;
+    q = p;
+    while (*p && !isspace((unsigned char)*p))
+      p++;
+    data->env = p;
+    if (*p)
+      *p++ = 0;
+    if (p != q)
+      return (q);
+    data->env = 0;
+    data->ind = 1;
+  }
+
+  if (data->next == argc)
+    return (0);
+  return (argv[data->next++]);
+}
+
+/* --- @mo__permute@ --- *
+ *
+ * Arguments:   @char *argv[]@ = pointer to command line arguments
+ *              @mdwopt_data *data@ = pointer to persistent data
+ *
+ * Returns:     --
+ *
+ * Use:         Moves a command line option into the right place.
+ */
+
+static void mo__permute(char *const *argv, mdwopt_data *data)
+{
+  char **v = (char **)argv;
+  if (data->ind != -1) {
+    int i = data->next - 1;
+    char *p = v[i];
+    while (i > data->ind) {
+      v[i] = v[i - 1];
+      i--;
+    }
+    v[i] = p;
+    data->ind++;
+  }
+}
+
+/* --- @mo__findOpt@ --- *
+ *
+ * Arguments:   @int o@ = which option to search for
+ *              @const char *shortopt@ = short options string to search
+ *              @mdwopt_data *data@ = pointer to persistant state
+ *
+ * Returns:     Pointer to rest of short options string (including magic
+ *              characters)
+ *
+ * Use:         Looks up a short option in the given string.
+ */
+
+static const char *mo__findOpt(int o, const char *shortopt,
+			       mdwopt_data *data)
+{
+  const char *p = shortopt;		/* Point to short opts table */
+  for (;;) {
+    if (!*p)				/* No more options left */
+      return (0);
+
+    if (o != *p || (p[1] != '+' && data->order & ord__negate)) {
+      p++;				/* Skip this option entry */
+      while (*p == '+')			/* Jump a `%|+|%' sign */
+	p++;
+      while (*p == ':')			/* And jump any `%|:|%' characters */
+	p++;				/* Just in case there are any */
+    }
+    else
+      return (p + 1);
+  }
+}
+
+/* --- @mdwopt@ --- *
+ *
+ * Arguments:   @int argc@ = number of command line arguments
+ *              @char * const *argv@ = pointer to command line arguments
+ *              @const char *shortopt@ = pointer to short options information
+ *              @const struct option *longopts@ = pointer to long opts info
+ *              @int *longind@ = where to store matched longopt
+ *              @mdwopt_data *data@ = persistent state for the parser
+ *              @int flags@ = various useful flags
+ *
+ * Returns:     Value of option found next, or an error character, or
+ *              @EOF@ for the last thing.
+ *
+ * Use:         Reads options.  The routine should be more-or-less compatible
+ *              with standard getopts, although it provides many more
+ *              features even than the standard GNU implementation.
+ *
+ *              The precise manner of options parsing is determined by
+ *              various flag settings, which are described below.  By setting
+ *              flag values appropriately, you can achieve behaviour very
+ *              similar to most other getopt routines.
+ *
+ *
+ *          How options parsing appears to users
+ *
+ *              A command line consists of a number of `words' (which may
+ *              contain spaces, according to various shell quoting
+ *              conventions).  A word may be an option, an argument to an
+ *              option, or a non-option.  An option begins with a special
+ *              character, usually `%|-|%', although `%|+|%' is also used
+ *              sometimes.  As special exceptions, the word containing only a
+ *              `%|-|%' is considered to be a non-option, since it usually
+ *              represents standard input or output as a filename, and the
+ *              word containing a double-dash `%|--|%' is used to mark all
+ *              following words as being non-options regardless of their
+ *              initial character.
+ *
+ *              Traditionally, all words after the first non-option have been
+ *              considered to be non-options automatically, so that options
+ *              must be specified before filenames.  However, this
+ *              implementation can extract all the options from the command
+ *              line regardless of their position.  This can usually be
+ *              disabled by setting one of the environment variables
+ *              `%|POSIXLY_CORRECT|%' or `%|_POSIX_OPTION_ORDER|%'.
+ *
+ *              There are two different styles of options: `short' and
+ *              `long'.
+ *
+ *              Short options are the sort which Unix has known for ages: an
+ *              option is a single letter, preceded by a `%|-|%'.  Short
+ *              options can be joined together to save space (and possibly to
+ *              make silly words): e.g., instead of giving options
+ *              `%|-x -y|%', a user could write `%|-xy|%'.  Some short
+ *              options can have arguments, which appear after the option
+ *              letter, either immediately following, or in the next `word'
+ *              (so an option with an argument could be written as
+ *              `%|-o foo|%' or as `%|-ofoo|%').  Note that options with
+ *              optional arguments must be written in the second style.
+ *
+ *              When a short option controls a flag setting, it is sometimes
+ *              possible to explicitly turn the flag off, as well as turning
+ *              it on, (usually to override default options).  This is
+ *              usually done by using a `%|+|%' instead of a `%|-|%' to
+ *              introduce the option.
+ *
+ *              Long options, as popularised by the GNU utilities, are given
+ *              long-ish memorable names, preceded by a double-dash `%|--|%'.
+ *              Since their names are more than a single character, long
+ *              options can't be combined in the same way as short options.
+ *              Arguments to long options may be given either in the same
+ *              `word', separated from the option name by an equals sign, or
+ *              in the following `word'.
+ *
+ *              Long option names can be abbreviated if necessary, as long
+ *              as the abbreviation is unique.  This means that options can
+ *              have sensible and memorable names but still not require much
+ *              typing from an experienced user.
+ *
+ *              Like short options, long options can control flag settings.
+ *              The options to manipulate these settings come in pairs: an
+ *              option of the form `%|--set-flag|%' might set the flag, while
+ *              an option of the form `%|--no-set-flag|%' might clear it.
+ *
+ *              It is usual for applications to provide both short and long
+ *              options with identical behaviour.  Some applications with
+ *              lots of options may only provide long options (although they
+ *              will often be only two or three characters long).  In this
+ *              case, long options can be preceded with a single `%|-|%'
+ *              character, and negated by a `%|+|%' character.
+ *
+ *              Finally, some (older) programs accept arguments of the form
+ *              `%%@.{"-"<number>}%%', to set some numerical parameter,
+ *              typically a line count of some kind.
+ *
+ *
+ *          How programs parse options
+ *
+ *              An application parses its options by calling mdwopt
+ *              repeatedly.  Each time it is called, mdwopt returns a value
+ *              describing the option just read, and stores information about
+ *              the option in a data block.  The value %$-1$% is returned
+ *              when there are no more options to be read.  The `%|?|%'
+ *              character is returned when an error is encountered.
+ *
+ *              Before starting to parse options, the value @data->ind@ must
+ *              be set to 0 or 1. The value of @data->err@ can also be set,
+ *              to choose whether errors are reported by mdwopt.
+ *
+ *              The program's `@argc@' and `@argv@' arguments are passed to
+ *              the options parser, so that it can read the command line.  A
+ *              flags word is also passed, allowing the program fine control
+ *              over parsing.  The flags are described above.
+ *
+ *              Short options are described by a string, which once upon a
+ *              time just contained the permitted option characters.  Now the
+ *              options string begins with a collection of flag characters,
+ *              and various flag characters can be put after options
+ *              characters to change their properties.
+ *
+ *              If the first character of the short options string is
+ *              `%|+|%', `%|-|%' or `%|!|%', the order in which options are
+ *              read is modified, as follows:
+ *
+ *              `%|+|%' forces the POSIX order to be used. As soon as a non-
+ *                      option is found, mdwopt returns %$-1$%.
+ *
+ *              `%|-|%' makes mdwopt treat non-options as being `special'
+ *                      sorts of option. When a non-option word is found, the
+ *                      value 0 is returned, and the actual text of the word
+ *                      is stored as being the option's argument.
+ *
+ *              `%|!|%' forces the default order to be used.  The entire
+ *                      command line is scanned for options, which are
+ *                      returned in order.  However, during this process,
+ *                      the options are moved in the @argv@ array, so that
+ *                      they appear before the non- options.
+ *
+ *              A `%|:|%' character may be placed after the ordering flag (or
+ *              at the very beginning if no ordering flag is given) which
+ *              indicates that the character `%|:|%', rather than `%|?|%',
+ *              should be returned if a missing argument error is detected.
+ *
+ *              Each option in the string can be followed by a `%|+|%' sign,
+ *              indicating that it can be negated, a `%|:|%' sign indicating
+ *              that it requires an argument, or a `%|::|%' string,
+ *              indicating an optional argument.  Both `%|+|%' and `%|:|%' or
+ *              `%|::|%' may be given, although the `%|+|%' must come first.
+ *
+ *              If an option is found, the option character is returned to
+ *              the caller.  A pointer to an argument is stored in
+ *              @data->arg@, or @NULL@ is stored if there was no argument.
+ *              If a negated option was found, the option character is
+ *              returned ORred with @gFlag_negated@ (bit 8 set).
+ *
+ *              Long options are described in a table.  Each entry in the
+ *              table is of type @struct option@, and the table is terminated
+ *              by an entry whose @name@ field is null.  Each option has
+ *              a flags word which, due to historical reasons, is called
+ *              @has_arg@.  This describes various properties of the option,
+ *              such as what sort of argument it takes, and whether it can
+ *              be negated.
+ *
+ *              When mdwopt finds a long option, it looks the name up in the
+ *              table. The index of the matching entry is stored in the
+ *              @longind@ variable, passed to mdwopt (unless @longind@ is 0):
+ *              a value of %$-1$% indicates that no long option was
+ *              found. The behaviour is then dependent on the values in the
+ *              table entry.  If @flag@ is nonzero, it points to an integer
+ *              to be modified by mdwopt.  Usually the value in the @val@
+ *              field is simply stored in the @flag@ variable. If the flag
+ *              @gFlag_switch@ is set, however, the value is combined with
+ *              the existing value of the flags using a bitwise OR.  If
+ *              @gFlag_negate@ is set, then the flag bit will be cleared if a
+ *              matching negated long option is found.  The value 0 is
+ *              returned.
+ *
+ *              If @flag@ is zero, the value in @val@ is returned by mdwopt,
+ *              possibly with bit 8 set if the option was negated.
+ *
+ *              Arguments for long options are stored in @data->arg@, as
+ *              before.
+ *
+ *              Numeric options, if enabled, cause the value `%|#|%' to be
+ *              returned, and the numeric value to be stored in @data->opt@.
+ *
+ *              If the flag @gFlag_envVar@ is set on entry, options will be
+ *              extracted from an environment variable whose name is built by
+ *              capitalising all the letters of the program's name.  (This
+ *              allows a user to have different default settings for a
+ *              program, by calling it through different symbolic links.)  */
+
+int mdwopt(int argc, char *const *argv,
+	   const char *shortopt,
+	   const struct option *longopts, int *longind,
+	   mdwopt_data *data, int flags)
+{
+  /* --- Local variables --- */
+
+  char *p, *q, *r;			/* Some useful things to have */
+  char *prefix;				/* Prefix from this option */
+  int i;				/* Always useful */
+  char noarg = '?';			/* Standard missing-arg char */
+
+  /* --- Sort out our data --- */
+
+  if (!data)				/* If default data requested */
+    data = &mdwopt_global;		/* Then use the global stuff */
+
+  /* --- See if this is the first time --- */
+
+  if (data->ind == 0 || (data->ind == 1 && ~flags & gFlag_noProgName)) {
+
+    /* --- Sort out default returning order --- */
+
+    if (getenv("_POSIX_OPTION_ORDER") || /* Examine environment for opts */
+	getenv("POSIXLY_CORRECT"))	/* To see if we disable features */
+      data->order = ord__posix;		/* If set, use POSIX ordering */
+    else
+      data->order = ord__permute;	/* Otherwise mangle the options */
+
+    /* --- Now see what the caller actually wants --- */
+
+    switch (shortopt[0]) {		/* Look at the first character */
+      case '-':				/* `%|-|%' turns on in-orderness */
+	data->order = ord__return;
+	break;
+      case '+':				/* `%|+|%' turns on POSIXness */
+	data->order = ord__posix;
+	break;
+      case '!':				/* `%|!|%' ignores POSIXness */
+	data->order = ord__permute;
+	break;
+    }
+
+    /* --- Now decide on the program's name --- */
+
+    if (~flags & gFlag_noProgName) {
+      p = q = (char *)argv[0];
+      while (*p) {
+	if (*p++ == PATHSEP)
+	  q = p;
+      }
+      data->prog = q;
+
+      data->ind = data->next = 1;
+      data->list = 0;
+
+      /* --- See about environment variables --- *
+       *
+       * Be careful.  The program may be setuid, and an attacker might have
+       * given us a long name in @argv[0]@.  If the name is very long, don't
+       * support this option.
+       */
+
+      if (flags & gFlag_envVar && strlen(data->prog) < 48) {
+
+	char buf[64];
+
+	/* --- For RISC OS, support a different format --- *
+	 *
+	 * Acorn's RISC OS tends to put settings in variables named
+	 * `App$Options' rather than `APP'.  Under RISC OS, I'll support
+	 * both methods, just to avoid confuddlement.
+	 */
+
+#ifdef __riscos
+	sprintf(buf, "%s$Options", data->prog);
+	p = getenv(buf);
+	if (!p) {
+#endif
+
+	  p = buf;			/* Point to a buffer */
+	  q = data->prog;		/* Point to program name */
+	  while (*q)			/* While characters left here */
+	    *p++ = toupper(*q++);	/* Copy and uppercase */
+	  *p++ = 0;			/* Terminate my copy of this */
+	  p = getenv(buf);		/* Get the value of the variable */
+
+#ifdef __riscos
+	}
+#endif
+
+	/* --- Copy the options string into a buffer --- */
+
+	if (p) {			/* If it is defined */
+	  q = malloc(strlen(p) + 1);	/* Allocate space for a copy */
+	  if (!q) {			/* If that failed */
+	    fprintf(stderr,		/* Report a nice error */
+		    "%s: Not enough memory to read settings in "
+		    "environment variable\n",
+		    data->prog);
+	  } else {			/* Otherwise */
+	    strcpy(q, p);		/* Copy the text over */
+	    data->ind = -1;		/* Mark that we're parsing envvar */
+	    data->env = data->estart = q; /* And store the pointer away */
+	  }
+	}
+
+      }
+    }
+    else
+      data->ind = data->next = 0;
+  }
+
+  /* --- Do some initial bodgery --- *
+   *
+   * The @shortopt@ string can have some interesting characters at the
+   * beginning.  We'll skip past them.
+   */
+
+  switch (shortopt[0]) {
+    case '+':
+    case '-':
+    case '!':
+      shortopt++;
+      break;
+  }
+
+  if (shortopt[0] == ':') {
+    noarg = shortopt[0];
+    shortopt++;
+  }
+
+  if (longind)				/* Allow longind to be null */
+    *longind = -1;			/* Clear this to avoid confusion */
+  data->opt = -1;			/* And this too */
+  data->arg = 0;			/* No option set up here */
+
+  /* --- Now go off and search for an option --- */
+
+  if (!data->list || !*data->list) {
+    data->order &= 3;			/* Clear negation flag */
+
+    /* --- Now we need to find the next option --- *
+     *
+     * Exactly how we do this depends on the settings of the order variable.
+     * We identify options as being things starting with `%|-|%', and which
+     * aren't equal to `%|-|%' or `%|--|%'.  We'll look for options until:
+     *
+     *   * We find something which isn't an option AND @order == ord__posix@
+     *   * We find a `%|--|%'
+     *   * We reach the end of the list
+     *
+     * There are some added little wrinkles, which we'll meet as we go.
+     */
+
+    for (;;) {				/* Keep looping for a while */
+      p = mo__nextWord(argc, argv, data); /* Get the next word out */
+      if (!p)				/* If there's no next word */
+	return (EOF);			/* There's no more now */
+
+      /* --- See if we've found an option --- */
+
+      if ((p[0] == '-' || (p[0] == '+' && flags & gFlag_negation)) &&
+	  p[1] != 0) {
+	if (strcmp(p, "--") == 0) {	/* If this is the magic marker */
+	  mo__permute(argv, data);	/* Stow the magic marker item */
+	  return (EOF);			/* There's nothing else to do */
+	}
+	break;				/* We've found something! */
+      }
+
+      /* --- Figure out how to proceed --- */
+
+      switch (data->order & 3) {
+	case ord__posix:		/* POSIX option order */
+	  return (EOF);			/* This is easy */
+	  break;
+	case ord__permute:		/* Permute the option order */
+	  break;
+	case ord__return:		/* Return each argument */
+	  mo__permute(argv, data);	/* Insert word in same place */
+	  data->arg = p;		/* Point to the argument */
+	  return (0);			/* Return the value */
+      }
+    }
+
+    /* --- We found an option --- */
+
+    mo__permute(argv, data);		/* Do any permuting necessary */
+
+    /* --- Check for a numeric option --- *
+     *
+     * We only check the first character (or the second if the first is a
+     * sign).  This ought to be enough.
+     */
+
+    if (flags & gFlag_numbers && (p[0] == '-' || flags & gFlag_negNumber)) {
+      if (((p[1] == '+' || p[1] == '-') && isdigit((unsigned char)p[2])) ||
+	  isdigit((unsigned char)p[1])) {
+	data->opt = strtol(p + 1, &data->arg, 10);
+	while (isspace((unsigned char)data->arg[0]))
+	  data->arg++;
+	if (!data->arg[0])
+	  data->arg = 0;
+	return (p[0] == '-' ? '#' : '#' | gFlag_negated);
+      }
+    }
+
+    /* --- Check for a long option --- */
+
+    if (p[0] == '+')
+      data->order |= ord__negate;
+
+    if (((p[0] == '-' && p[1] == '-') ||
+	 (flags & gFlag_noShorts && !mo__findOpt(p[1], shortopt, data))) &&
+	(~flags & gFlag_noLongs))	/* Is this a long option? */
+    {
+      int match = -1;			/* Count matches as we go */
+
+      if (p[0] == '+') {		/* If it's negated */
+	data->order |= ord__negate;	/* Set the negate flag */
+	p++;				/* Point to the main text */
+	prefix = "+";			/* Set the prefix string up */
+      } else if (p[1] == '-') {		/* If this is a `%|--|%' option */
+	if ((flags & gFlag_negation) && strncmp(p + 2, "no-", 3) == 0) {
+	  p += 5;			/* Point to main text */
+	  prefix = "--no-";		/* And set the prefix */
+	  data->order |= ord__negate;	/* Set the negatedness flag */
+	} else {
+	  p += 2;			/* Point to the main text */
+	  prefix = "--";		/* Remember the prefix string */
+	}
+      } else {
+	if ((flags & gFlag_negation) && strncmp(p + 1, "no-", 3) == 0) {
+	  p += 4;			/* Find the text */
+	  prefix = "-no-";		/* Set the prefix */
+	  data->order |= ord__negate;	/* Set negatedness flag */
+	} else {
+	  p++;				/* Otherwise find the text */
+	  prefix = "-";			/* And remember the prefix */
+	}
+      }
+
+      for (i = 0; longopts[i].name; i++) { /* Loop through the options */
+	if ((data->order & ord__negate) &&
+	    (~longopts[i].has_arg & gFlag_negate))
+	  continue;			/* If neg and opt doesn't allow */
+
+	r = (char *) longopts[i].name;	/* Point to the name string */
+	q = p;				/* Point to the string start */
+	for (;;) {			/* Do a loop here */
+	  if (*q == 0 || *q == '=') {	/* End of the option string? */
+	    if (*r == 0) {		/* If end of other string */
+	      match = i;		/* This is the match */
+	      goto botched;		/* And exit the loop now */
+	    }
+	    if (match == -1) {		/* If no match currently */
+	      match = i;		/* Then this is it, here */
+	      break;			/* Stop looking now */
+	    } else {
+	      match = -1;		/* Else it's ambiguous */
+	      goto botched;		/* So give up right now */
+	    }
+	  }
+	  else if (*q != *r)		/* Otherwise if mismatch */
+	    break;			/* Abort this loop */
+	  q++, r++;			/* Increment the counters */
+	}
+      }
+
+    botched:
+      if (match == -1) {		/* If we couldn't find a match */
+	if (data->err) {
+	  fprintf(stderr, "%s: unrecognised option `%s%s'\n",
+		  data->prog,
+		  prefix, p);
+	}
+	return ('?');
+      }
+
+      if (longind)			/* Allow longind to be null */
+	*longind = match;		/* Store the match away */
+
+      /* --- Handle argument behaviour --- */
+
+      while (*p != 0 && *p != '=')	/* Find the argument string */
+	p++;
+      p = (*p ? p + 1 : 0);		/* Sort out argument presence */
+      q = (char *) longopts[match].name; /* Remember the name here */
+
+      switch (longopts[match].has_arg & 3) {
+	case no_argument:
+	  if (p) {
+	    if (data->err) {
+	      fprintf(stderr,
+		      "%s: option `%s%s' does not accept arguments\n",
+		      data->prog,
+		      prefix, q);
+	    }
+	    return ('?');
+	  }
+	  break;
+
+	case required_argument:
+	  if (!p) {			/* If no argument given */
+	    p = mo__nextWord(argc, argv, data);
+
+	    if (!p) {			/* If no more arguments */
+	      if (data->err) {
+		fprintf(stderr, "%s: option `%s%s' requires an argument\n",
+			data->prog,
+			prefix, q);
+	      }
+	      return (noarg);
+	    }
+
+	    mo__permute(argv, data);
+	  }
+	  break;
+
+	case optional_argument:
+	  /* Who cares? */
+	  break;
+      }
+      data->arg = p;
+
+      /* --- Do correct things now we have a match --- */
+
+      if (longopts[match].flag) {	/* If he has a @flag@ argument */
+	if (longopts[match].has_arg & gFlag_switch) {
+	  if (data->order & ord__negate)
+	    *longopts[match].flag &= ~longopts[match].val;
+	  else
+	    *longopts[match].flag |= longopts[match].val;
+	} else {
+	  if (data->order & ord__negate)
+	    *longopts[match].flag = 0;
+	  else
+	    *longopts[match].flag = longopts[match].val;
+	}
+	return (0);			/* And return something */
+      } else {
+	if (data->order & ord__negate)
+	  return (longopts[match].val | gFlag_negated);
+	else
+	  return (longopts[match].val);
+      }
+    }
+
+    /* --- Do short options things --- */
+
+    else {
+      if (p[0] == '+')			/* If starts with a `%|+|%' */
+	data->order |= ord__negate;
+      data->list = p + 1;		/* Omit leading `%|-|%'/`%|+|%' */
+    }
+  }
+
+  /* --- Now process the short options --- */
+
+  i = *data->list++;			/* Get the next option letter */
+  data->opt = i;			/* Store this away nicely */
+
+  p = (char *) mo__findOpt(i, shortopt, data);
+  if (!p) {				/* No more options left */
+    if (data->err) {
+      fprintf(stderr, "%s: unknown option `%c%c'\n",
+	      data->prog,
+	      data->order & ord__negate ? '+' : '-',
+	      i);
+    }
+    return ('?');
+  }
+
+  data->opt = i;			/* Store this for the caller */
+
+  /* --- Sort out an argument, if we expect one --- */
+
+  if (p[0] == ':') {			/* If we expect an option */
+    q = (data->list[0] ? data->list : 0); /* If argument expected, use it */
+    data->list = 0;			/* Kill the remaining options */
+    if (p[1] != ':' && !q) {		/* If no arg, and not optional */
+
+      /* --- Same code as before --- */
+
+      q = mo__nextWord(argc, argv, data); /* Read the next word */
+      if (!q) {				/* If no more arguments */
+	if (data->err) {
+	  fprintf(stderr, "%s: option `%c%c' requires an argument\n",
+		  data->prog,
+		  data->order & ord__negate ? '+' : '-',
+		  i);
+	}
+	return (noarg);
+      }
+      mo__permute(argv, data);
+    }
+
+    data->arg = q;
+  }
+  return ((data->order & ord__negate) ? i | gFlag_negated : i);
+}
+
+/*----- That's all, folks -------------------------------------------------*/
diff --git a/mdwopt.h b/mdwopt.h
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..1615669b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/mdwopt.h
@@ -0,0 +1,426 @@
+/* -*-c-*-
+ *
+ * $Id: mdwopt.h,v 1.1 1999/05/05 19:23:47 mdw Exp $
+ *
+ * Options parsing, similar to GNU @getopt_long@
+ *
+ * (c) 1996 Mark Wooding
+ */
+
+/*----- Licensing notice --------------------------------------------------*
+ *
+ * This file is part of many programs.
+ *
+ * `mdwopt' is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
+ * it under the terms of the GNU Library General Public License as
+ * published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the
+ * License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * `mdwopt' is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the
+ * GNU Library General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Library General Public
+ * License along with `mdwopt'; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.
+ */
+
+/*----- Revision history --------------------------------------------------*
+ *
+ * $Log: mdwopt.h,v $
+ * Revision 1.1  1999/05/05 19:23:47  mdw
+ * Initial revision
+ *
+ * --- Previous lives ---
+ *
+ * %Log: mdwopt.h,v %
+ * Revision 1.5  1997/08/09 20:27:59  mdw
+ * Fix spelling of `Licensing'.
+ *
+ * Revision 1.4  1997/07/29 21:11:49  mdw
+ * Fixed address of the FSF.
+ *
+ * Revision 1.3  1996/12/31 19:41:33  mdw
+ * Formatting changes.
+ *
+ * Revision 1.2  1996/11/23 00:47:25  mdw
+ * Added `MdwOpt' object from the `anagram' source code.
+ *
+ * Revision 1.1  1996/09/24 18:01:43  mdw
+ * Initial revision
+ *
+ */
+
+#ifndef MDWOPT_H
+#define MDWOPT_H
+
+/*----- Options handling structures ---------------------------------------*/
+
+#ifdef __cplusplus
+  extern "C" {
+#endif
+
+/* --- @mdwopt_data@ --- *
+ *
+ * Contains all the information needed by the @mdwopt@ routine to do its
+ * work.
+ */
+
+typedef struct {
+  /* --- Public variables --- */
+
+  char *arg;				/* Arg of current option, or 0 */
+  int opt;				/* Value of current option */
+  int ind;				/* 0 for init, index when done */
+  int err;				/* Set nonzero for error messages */
+  char *prog;				/* Program name (from @argv[0]@) */
+
+  /* --- Private variables --- *
+   *
+   * Don't play with these, please.
+   */
+
+  char *list;				/* Current short options pointer */
+  int next;				/* Next argument, unpermuted */
+  int order;				/* Ordering of options, flags */
+  char *env;				/* Where we are in the env var */
+  char *estart;				/* Pointer to env var buffer */
+}
+mdwopt_data;
+
+/*----- Global variables --------------------------------------------------*/
+
+extern mdwopt_data mdwopt_global;	/* The default global data */
+
+/* --- For compatibility with older programs (and prettiness) --- *
+ *
+ * The macros here access the global structure defined above.  I consider it
+ * to be perfectly acceptable to use these macros in new code, because it
+ * looks nicer than playing with @mdwopt_global@.
+ */
+
+#define optarg (mdwopt_global.arg)	/* Argument of current option */
+#define optopt (mdwopt_global.opt)	/* Code of current option */
+#define opterr (mdwopt_global.err)	/* Zero to report error messages */
+#define optind (mdwopt_global.ind)	/* Index of first non-option */
+#define optprog (mdwopt_global.prog)	/* Pointer to program name */
+
+/*----- Type definitions --------------------------------------------------*/
+
+/* --- Long options definition table --- */
+
+struct option {
+  const char *name;			/* Name of the long option */
+  int has_arg;				/* Does it have an argument? */
+  int *flag;				/* Address of flag variable */
+  int val;				/* Value to store/return */
+};
+
+/* --- Old-style names for argument flags in long options table --- */
+
+enum {
+  no_argument,				/* No argument required */
+  required_argument,			/* User must specify argument */
+  optional_argument			/* Argument is optional */
+};
+
+/* --- New style flag names --- */
+
+enum {
+  gFlag_argReq = 1,			/* Required argument */
+  gFlag_argOpt = 2,			/* Optional argument */
+  gFlag_switch = 4,			/* OR val into flag, don't store */
+  gFlag_negate = 8,			/* Allow long option to be negated */
+  gFlag__last_long_opt_flag = 0		/* Dummy value */
+};
+
+enum {
+  gFlag_noLongs = 1,			/* Don't read long options */
+  gFlag_noShorts = 2,			/* Don't read short options */
+  gFlag_numbers = 4,			/* Read numeric options */
+  gFlag_negation = 8,			/* Allow `%|+|%' for negations */
+  gFlag_envVar = 16,			/* Parse options from env var */
+  gFlag_noProgName = 32,		/* Don't set @optprog@  */
+  gFlag_negNumber = 64,			/* Allow negated number options */
+  gFlag__last_mdwopt_flag = 0		/* Dummy value */
+};
+
+enum {
+  gFlag_negated = 256,			/* Option flag was negated by user */
+  gFlag__last_return_flag = 0		/* Dummy value */
+};
+
+/*----- Main code ---------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+/* --- @mdwopt@ --- *
+ *
+ * Arguments:   @int argc@ = number of command line arguments
+ *              @char * const *argv@ = pointer to command line arguments
+ *              @const char *shortopt@ = pointer to short options information
+ *              @const struct option *longopts@ = pointer to long opts info
+ *              @int *longind@ = where to store matched longopt
+ *              @mdwopt_data *data@ = persistent state for the parser
+ *              @int flags@ = various useful flags
+ *
+ * Returns:     Value of option found next, or an error character, or
+ *              @EOF@ for the last thing.
+ *
+ * Use:         Reads options.  The routine should be more-or-less compatible
+ *              with standard getopts, although it provides many more
+ *              features even than the standard GNU implementation.
+ *
+ *              The precise manner of options parsing is determined by
+ *              various flag settings, which are described below.  By setting
+ *              flag values appropriately, you can achieve behaviour very
+ *              similar to most other getopt routines.
+ *
+ *
+ *          How options parsing appears to users
+ *
+ *              A command line consists of a number of `words' (which may
+ *              contain spaces, according to various shell quoting
+ *              conventions).  A word may be an option, an argument to an
+ *              option, or a non-option.  An option begins with a special
+ *              character, usually `%|-|%', although `%|+|%' is also used
+ *              sometimes.  As special exceptions, the word containing only a
+ *              `%|-|%' is considered to be a non-option, since it usually
+ *              represents standard input or output as a filename, and the
+ *              word containing a double-dash `%|--|%' is used to mark all
+ *              following words as being non-options regardless of their
+ *              initial character.
+ *
+ *              Traditionally, all words after the first non-option have been
+ *              considered to be non-options automatically, so that options
+ *              must be specified before filenames.  However, this
+ *              implementation can extract all the options from the command
+ *              line regardless of their position.  This can usually be
+ *              disabled by setting one of the environment variables
+ *              `%|POSIXLY_CORRECT|%' or `%|_POSIX_OPTION_ORDER|%'.
+ *
+ *              There are two different styles of options: `short' and
+ *              `long'.
+ *
+ *              Short options are the sort which Unix has known for ages: an
+ *              option is a single letter, preceded by a `%|-|%'.  Short
+ *              options can be joined together to save space (and possibly to
+ *              make silly words): e.g., instead of giving options
+ *              `%|-x.-y|%', a user could write `%|-xy|%'.  Some short
+ *              options can have arguments, which appear after the option
+ *              letter, either immediately following, or in the next `word'
+ *              (so an option with an argument could be written as
+ *              `%|-o foo|%' or as `%|-ofoo|%').  Note that options with
+ *		optional arguments must be written in the second style.
+ *
+ *              When a short option controls a flag setting, it is sometimes
+ *              possible to explicitly turn the flag off, as well as turning
+ *              it on, (usually to override default options).  This is
+ *              usually done by using a `%|+|%' instead of a `%|-|%' to
+ *              introduce the option.
+ *
+ *              Long options, as popularised by the GNU utilities, are given
+ *              long-ish memorable names, preceded by a double-dash `%|--|%'.
+ *              Since their names are more than a single character, long
+ *              options can't be combined in the same way as short options.
+ *              Arguments to long options may be given either in the same
+ *              `word', separated from the option name by an equals sign, or
+ *              in the following `word'.
+ *
+ *              Long option names can be abbreviated if necessary, as long
+ *              as the abbreviation is unique.  This means that options can
+ *              have sensible and memorable names but still not require much
+ *              typing from an experienced user.
+ *
+ *              Like short options, long options can control flag settings.
+ *              The options to manipulate these settings come in pairs: an
+ *              option of the form `%|--set-flag|%' might set the flag, while
+ *              an option of the form `%|--no-set-flag|%' might clear it.
+ *
+ *              It is usual for applications to provide both short and long
+ *              options with identical behaviour.  Some applications with
+ *              lots of options may only provide long options (although they
+ *              will often be only two or three characters long).  In this
+ *              case, long options can be preceded with a single `%|-|%'
+ *              character, and negated by a `%|+|%' character.
+ *
+ *              Finally, some (older) programs accept arguments of the form
+ *              `%%@.{"-"<number>}%%', to set some numerical parameter,
+ *              typically a line count of some kind.
+ *
+ *
+ *          How programs parse options
+ *
+ *              An application parses its options by calling mdwopt
+ *              repeatedly.  Each time it is called, mdwopt returns a value
+ *              describing the option just read, and stores information about
+ *              the option in a data block.  The value %$-1$% is returned
+ *              when there are no more options to be read.  The `%|?|%'
+ *              character is returned when an error is encountered.
+ *
+ *              Before starting to parse options, the value @data->ind@ must
+ *              be set to 0 or 1. The value of @data->err@ can also be set,
+ *              to choose whether errors are reported by mdwopt.
+ *
+ *              The program's `@argc@' and `@argv@' arguments are passed to
+ *              the options parser, so that it can read the command line.  A
+ *              flags word is also passed, allowing the program fine control
+ *              over parsing.  The flags are described above.
+ *
+ *              Short options are described by a string, which once upon a
+ *              time just contained the permitted option characters.  Now the
+ *              options string begins with a collection of flag characters,
+ *              and various flag characters can be put after options
+ *              characters to change their properties.
+ *
+ *              If the first character of the short options string is
+ *              `%|+|%', `%|-|%' or `%|!|%', the order in which options are
+ *              read is modified, as follows:
+ *
+ *              `%|+|%' forces the POSIX order to be used. As soon as a non-
+ *                      option is found, mdwopt returns %$-1$%.
+ *
+ *              `%|-|%' makes mdwopt treat non-options as being `special'
+ *                      sorts of option. When a non-option word is found, the
+ *                      value 0 is returned, and the actual text of the word
+ *                      is stored as being the option's argument.
+ *
+ *              `%|!|%' forces the default order to be used.  The entire
+ *                      command line is scanned for options, which are
+ *                      returned in order.  However, during this process,
+ *                      the options are moved in the @argv@ array, so that
+ *                      they appear before the non- options.
+ *
+ *              A `%|:|%' character may be placed after the ordering flag (or
+ *              at the very beginning if no ordering flag is given) which
+ *              indicates that the character `%|:|%', rather than `%|?|%',
+ *              should be returned if a missing argument error is detected.
+ *
+ *              Each option in the string can be followed by a `%|+|%' sign,
+ *              indicating that it can be negated, a `%|:|%' sign indicating
+ *              that it requires an argument, or a `%|::|%' string,
+ *              indicating an optional argument.  Both `%|+|%' and `%|:|%' or
+ *              `%|::|%' may be given, although the `%|+|%' must come first.
+ *
+ *              If an option is found, the option character is returned to
+ *              the caller.  A pointer to an argument is stored in
+ *              @data->arg@, or @NULL@ is stored if there was no argument.
+ *              If a negated option was found, the option character is
+ *              returned ORred with @gFlag_negated@ (bit 8 set).
+ *
+ *              Long options are described in a table.  Each entry in the
+ *              table is of type @struct option@, and the table is terminated
+ *              by an entry whose @name@ field is null.  Each option has
+ *              a flags word which, due to historical reasons, is called
+ *              @has_arg@.  This describes various properties of the option,
+ *              such as what sort of argument it takes, and whether it can
+ *              be negated.
+ *
+ *              When mdwopt finds a long option, it looks the name up in the
+ *              table. The index of the matching entry is stored in the
+ *              @longind@ variable, passed to mdwopt (unless @longind@ is 0):
+ *              a value of %$-1$% indicates that no long option was
+ *              found. The behaviour is then dependent on the values in the
+ *              table entry.  If @flag@ is nonzero, it points to an integer
+ *              to be modified by mdwopt.  Usually the value in the @val@
+ *              field is simply stored in the @flag@ variable. If the flag
+ *              @gFlag_switch@ is set, however, the value is combined with
+ *              the existing value of the flags using a bitwise OR.  If
+ *              @gFlag_negate@ is set, then the flag bit will be cleared if a
+ *              matching negated long option is found.  The value 0 is
+ *              returned.
+ *
+ *              If @flag@ is zero, the value in @val@ is returned by mdwopt,
+ *              possibly with bit 8 set if the option was negated.
+ *
+ *              Arguments for long options are stored in @data->arg@, as
+ *              before.
+ *
+ *              Numeric options, if enabled, cause the value `%|#|%' to be
+ *              returned, and the numeric value to be stored in @data->opt@.
+ *
+ *              If the flag @gFlag_envVar@ is set on entry, options will be
+ *              extracted from an environment variable whose name is built by
+ *              capitalising all the letters of the program's name.  (This
+ *              allows a user to have different default settings for a
+ *              program, by calling it through different symbolic links.)  */
+
+extern int mdwopt(int /*argc*/, char *const */*argv*/,
+		  const char */*shortopt*/,
+		  const struct option */*longopts*/, int */*longind*/,
+		  mdwopt_data */*data*/, int /*flags*/);
+
+/* --- Macros for more commonly used routines --- */
+
+#define getopt(c, v, o) mdwopt(c, v, o, 0, 0, 0, gFlag_noLongs)
+#define getopt_long(c, v, o, l, li) mdwopt(c, v, o, l, li, 0, 0)
+#define getopt_long_only(c, v, o, l, li)				\
+  mdwopt(c, v, o, l, li, 0, gFlag_noShorts)
+
+#ifdef __cplusplus
+}
+#endif
+
+/*----- C++ wrapper class -------------------------------------------------*/
+
+#ifdef __cplusplus
+
+/* --- Class: @MdwOpt@ --- *
+ *
+ * Parent:      ---
+ *
+ * Methods:     @MdwOpt@ -- construct a new mdwopt object with the given
+ *                      arguments.  These are remembered for later use.
+ *              @arg@ -- return the argument of the current option
+ *                      arguments.  These are remembered for later use.
+ *              @arg@ -- return the argument of the current option
+ *              @opt@ -- return the value of the current option
+ *		@ind@ -- return the index of the next unread argument
+ *		@longind@ -- return index of current long option in table
+ *              @errors@ -- return or set whether we report errors to the
+ *                      user
+ *              @prog@ -- return program name from @argv[0]@
+ *              @next@ -- return next option read from the table
+ *
+ * Use:         A simple C++ class for encapsulating the options parser.
+ *		The methods are all nice and simple, and extremely similar
+ *		to the normal C interface described above.
+ */
+
+class MdwOpt {
+  protected:
+    int argc;
+    char * const *argv;
+    const char *shortopts;
+    const struct option *longopts;
+    int long_ind;
+    int flags;
+
+    mdwopt_data data;
+
+  public:
+    MdwOpt(int c, char * const *v, const char *so,
+	   const struct option *lo, int f=0) :
+      argc(c), argv(v), shortopts(so), longopts(lo), flags(f) {
+	data.ind = 0;
+	data.err = 1;
+    }
+
+    const char *arg(void) const { return (data.arg); }
+    int opt(void) const { return (data.opt); }
+    int errors(void) const { return (data.err); }
+    int errors(int e) { int oe = data.err; data.err = e; return (oe); }
+    int ind(void) const { return (data.ind); }
+    int longind(void) const { return (long_ind); }
+    const char *prog(void) const { return (data.prog); }
+
+    int next(void) {
+      return (mdwopt(argc, argv, shortopts,
+		     longopts, &long_ind, &data, flags));
+    }
+};
+
+#endif
+
+/*----- That's all, folks -------------------------------------------------*/
+
+#endif
diff --git a/missing b/missing
new file mode 100755
index 00000000..a6abd069
--- /dev/null
+++ b/missing
@@ -0,0 +1,134 @@
+#! /bin/sh
+# Common stub for a few missing GNU programs while installing.
+# Copyright (C) 1996, 1997 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+# Franc,ois Pinard <pinard@iro.umontreal.ca>, 1996.
+
+# This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
+# it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
+# the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option)
+# any later version.
+
+# This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+# but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+# MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the
+# GNU General Public License for more details.
+
+# You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+# along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
+# Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA
+# 02111-1307, USA.
+
+if test $# -eq 0; then
+  echo 1>&2 "Try \`$0 --help' for more information"
+  exit 1
+fi
+
+case "$1" in
+
+  -h|--h|--he|--hel|--help)
+    echo "\
+$0 [OPTION]... PROGRAM [ARGUMENT]...
+
+Handle \`PROGRAM [ARGUMENT]...' for when PROGRAM is missing, or return an
+error status if there is no known handling for PROGRAM.
+
+Options:
+  -h, --help      display this help and exit
+  -v, --version   output version information and exit
+
+Supported PROGRAM values:
+  aclocal      touch file \`aclocal.m4'
+  autoconf     touch file \`configure'
+  autoheader   touch file \`config.h.in'
+  automake     touch all \`Makefile.in' files
+  bison        touch file \`y.tab.c'
+  makeinfo     touch the output file
+  yacc         touch file \`y.tab.c'"
+    ;;
+
+  -v|--v|--ve|--ver|--vers|--versi|--versio|--version)
+    echo "missing - GNU libit 0.0"
+    ;;
+
+  -*)
+    echo 1>&2 "$0: Unknown \`$1' option"
+    echo 1>&2 "Try \`$0 --help' for more information"
+    exit 1
+    ;;
+
+  aclocal)
+    echo 1>&2 "\
+WARNING: \`$1' is missing on your system.  You should only need it if
+         you modified \`acinclude.m4' or \`configure.in'.  You might want
+         to install the \`Automake' and \`Perl' packages.  Grab them from
+         any GNU archive site."
+    touch aclocal.m4
+    ;;
+
+  autoconf)
+    echo 1>&2 "\
+WARNING: \`$1' is missing on your system.  You should only need it if
+         you modified \`configure.in'.  You might want to install the
+         \`Autoconf' and \`GNU m4' packages.  Grab them from any GNU
+         archive site."
+    touch configure
+    ;;
+
+  autoheader)
+    echo 1>&2 "\
+WARNING: \`$1' is missing on your system.  You should only need it if
+         you modified \`acconfig.h' or \`configure.in'.  You might want
+         to install the \`Autoconf' and \`GNU m4' packages.  Grab them
+         from any GNU archive site."
+    touch config.h.in
+    ;;
+
+  automake)
+    echo 1>&2 "\
+WARNING: \`$1' is missing on your system.  You should only need it if
+         you modified \`Makefile.am', \`acinclude.m4' or \`configure.in'.
+         You might want to install the \`Automake' and \`Perl' packages.
+         Grab them from any GNU archive site."
+    find . -type f -name Makefile.am -print \
+      | sed 's/^\(.*\).am$/touch \1.in/' \
+      | sh
+    ;;
+
+  bison|yacc)
+    echo 1>&2 "\
+WARNING: \`$1' is missing on your system.  You should only need it if
+         you modified a \`.y' file.  You may need the \`Bison' package
+         in order for those modifications to take effect.  You can get
+         \`Bison' from any GNU archive site."
+    touch y.tab.c
+    ;;
+
+  makeinfo)
+    echo 1>&2 "\
+WARNING: \`$1' is missing on your system.  You should only need it if
+         you modified a \`.texi' or \`.texinfo' file, or any other file
+         indirectly affecting the aspect of the manual.  The spurious
+         call might also be the consequence of using a buggy \`make' (AIX,
+         DU, IRIX).  You might want to install the \`Texinfo' package or
+         the \`GNU make' package.  Grab either from any GNU archive site."
+    file=`echo "$*" | sed -n 's/.*-o \([^ ]*\).*/\1/p'`
+    if test -z "$file"; then
+      file=`echo "$*" | sed 's/.* \([^ ]*\) *$/\1/'`
+      file=`sed -n '/^@setfilename/ { s/.* \([^ ]*\) *$/\1/; p; q; }' $file`
+    fi
+    touch $file
+    ;;
+
+  *)
+    echo 1>&2 "\
+WARNING: \`$1' is needed, and you do not seem to have it handy on your
+         system.  You might have modified some files without having the
+         proper tools for further handling them.  Check the \`README' file,
+         it often tells you about the needed prerequirements for installing
+         this package.  You may also peek at any GNU archive site, in case
+         some other package would contain this missing \`$1' program."
+    exit 1
+    ;;
+esac
+
+exit 0
diff --git a/mkaclocal.in b/mkaclocal.in
new file mode 100755
index 00000000..e184a6d3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/mkaclocal.in
@@ -0,0 +1,178 @@
+#! /bin/sh
+# -*-sh-*-
+#
+# $Id: mkaclocal.in,v 1.2 1997/09/11 09:06:33 mdw Exp $
+#
+# Create an `aclocal.m4' file containing the right macros.
+#
+# (c) 1997 Mark Wooding
+#
+
+#----- Licensing notice -----------------------------------------------------
+#
+# This file is part of the Common Files Distribution (`common').
+#
+# `Common' is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
+# it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
+# the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
+# (at your option) any later version.
+#
+# `Common' is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+# but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+# MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the
+# GNU General Public License for more details.
+#
+# You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+# along with `common'; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation,
+# Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.
+
+#----- Revision history -----------------------------------------------------
+#
+# $Log$
+
+# --- Configuration variables ---
+
+prefix=@prefix@
+exec_prefix=@exec_prefix@
+bindir=@bindir@
+datadir=@datadir@/@PACKAGE@
+
+# --- Parse command line ---
+
+mode=x
+out="aclocal.m4"
+in="configure.in"
+
+while [ $# -gt 0 ]; do
+  case $1 in
+    -h | --h | --he | --hel | --help)
+      cat <<EOF
+Usage: mkaclocal [-lx] [-c CONFIG] [-o OUTPUT] [LIBRARY...]
+
+In \`extract' mode (-x, default), constructs an \`aclocal.m4' file containing
+the right macros for the \`configure.in' script CONFIG (by default this is
+\`configure.in').  The output is written to OUTPUT, or \`aclocal.m4' if none
+was specified.
+
+In addition to libraries specified on the command line, the files
+\`aclocal.glob' and \`aclocal.site' contained in the shared file repository,
+and \`aclocal.lib' in the current directory are also searched.
+
+If \`aclocal.lib' contains the string \`*@--TOP--@*', the preceding text is
+written at the top of any output file generated.
+
+In \`list' mode (-l), lists the macros defined in the various libraries.
+
+Options:
+
+-h, --help		Print this help text.
+-v, --version		Print the program's version number.
+-l, --list		List chunks defined in text libraries.
+-x, --extract		Extract chunks from text libraries (default).
+-c, --config=CONFIG	Read CONFIG, not \`configure.in', to decide which
+			macros need extracting.
+-o, --output=OUTPUT	Extract chunks to OUTPUT, not \`aclocal.m4'.
+EOF
+      exit 0
+      ;;
+    -v | --v | --ve | --ver | --vers | --versi | --versio | --version)
+      version=`echo '$Revision: 1.2 $' |
+	sed -n -e 's;^.*: \([0-9.]*\)\\$;\1;p'`
+      echo "txtlib $version; Common Files Distribution version @VERSION@"
+      exit 0
+      ;;
+    -c | --c | --co | --con | --conf | --confi | --config)
+      in="$2";
+      shift
+      ;;
+    -c*)
+      in=`echo $1 | sed -e 's/^-[a-z]//'`
+      ;;
+    --c=* | --co=* | --con=* | --conf=* | --confi=* | --config=*)
+      in=`echo $1 | sed -e 's/^--[a-z]*=//'`
+      ;;
+    -o | --o | --ou | --out | --outp | --outpu | --output)
+      out="$2";
+      shift
+      ;;
+    -o*)
+      out=`echo $1 | sed -e 's/^-[a-z]//'`
+      ;;
+    --o=* | --ou=* | --out=* | --outp=* | --outpu=* | --output=*)
+      out=`echo $1 | sed -e 's/^--[a-z]*=//'`
+      ;;
+    -l | --l | --li | --lis | --list)
+      mode=l
+      ;;
+    -x | --e | --ex | --ext | --extr | --extra | --extrac | --extract)
+      mode=x
+      ;;
+    --)
+      shift
+      break
+      ;;
+    -)
+      break
+      ;;
+    -*)
+      echo "mkaclocal: unknown option \`$1'" >&2
+      exit 1
+      ;;
+    *)
+      break
+      ;;
+  esac
+  shift
+done
+
+set \
+  "$datadir/aclocal.glob" \
+  `test -r $datadir/aclocal.site && echo "$datadir/aclocal.site"` \
+  `test -r ./aclocal.lib && echo "./aclocal.lib"` \
+  "$@"
+
+# --- Now do the job ---
+
+case $mode in
+
+  l)
+    $bindir/txtlib -l "$@" | sort | uniq
+    ;;
+
+  x)
+    t=/tmp/mkaclocal.$$
+    if mkdir -m 700 $t; then :
+    else
+      echo >&2 "mkaclocal: cculd not creat etemporary directory"
+      exit 1
+    fi
+    echo -NOTICE- >$t/a
+    created=no
+
+    $bindir/txtlib -l "$@" | sort | uniq | while read LINE; do
+      echo "/$LINE/ i\\
+$LINE"
+    done >$t/sed
+
+    until { echo -NOTICE-; sed -n -f $t/sed $in; } | sort | uniq >$t/b
+          cmp -s $t/a $t/b
+    do
+      $bindir/txtlib "$@" <$t/b >$out.tmp
+      in=$out.tmp
+      mv $t/b $t/a
+      created=yes
+    done
+
+    if [ "$created" = "yes" ]; then
+      { test -r ./aclocal.lib &&
+	  grep "\*@--TOP--@\*" ./aclocal.lib >/dev/null &&
+	  sed -e "/\*@--TOP--@\*/, $ d" ./aclocal.lib
+	cat $out.tmp
+      } >$out
+    else
+      rm -f $out
+    fi
+
+    rm -fr $t $out.tmp
+    ;;
+esac
diff --git a/mkinstalldirs b/mkinstalldirs
new file mode 100755
index 00000000..a01481be
--- /dev/null
+++ b/mkinstalldirs
@@ -0,0 +1,40 @@
+#! /bin/sh
+# mkinstalldirs --- make directory hierarchy
+# Author: Noah Friedman <friedman@prep.ai.mit.edu>
+# Created: 1993-05-16
+# Public domain
+
+# $Id: mkinstalldirs,v 1.10 1996/05/03 07:37:52 friedman Exp $
+
+errstatus=0
+
+for file
+do
+   set fnord `echo ":$file" | sed -ne 's/^:\//#/;s/^://;s/\// /g;s/^#/\//;p'`
+   shift
+
+   pathcomp=
+   for d
+   do
+     pathcomp="$pathcomp$d"
+     case "$pathcomp" in
+       -* ) pathcomp=./$pathcomp ;;
+     esac
+
+     if test ! -d "$pathcomp"; then
+        echo "mkdir $pathcomp" 1>&2
+
+        mkdir "$pathcomp" || lasterr=$?
+
+        if test ! -d "$pathcomp"; then
+  	  errstatus=$lasterr
+        fi
+     fi
+
+     pathcomp="$pathcomp/"
+   done
+done
+
+exit $errstatus
+
+# mkinstalldirs ends here
diff --git a/mklinks.in b/mklinks.in
new file mode 100755
index 00000000..bc27bbf2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/mklinks.in
@@ -0,0 +1,85 @@
+#! /bin/sh
+
+# -*-sh-*-
+#
+# $Id: mklinks.in,v 1.4 1997/09/11 09:06:34 mdw Exp $
+#
+# Create links to the repository
+#
+# (c) 1997 Mark Wooding
+#
+
+#----- Licensing notice -----------------------------------------------------
+#
+# This file is part of the Common Files Distribution (`common').
+#
+# `Common' is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
+# it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
+# the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
+# (at your option) any later version.
+#
+# `Common' is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+# but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+# MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the
+# GNU General Public License for more details.
+#
+# You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+# along with `common'; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation,
+# Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.
+
+#----- Revision history -----------------------------------------------------
+#
+# $Log$
+
+# --- Configuration variables ---
+
+prefix=@prefix@
+datadir=@datadir@/@PACKAGE@
+
+# --- Parse command line arguments ---
+
+while [ $# -gt 0 ]; do
+  case $1 in
+    -h | --h | --he | --hel | --help)
+      cat <<EOF
+Usage: mklinks [FILE...]
+
+The FILEs listed are themselves lists of filenames.  Makes each named file a
+link to the corresponding file in the shared files repository.  With no
+arguments, \`mklinks' reads \`.links' from the current directory.
+EOF
+      exit 0
+      ;;
+    -v | --v | --ve | --ver | --vers | --versi | --versio | --version)
+      version=`echo '$Revision: 1.4 $' |
+	sed -n -e 's;^.*: \([0-9.]*\)\\$;\1;p'`
+      echo "mklinks $version; Common Files Distribution version @VERSION@"
+      exit 0
+      ;;
+    --)
+      shift
+      break
+      ;;
+    -)
+      break
+      ;;
+    -*)
+      echo "mklinks: unknown option \`$1'" >&2
+      exit 1
+      ;;
+    *)
+      break
+      ;;
+  esac
+  shift
+done  
+
+# --- Main code ---
+#
+# This is really trivial.
+
+[ $# = 0 ] && set .links
+cat "$@" | while read name; do
+  base="`echo $name | sed -e 's;^.*/;;'`"
+  [ -r "$datadir/$base" ] && ln -sf "$datadir/$base" "$name"
+done
diff --git a/setup b/setup
new file mode 100755
index 00000000..f8ae0517
--- /dev/null
+++ b/setup
@@ -0,0 +1,7 @@
+#! /bin/sh
+
+set -e
+mkaclocal || cp aclocal.glob aclocal.m4
+autoconf
+automake
+mkdir build
diff --git a/texinfo.tex b/texinfo.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..d106eb24
--- /dev/null
+++ b/texinfo.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,5462 @@
+% texinfo.tex -- TeX macros to handle Texinfo files.
+%
+% Load plain if necessary, i.e., if running under initex.
+\expandafter\ifx\csname fmtname\endcsname\relax\input plain\fi
+%
+\def\texinfoversion{1998-11-06}%
+%
+% Copyright (C) 1985, 86, 88, 90, 91, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98
+% Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+%
+% This texinfo.tex file is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+% modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as
+% published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at
+% your option) any later version.
+%
+% This texinfo.tex file is distributed in the hope that it will be
+% useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty
+% of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+% General Public License for more details.
+%
+% You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+% along with this texinfo.tex file; see the file COPYING.  If not, write
+% to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330,
+% Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.
+%
+% In other words, you are welcome to use, share and improve this program.
+% You are forbidden to forbid anyone else to use, share and improve
+% what you give them.   Help stamp out software-hoarding!
+%
+% Please try the latest version of texinfo.tex before submitting bug
+% reports; you can get the latest version from:
+%   ftp://ftp.gnu.org/pub/gnu/texinfo.tex
+%   /home/gd/gnu/doc/texinfo.tex on the GNU machines.
+%   (and all GNU mirrors, see http://www.gnu.org/order/ftp.html)
+%   ftp://tug.org/tex/texinfo.tex
+%   ftp://ctan.org/macros/texinfo/texinfo.tex
+%   (and all CTAN mirrors, finger ctan@ctan.org for a list).
+% The texinfo.tex in the texinfo distribution itself could well be out
+% of date, so if that's what you're using, please check.
+% 
+% Send bug reports to bug-texinfo@gnu.org.
+% Please include a precise test case in each bug report,
+% including a complete document with which we can reproduce the problem.
+% 
+% To process a Texinfo manual with TeX, it's most reliable to use the
+% texi2dvi shell script that comes with the distribution.  For simple
+% manuals, however, you can get away with:
+%   tex foo.texi
+%   texindex foo.??
+%   tex foo.texi
+%   tex foo.texi
+%   dvips foo.dvi -o # or whatever, to process the dvi file.
+% The extra runs of TeX get the cross-reference information correct.
+% Sometimes one run after texindex suffices, and sometimes you need more
+% than two; texi2dvi does it as many times as necessary.
+
+\message{Loading texinfo [version \texinfoversion]:}
+
+% If in a .fmt file, print the version number
+% and turn on active characters that we couldn't do earlier because
+% they might have appeared in the input file name.
+\everyjob{\message{[Texinfo version \texinfoversion]}%
+  \catcode`+=\active \catcode`\_=\active}
+
+% Save some parts of plain tex whose names we will redefine.
+
+\let\ptexb=\b
+\let\ptexbullet=\bullet
+\let\ptexc=\c
+\let\ptexcomma=\,
+\let\ptexdot=\.
+\let\ptexdots=\dots
+\let\ptexend=\end
+\let\ptexequiv=\equiv
+\let\ptexexclam=\!
+\let\ptexi=\i
+\let\ptexlbrace=\{
+\let\ptexrbrace=\}
+\let\ptexstar=\*
+\let\ptext=\t
+
+% We never want plain's outer \+ definition in Texinfo.
+% For @tex, we can use \tabalign.
+\let\+ = \relax
+
+
+\message{Basics,}
+\chardef\other=12
+
+% If this character appears in an error message or help string, it
+% starts a new line in the output.
+\newlinechar = `^^J
+
+% Set up fixed words for English if not already set.
+\ifx\putwordAppendix\undefined \gdef\putwordAppendix{Appendix}\fi
+\ifx\putwordChapter\undefined  \gdef\putwordChapter{Chapter}\fi
+\ifx\putwordfile\undefined     \gdef\putwordfile{file}\fi
+\ifx\putwordInfo\undefined     \gdef\putwordInfo{Info}\fi
+\ifx\putwordMethodon\undefined \gdef\putwordMethodon{Method on}\fi
+\ifx\putwordon\undefined       \gdef\putwordon{on}\fi
+\ifx\putwordpage\undefined     \gdef\putwordpage{page}\fi
+\ifx\putwordsection\undefined  \gdef\putwordsection{section}\fi
+\ifx\putwordSection\undefined  \gdef\putwordSection{Section}\fi
+\ifx\putwordsee\undefined      \gdef\putwordsee{see}\fi
+\ifx\putwordSee\undefined      \gdef\putwordSee{See}\fi
+\ifx\putwordShortContents\undefined  \gdef\putwordShortContents{Short Contents}\fi
+\ifx\putwordTableofContents\undefined\gdef\putwordTableofContents{Table of Contents}\fi
+
+% Ignore a token.
+%
+\def\gobble#1{}
+
+\hyphenation{ap-pen-dix}
+\hyphenation{mini-buf-fer mini-buf-fers}
+\hyphenation{eshell}
+\hyphenation{white-space}
+
+% Margin to add to right of even pages, to left of odd pages.
+\newdimen \bindingoffset
+\newdimen \normaloffset
+\newdimen\pagewidth \newdimen\pageheight
+
+% Sometimes it is convenient to have everything in the transcript file
+% and nothing on the terminal.  We don't just call \tracingall here,
+% since that produces some useless output on the terminal.
+%
+\def\gloggingall{\begingroup \globaldefs = 1 \loggingall \endgroup}%
+\ifx\eTeXversion\undefined
+\def\loggingall{\tracingcommands2 \tracingstats2
+   \tracingpages1 \tracingoutput1 \tracinglostchars1
+   \tracingmacros2 \tracingparagraphs1 \tracingrestores1
+   \showboxbreadth\maxdimen\showboxdepth\maxdimen
+}%
+\else
+\def\loggingall{\tracingcommands3 \tracingstats2
+   \tracingpages1 \tracingoutput1 \tracinglostchars1
+   \tracingmacros2 \tracingparagraphs1 \tracingrestores1
+   \tracingscantokens1 \tracingassigns1 \tracingifs1
+   \tracinggroups1 \tracingnesting2
+   \showboxbreadth\maxdimen\showboxdepth\maxdimen
+}%
+\fi
+
+% For @cropmarks command.
+% Do @cropmarks to get crop marks.
+% 
+\newif\ifcropmarks
+\let\cropmarks = \cropmarkstrue
+%
+% Dimensions to add cropmarks at corners.
+% Added by P. A. MacKay, 12 Nov. 1986
+%
+\newdimen\outerhsize \newdimen\outervsize % set by the paper size routines
+\newdimen\cornerlong  \cornerlong=1pc
+\newdimen\cornerthick \cornerthick=.3pt
+\newdimen\topandbottommargin \topandbottommargin=.75in
+
+% Main output routine.
+\chardef\PAGE = 255
+\output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}}
+
+\newbox\headlinebox
+\newbox\footlinebox
+
+% \onepageout takes a vbox as an argument.  Note that \pagecontents
+% does insertions, but you have to call it yourself.
+\def\onepageout#1{%
+  \ifcropmarks \hoffset=0pt \else \hoffset=\normaloffset \fi
+  %
+  \ifodd\pageno  \advance\hoffset by \bindingoffset
+  \else \advance\hoffset by -\bindingoffset\fi
+  %
+  % Do this outside of the \shipout so @code etc. will be expanded in
+  % the headline as they should be, not taken literally (outputting ''code).
+  \setbox\headlinebox = \vbox{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makeheadline}%
+  \setbox\footlinebox = \vbox{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makefootline}%
+  %
+  {%
+    % Have to do this stuff outside the \shipout because we want it to
+    % take effect in \write's, yet the group defined by the \vbox ends
+    % before the \shipout runs.
+    %
+    \escapechar = `\\     % use backslash in output files.
+    \indexdummies         % don't expand commands in the output.
+    \normalturnoffactive  % \ in index entries must not stay \, e.g., if
+                   % the page break happens to be in the middle of an example.
+    \shipout\vbox{%
+      \ifcropmarks \vbox to \outervsize\bgroup
+        \hsize = \outerhsize
+        \line{\ewtop\hfil\ewtop}%
+        \nointerlineskip
+        \line{%
+          \vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nstop}%
+          \hfill
+          \vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nstop}%
+        }%
+        \vskip\topandbottommargin
+        \line\bgroup
+          \hfil % center the page within the outer (page) hsize.
+          \ifodd\pageno\hskip\bindingoffset\fi
+          \vbox\bgroup
+      \fi
+      %
+      \unvbox\headlinebox
+      \pagebody{#1}%
+      \ifdim\ht\footlinebox > 0pt
+        % Only leave this space if the footline is nonempty.
+        % (We lessened \vsize for it in \oddfootingxxx.)
+        % The \baselineskip=24pt in plain's \makefootline has no effect.
+        \vskip 2\baselineskip
+        \unvbox\footlinebox
+      \fi
+      %
+      \ifcropmarks
+          \egroup % end of \vbox\bgroup
+        \hfil\egroup % end of (centering) \line\bgroup
+        \vskip\topandbottommargin plus1fill minus1fill
+        \boxmaxdepth = \cornerthick
+        \line{%
+          \vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nsbot}%
+          \hfill
+          \vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nsbot}%
+        }%
+        \nointerlineskip
+        \line{\ewbot\hfil\ewbot}%
+      \egroup % \vbox from first cropmarks clause
+      \fi
+    }% end of \shipout\vbox
+  }% end of group with \turnoffactive
+  \advancepageno
+  \ifnum\outputpenalty>-20000 \else\dosupereject\fi
+}
+
+\newinsert\margin \dimen\margin=\maxdimen
+
+\def\pagebody#1{\vbox to\pageheight{\boxmaxdepth=\maxdepth #1}}
+{\catcode`\@ =11
+\gdef\pagecontents#1{\ifvoid\topins\else\unvbox\topins\fi
+% marginal hacks, juha@viisa.uucp (Juha Takala)
+\ifvoid\margin\else % marginal info is present
+  \rlap{\kern\hsize\vbox to\z@{\kern1pt\box\margin \vss}}\fi
+\dimen@=\dp#1 \unvbox#1
+\ifvoid\footins\else\vskip\skip\footins\footnoterule \unvbox\footins\fi
+\ifr@ggedbottom \kern-\dimen@ \vfil \fi}
+}
+
+% Here are the rules for the cropmarks.  Note that they are
+% offset so that the space between them is truly \outerhsize or \outervsize
+% (P. A. MacKay, 12 November, 1986)
+%
+\def\ewtop{\vrule height\cornerthick depth0pt width\cornerlong}
+\def\nstop{\vbox
+  {\hrule height\cornerthick depth\cornerlong width\cornerthick}}
+\def\ewbot{\vrule height0pt depth\cornerthick width\cornerlong}
+\def\nsbot{\vbox
+  {\hrule height\cornerlong depth\cornerthick width\cornerthick}}
+
+% Parse an argument, then pass it to #1.  The argument is the rest of
+% the input line (except we remove a trailing comment).  #1 should be a
+% macro which expects an ordinary undelimited TeX argument.
+%
+\def\parsearg#1{%
+  \let\next = #1%
+  \begingroup
+    \obeylines
+    \futurelet\temp\parseargx
+}
+
+% If the next token is an obeyed space (from an @example environment or
+% the like), remove it and recurse.  Otherwise, we're done.
+\def\parseargx{%
+  % \obeyedspace is defined far below, after the definition of \sepspaces.
+  \ifx\obeyedspace\temp
+    \expandafter\parseargdiscardspace
+  \else
+    \expandafter\parseargline
+  \fi
+}
+
+% Remove a single space (as the delimiter token to the macro call).
+{\obeyspaces %
+ \gdef\parseargdiscardspace {\futurelet\temp\parseargx}}
+
+{\obeylines %
+  \gdef\parseargline#1^^M{%
+    \endgroup % End of the group started in \parsearg.
+    %
+    % First remove any @c comment, then any @comment.
+    % Result of each macro is put in \toks0.
+    \argremovec #1\c\relax %
+    \expandafter\argremovecomment \the\toks0 \comment\relax %
+    %
+    % Call the caller's macro, saved as \next in \parsearg.
+    \expandafter\next\expandafter{\the\toks0}%
+  }%
+}
+
+% Since all \c{,omment} does is throw away the argument, we can let TeX
+% do that for us.  The \relax here is matched by the \relax in the call
+% in \parseargline; it could be more or less anything, its purpose is
+% just to delimit the argument to the \c.
+\def\argremovec#1\c#2\relax{\toks0 = {#1}}
+\def\argremovecomment#1\comment#2\relax{\toks0 = {#1}}
+
+% \argremovec{,omment} might leave us with trailing spaces, though; e.g.,
+%    @end itemize  @c foo
+% will have two active spaces as part of the argument with the
+% `itemize'.  Here we remove all active spaces from #1, and assign the
+% result to \toks0.
+%
+% This loses if there are any *other* active characters besides spaces
+% in the argument -- _ ^ +, for example -- since they get expanded.
+% Fortunately, Texinfo does not define any such commands.  (If it ever
+% does, the catcode of the characters in questionwill have to be changed
+% here.)  But this means we cannot call \removeactivespaces as part of
+% \argremovec{,omment}, since @c uses \parsearg, and thus the argument
+% that \parsearg gets might well have any character at all in it.
+%
+\def\removeactivespaces#1{%
+  \begingroup
+    \ignoreactivespaces
+    \edef\temp{#1}%
+    \global\toks0 = \expandafter{\temp}%
+  \endgroup
+}
+
+% Change the active space to expand to nothing.
+%
+\begingroup
+  \obeyspaces
+  \gdef\ignoreactivespaces{\obeyspaces\let =\empty}
+\endgroup
+
+
+\def\flushcr{\ifx\par\lisppar \def\next##1{}\else \let\next=\relax \fi \next}
+
+%% These are used to keep @begin/@end levels from running away
+%% Call \inENV within environments (after a \begingroup)
+\newif\ifENV \ENVfalse \def\inENV{\ifENV\relax\else\ENVtrue\fi}
+\def\ENVcheck{%
+\ifENV\errmessage{Still within an environment; press RETURN to continue}
+\endgroup\fi} % This is not perfect, but it should reduce lossage
+
+% @begin foo  is the same as @foo, for now.
+\newhelp\EMsimple{Press RETURN to continue.}
+
+\outer\def\begin{\parsearg\beginxxx}
+
+\def\beginxxx #1{%
+\expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\relax
+{\errhelp=\EMsimple \errmessage{Undefined command @begin #1}}\else
+\csname #1\endcsname\fi}
+
+% @end foo executes the definition of \Efoo.
+%
+\def\end{\parsearg\endxxx}
+\def\endxxx #1{%
+  \removeactivespaces{#1}%
+  \edef\endthing{\the\toks0}%
+  %
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname E\endthing\endcsname\relax
+    \expandafter\ifx\csname \endthing\endcsname\relax
+      % There's no \foo, i.e., no ``environment'' foo.
+      \errhelp = \EMsimple
+      \errmessage{Undefined command `@end \endthing'}%
+    \else
+      \unmatchedenderror\endthing
+    \fi
+  \else
+    % Everything's ok; the right environment has been started.
+    \csname E\endthing\endcsname
+  \fi
+}
+
+% There is an environment #1, but it hasn't been started.  Give an error.
+%
+\def\unmatchedenderror#1{%
+  \errhelp = \EMsimple
+  \errmessage{This `@end #1' doesn't have a matching `@#1'}%
+}
+
+% Define the control sequence \E#1 to give an unmatched @end error.
+%
+\def\defineunmatchedend#1{%
+  \expandafter\def\csname E#1\endcsname{\unmatchedenderror{#1}}%
+}
+
+
+% Single-spacing is done by various environments (specifically, in
+% \nonfillstart and \quotations).
+\newskip\singlespaceskip \singlespaceskip = 12.5pt
+\def\singlespace{%
+  % Why was this kern here?  It messes up equalizing space above and below
+  % environments.  --karl, 6may93
+  %{\advance \baselineskip by -\singlespaceskip
+  %\kern \baselineskip}%
+  \setleading \singlespaceskip
+}
+
+%% Simple single-character @ commands
+
+% @@ prints an @
+% Kludge this until the fonts are right (grr).
+\def\@{{\tt\char64}}
+
+% This is turned off because it was never documented
+% and you can use @w{...} around a quote to suppress ligatures.
+%% Define @` and @' to be the same as ` and '
+%% but suppressing ligatures.
+%\def\`{{`}}
+%\def\'{{'}}
+
+% Used to generate quoted braces.
+\def\mylbrace {{\tt\char123}}
+\def\myrbrace {{\tt\char125}}
+\let\{=\mylbrace
+\let\}=\myrbrace
+\begingroup
+  % Definitions to produce actual \{ & \} command in an index.
+  \catcode`\{ = 12 \catcode`\} = 12
+  \catcode`\[ = 1 \catcode`\] = 2
+  \catcode`\@ = 0 \catcode`\\ = 12
+  @gdef@lbracecmd[\{]%
+  @gdef@rbracecmd[\}]%
+@endgroup
+
+% Accents: @, @dotaccent @ringaccent @ubaraccent @udotaccent
+% Others are defined by plain TeX: @` @' @" @^ @~ @= @v @H.
+\let\, = \c
+\let\dotaccent = \.
+\def\ringaccent#1{{\accent23 #1}}
+\let\tieaccent = \t
+\let\ubaraccent = \b
+\let\udotaccent = \d
+
+% Other special characters: @questiondown @exclamdown
+% Plain TeX defines: @AA @AE @O @OE @L (and lowercase versions) @ss.
+\def\questiondown{?`}
+\def\exclamdown{!`}
+
+% Dotless i and dotless j, used for accents.
+\def\imacro{i}
+\def\jmacro{j}
+\def\dotless#1{%
+  \def\temp{#1}%
+  \ifx\temp\imacro \ptexi
+  \else\ifx\temp\jmacro \j
+  \else \errmessage{@dotless can be used only with i or j}%
+  \fi\fi
+}
+
+% Be sure we're in horizontal mode when doing a tie, since we make space
+% equivalent to this in @example-like environments. Otherwise, a space
+% at the beginning of a line will start with \penalty -- and
+% since \penalty is valid in vertical mode, we'd end up putting the
+% penalty on the vertical list instead of in the new paragraph.
+{\catcode`@ = 11
+ % Avoid using \@M directly, because that causes trouble
+ % if the definition is written into an index file.
+ \global\let\tiepenalty = \@M
+ \gdef\tie{\leavevmode\penalty\tiepenalty\ }
+}
+
+% @: forces normal size whitespace following.
+\def\:{\spacefactor=1000 }
+
+% @* forces a line break.
+\def\*{\hfil\break\hbox{}\ignorespaces}
+
+% @. is an end-of-sentence period.
+\def\.{.\spacefactor=3000 }
+
+% @! is an end-of-sentence bang.
+\def\!{!\spacefactor=3000 }
+
+% @? is an end-of-sentence query.
+\def\?{?\spacefactor=3000 }
+
+% @w prevents a word break.  Without the \leavevmode, @w at the
+% beginning of a paragraph, when TeX is still in vertical mode, would
+% produce a whole line of output instead of starting the paragraph.
+\def\w#1{\leavevmode\hbox{#1}}
+
+% @group ... @end group forces ... to be all on one page, by enclosing
+% it in a TeX vbox.  We use \vtop instead of \vbox to construct the box
+% to keep its height that of a normal line.  According to the rules for
+% \topskip (p.114 of the TeXbook), the glue inserted is
+% max (\topskip - \ht (first item), 0).  If that height is large,
+% therefore, no glue is inserted, and the space between the headline and
+% the text is small, which looks bad.
+%
+\def\group{\begingroup
+  \ifnum\catcode13=\active \else
+    \errhelp = \groupinvalidhelp
+    \errmessage{@group invalid in context where filling is enabled}%
+  \fi
+  %
+  % The \vtop we start below produces a box with normal height and large
+  % depth; thus, TeX puts \baselineskip glue before it, and (when the
+  % next line of text is done) \lineskip glue after it.  (See p.82 of
+  % the TeXbook.)  Thus, space below is not quite equal to space
+  % above.  But it's pretty close.
+  \def\Egroup{%
+    \egroup           % End the \vtop.
+    \endgroup         % End the \group.
+  }%
+  %
+  \vtop\bgroup
+    % We have to put a strut on the last line in case the @group is in
+    % the midst of an example, rather than completely enclosing it.
+    % Otherwise, the interline space between the last line of the group
+    % and the first line afterwards is too small.  But we can't put the
+    % strut in \Egroup, since there it would be on a line by itself.
+    % Hence this just inserts a strut at the beginning of each line.
+    \everypar = {\strut}%
+    %
+    % Since we have a strut on every line, we don't need any of TeX's
+    % normal interline spacing.
+    \offinterlineskip
+    %
+    % OK, but now we have to do something about blank
+    % lines in the input in @example-like environments, which normally
+    % just turn into \lisppar, which will insert no space now that we've
+    % turned off the interline space.  Simplest is to make them be an
+    % empty paragraph.
+    \ifx\par\lisppar
+      \edef\par{\leavevmode \par}%
+      %
+      % Reset ^^M's definition to new definition of \par.
+      \obeylines
+    \fi
+    %
+    % Do @comment since we are called inside an environment such as
+    % @example, where each end-of-line in the input causes an
+    % end-of-line in the output.  We don't want the end-of-line after
+    % the `@group' to put extra space in the output.  Since @group
+    % should appear on a line by itself (according to the Texinfo
+    % manual), we don't worry about eating any user text.
+    \comment
+}
+%
+% TeX puts in an \escapechar (i.e., `@') at the beginning of the help
+% message, so this ends up printing `@group can only ...'.
+%
+\newhelp\groupinvalidhelp{%
+group can only be used in environments such as @example,^^J%
+where each line of input produces a line of output.}
+
+% @need space-in-mils
+% forces a page break if there is not space-in-mils remaining.
+
+\newdimen\mil  \mil=0.001in
+
+\def\need{\parsearg\needx}
+
+% Old definition--didn't work.
+%\def\needx #1{\par %
+%% This method tries to make TeX break the page naturally
+%% if the depth of the box does not fit.
+%{\baselineskip=0pt%
+%\vtop to #1\mil{\vfil}\kern -#1\mil\nobreak
+%\prevdepth=-1000pt
+%}}
+
+\def\needx#1{%
+  % Go into vertical mode, so we don't make a big box in the middle of a
+  % paragraph.
+  \par
+  %
+  % Don't add any leading before our big empty box, but allow a page
+  % break, since the best break might be right here.
+  \allowbreak
+  \nointerlineskip
+  \vtop to #1\mil{\vfil}%
+  %
+  % TeX does not even consider page breaks if a penalty added to the
+  % main vertical list is 10000 or more.  But in order to see if the
+  % empty box we just added fits on the page, we must make it consider
+  % page breaks.  On the other hand, we don't want to actually break the
+  % page after the empty box.  So we use a penalty of 9999.
+  %
+  % There is an extremely small chance that TeX will actually break the
+  % page at this \penalty, if there are no other feasible breakpoints in
+  % sight.  (If the user is using lots of big @group commands, which
+  % almost-but-not-quite fill up a page, TeX will have a hard time doing
+  % good page breaking, for example.)  However, I could not construct an
+  % example where a page broke at this \penalty; if it happens in a real
+  % document, then we can reconsider our strategy.
+  \penalty9999
+  %
+  % Back up by the size of the box, whether we did a page break or not.
+  \kern -#1\mil
+  %
+  % Do not allow a page break right after this kern.
+  \nobreak
+}
+
+% @br   forces paragraph break
+
+\let\br = \par
+
+% @dots{} output an ellipsis using the current font.
+% We do .5em per period so that it has the same spacing in a typewriter
+% font as three actual period characters.
+%
+\def\dots{%
+  \leavevmode
+  \hbox to 1.5em{%
+    \hskip 0pt plus 0.25fil minus 0.25fil
+    .\hss.\hss.%
+    \hskip 0pt plus 0.5fil minus 0.5fil
+  }%
+}
+
+% @enddots{} is an end-of-sentence ellipsis.
+% 
+\def\enddots{%
+  \leavevmode
+  \hbox to 2em{%
+    \hskip 0pt plus 0.25fil minus 0.25fil
+    .\hss.\hss.\hss.%
+    \hskip 0pt plus 0.5fil minus 0.5fil
+  }%
+  \spacefactor=3000
+}
+
+
+% @page    forces the start of a new page
+%
+\def\page{\par\vfill\supereject}
+
+% @exdent text....
+% outputs text on separate line in roman font, starting at standard page margin
+
+% This records the amount of indent in the innermost environment.
+% That's how much \exdent should take out.
+\newskip\exdentamount
+
+% This defn is used inside fill environments such as @defun.
+\def\exdent{\parsearg\exdentyyy}
+\def\exdentyyy #1{{\hfil\break\hbox{\kern -\exdentamount{\rm#1}}\hfil\break}}
+
+% This defn is used inside nofill environments such as @example.
+\def\nofillexdent{\parsearg\nofillexdentyyy}
+\def\nofillexdentyyy #1{{\advance \leftskip by -\exdentamount
+\leftline{\hskip\leftskip{\rm#1}}}}
+
+% @inmargin{TEXT} puts TEXT in the margin next to the current paragraph.
+
+\def\inmargin#1{%
+\strut\vadjust{\nobreak\kern-\strutdepth
+  \vtop to \strutdepth{\baselineskip\strutdepth\vss
+  \llap{\rightskip=\inmarginspacing \vbox{\noindent #1}}\null}}}
+\newskip\inmarginspacing \inmarginspacing=1cm
+\def\strutdepth{\dp\strutbox}
+
+%\hbox{{\rm#1}}\hfil\break}}
+
+% @include file    insert text of that file as input.
+% Allow normal characters that  we make active in the argument (a file name).
+\def\include{\begingroup
+  \catcode`\\=12
+  \catcode`~=12
+  \catcode`^=12
+  \catcode`_=12
+  \catcode`|=12
+  \catcode`<=12
+  \catcode`>=12
+  \catcode`+=12
+  \parsearg\includezzz}
+% Restore active chars for included file.
+\def\includezzz#1{\endgroup\begingroup
+  % Read the included file in a group so nested @include's work.
+  \def\thisfile{#1}%
+  \input\thisfile
+\endgroup}
+
+\def\thisfile{}
+
+% @center line   outputs that line, centered
+
+\def\center{\parsearg\centerzzz}
+\def\centerzzz #1{{\advance\hsize by -\leftskip
+\advance\hsize by -\rightskip
+\centerline{#1}}}
+
+% @sp n   outputs n lines of vertical space
+
+\def\sp{\parsearg\spxxx}
+\def\spxxx #1{\vskip #1\baselineskip}
+
+% @comment ...line which is ignored...
+% @c is the same as @comment
+% @ignore ... @end ignore  is another way to write a comment
+
+\def\comment{\begingroup \catcode`\^^M=\other%
+\catcode`\@=\other \catcode`\{=\other \catcode`\}=\other%
+\commentxxx}
+{\catcode`\^^M=\other \gdef\commentxxx#1^^M{\endgroup}}
+
+\let\c=\comment
+
+% @paragraphindent  is defined for the Info formatting commands only.
+\let\paragraphindent=\comment
+
+% Prevent errors for section commands.
+% Used in @ignore and in failing conditionals.
+\def\ignoresections{%
+\let\chapter=\relax
+\let\unnumbered=\relax
+\let\top=\relax
+\let\unnumberedsec=\relax
+\let\unnumberedsection=\relax
+\let\unnumberedsubsec=\relax
+\let\unnumberedsubsection=\relax
+\let\unnumberedsubsubsec=\relax
+\let\unnumberedsubsubsection=\relax
+\let\section=\relax
+\let\subsec=\relax
+\let\subsubsec=\relax
+\let\subsection=\relax
+\let\subsubsection=\relax
+\let\appendix=\relax
+\let\appendixsec=\relax
+\let\appendixsection=\relax
+\let\appendixsubsec=\relax
+\let\appendixsubsection=\relax
+\let\appendixsubsubsec=\relax
+\let\appendixsubsubsection=\relax
+\let\contents=\relax
+\let\smallbook=\relax
+\let\titlepage=\relax
+}
+
+% Used in nested conditionals, where we have to parse the Texinfo source
+% and so want to turn off most commands, in case they are used
+% incorrectly.
+%
+\def\ignoremorecommands{%
+  \let\defcodeindex = \relax
+  \let\defcv = \relax
+  \let\deffn = \relax
+  \let\deffnx = \relax
+  \let\defindex = \relax
+  \let\defivar = \relax
+  \let\defmac = \relax
+  \let\defmethod = \relax
+  \let\defop = \relax
+  \let\defopt = \relax
+  \let\defspec = \relax
+  \let\deftp = \relax
+  \let\deftypefn = \relax
+  \let\deftypefun = \relax
+  \let\deftypevar = \relax
+  \let\deftypevr = \relax
+  \let\defun = \relax
+  \let\defvar = \relax
+  \let\defvr = \relax
+  \let\ref = \relax
+  \let\xref = \relax
+  \let\printindex = \relax
+  \let\pxref = \relax
+  \let\settitle = \relax
+  \let\setchapternewpage = \relax
+  \let\setchapterstyle = \relax
+  \let\everyheading = \relax
+  \let\evenheading = \relax
+  \let\oddheading = \relax
+  \let\everyfooting = \relax
+  \let\evenfooting = \relax
+  \let\oddfooting = \relax
+  \let\headings = \relax
+  \let\include = \relax
+  \let\lowersections = \relax
+  \let\down = \relax
+  \let\raisesections = \relax
+  \let\up = \relax
+  \let\set = \relax
+  \let\clear = \relax
+  \let\item = \relax
+}
+
+% Ignore @ignore ... @end ignore.
+%
+\def\ignore{\doignore{ignore}}
+
+% Ignore @ifinfo, @ifhtml, @ifnottex, @html, @menu, and @direntry text.
+%
+\def\ifinfo{\doignore{ifinfo}}
+\def\ifhtml{\doignore{ifhtml}}
+\def\ifnottex{\doignore{ifnottex}}
+\def\html{\doignore{html}}
+\def\menu{\doignore{menu}}
+\def\direntry{\doignore{direntry}}
+
+% @dircategory CATEGORY  -- specify a category of the dir file
+% which this file should belong to.  Ignore this in TeX.
+\let\dircategory = \comment
+
+% Ignore text until a line `@end #1'.
+%
+\def\doignore#1{\begingroup
+  % Don't complain about control sequences we have declared \outer.
+  \ignoresections
+  %
+  % Define a command to swallow text until we reach `@end #1'.
+  % This @ is a catcode 12 token (that is the normal catcode of @ in
+  % this texinfo.tex file).  We change the catcode of @ below to match.
+  \long\def\doignoretext##1@end #1{\enddoignore}%
+  %
+  % Make sure that spaces turn into tokens that match what \doignoretext wants.
+  \catcode32 = 10
+  %
+  % Ignore braces, too, so mismatched braces don't cause trouble.
+  \catcode`\{ = 9
+  \catcode`\} = 9
+  %
+  % We must not have @c interpreted as a control sequence.
+  \catcode`\@ = 12
+  %
+  % Make the letter c a comment character so that the rest of the line
+  % will be ignored. This way, the document can have (for example)
+  %   @c @end ifinfo
+  % and the @end ifinfo will be properly ignored.
+  % (We've just changed @ to catcode 12.)
+  \catcode`\c = 14
+  %
+  % And now expand that command.
+  \doignoretext
+}
+
+% What we do to finish off ignored text.
+%
+\def\enddoignore{\endgroup\ignorespaces}%
+
+\newif\ifwarnedobs\warnedobsfalse
+\def\obstexwarn{%
+  \ifwarnedobs\relax\else
+  % We need to warn folks that they may have trouble with TeX 3.0.
+  % This uses \immediate\write16 rather than \message to get newlines.
+    \immediate\write16{}
+    \immediate\write16{***WARNING*** for users of Unix TeX 3.0!}
+    \immediate\write16{This manual trips a bug in TeX version 3.0 (tex hangs).}
+    \immediate\write16{If you are running another version of TeX, relax.}
+    \immediate\write16{If you are running Unix TeX 3.0, kill this TeX process.}
+    \immediate\write16{  Then upgrade your TeX installation if you can.}
+    \immediate\write16{  (See ftp://ftp.gnu.org/pub/gnu/TeX.README.)}
+    \immediate\write16{If you are stuck with version 3.0, run the}
+    \immediate\write16{  script ``tex3patch'' from the Texinfo distribution}
+    \immediate\write16{  to use a workaround.}
+    \immediate\write16{}
+    \global\warnedobstrue
+    \fi
+}
+
+% **In TeX 3.0, setting text in \nullfont hangs tex.  For a
+% workaround (which requires the file ``dummy.tfm'' to be installed),
+% uncomment the following line:
+%%%%%\font\nullfont=dummy\let\obstexwarn=\relax
+
+% Ignore text, except that we keep track of conditional commands for
+% purposes of nesting, up to an `@end #1' command.
+%
+\def\nestedignore#1{%
+  \obstexwarn
+  % We must actually expand the ignored text to look for the @end
+  % command, so that nested ignore constructs work.  Thus, we put the
+  % text into a \vbox and then do nothing with the result.  To minimize
+  % the change of memory overflow, we follow the approach outlined on
+  % page 401 of the TeXbook: make the current font be a dummy font.
+  %
+  \setbox0 = \vbox\bgroup
+    % Don't complain about control sequences we have declared \outer.
+    \ignoresections
+    %
+    % Define `@end #1' to end the box, which will in turn undefine the
+    % @end command again.
+    \expandafter\def\csname E#1\endcsname{\egroup\ignorespaces}%
+    %
+    % We are going to be parsing Texinfo commands.  Most cause no
+    % trouble when they are used incorrectly, but some commands do
+    % complicated argument parsing or otherwise get confused, so we
+    % undefine them.
+    %
+    % We can't do anything about stray @-signs, unfortunately;
+    % they'll produce `undefined control sequence' errors.
+    \ignoremorecommands
+    %
+    % Set the current font to be \nullfont, a TeX primitive, and define
+    % all the font commands to also use \nullfont.  We don't use
+    % dummy.tfm, as suggested in the TeXbook, because not all sites
+    % might have that installed.  Therefore, math mode will still
+    % produce output, but that should be an extremely small amount of
+    % stuff compared to the main input.
+    %
+    \nullfont
+    \let\tenrm = \nullfont  \let\tenit = \nullfont  \let\tensl = \nullfont
+    \let\tenbf = \nullfont  \let\tentt = \nullfont  \let\smallcaps = \nullfont
+    \let\tensf = \nullfont
+    % Similarly for index fonts (mostly for their use in
+    % smallexample)
+    \let\indrm = \nullfont  \let\indit = \nullfont  \let\indsl = \nullfont
+    \let\indbf = \nullfont  \let\indtt = \nullfont  \let\indsc = \nullfont
+    \let\indsf = \nullfont
+    %
+    % Don't complain when characters are missing from the fonts.
+    \tracinglostchars = 0
+    %
+    % Don't bother to do space factor calculations.
+    \frenchspacing
+    %
+    % Don't report underfull hboxes.
+    \hbadness = 10000
+    %
+    % Do minimal line-breaking.
+    \pretolerance = 10000
+    %
+    % Do not execute instructions in @tex
+    \def\tex{\doignore{tex}}%
+    % Do not execute macro definitions.
+    % `c' is a comment character, so the word `macro' will get cut off.
+    \def\macro{\doignore{ma}}%
+}
+
+% @set VAR sets the variable VAR to an empty value.
+% @set VAR REST-OF-LINE sets VAR to the value REST-OF-LINE.
+%
+% Since we want to separate VAR from REST-OF-LINE (which might be
+% empty), we can't just use \parsearg; we have to insert a space of our
+% own to delimit the rest of the line, and then take it out again if we
+% didn't need it.  Make sure the catcode of space is correct to avoid
+% losing inside @example, for instance.
+%
+\def\set{\begingroup\catcode` =10
+  \catcode`\-=12 \catcode`\_=12 % Allow - and _ in VAR.
+  \parsearg\setxxx}
+\def\setxxx#1{\setyyy#1 \endsetyyy}
+\def\setyyy#1 #2\endsetyyy{%
+  \def\temp{#2}%
+  \ifx\temp\empty \global\expandafter\let\csname SET#1\endcsname = \empty
+  \else \setzzz{#1}#2\endsetzzz % Remove the trailing space \setxxx inserted.
+  \fi
+  \endgroup
+}
+% Can't use \xdef to pre-expand #2 and save some time, since \temp or
+% \next or other control sequences that we've defined might get us into
+% an infinite loop. Consider `@set foo @cite{bar}'.
+\def\setzzz#1#2 \endsetzzz{\expandafter\gdef\csname SET#1\endcsname{#2}}
+
+% @clear VAR clears (i.e., unsets) the variable VAR.
+%
+\def\clear{\parsearg\clearxxx}
+\def\clearxxx#1{\global\expandafter\let\csname SET#1\endcsname=\relax}
+
+% @value{foo} gets the text saved in variable foo.
+%
+{
+  \catcode`\_ = \active
+  %
+  % We might end up with active _ or - characters in the argument if
+  % we're called from @code, as @code{@value{foo-bar_}}.  So \let any
+  % such active characters to their normal equivalents.
+  \gdef\value{\begingroup
+    \catcode`\-=12 \catcode`\_=12
+    \indexbreaks \let_\normalunderscore
+    \valuexxx}
+}
+\def\valuexxx#1{\expandablevalue{#1}\endgroup}
+
+% We have this subroutine so that we can handle at least some @value's
+% properly in indexes (we \let\value to this in \indexdummies).  Ones
+% whose names contain - or _ still won't work, but we can't do anything
+% about that.  The command has to be fully expandable, since the result
+% winds up in the index file.  This means that if the variable's value
+% contains other Texinfo commands, it's almost certain it will fail
+% (although perhaps we could fix that with sufficient work to do a
+% one-level expansion on the result, instead of complete).
+% 
+\def\expandablevalue#1{%
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax
+    {[No value for ``#1'']}%
+  \else
+    \csname SET#1\endcsname
+  \fi
+}
+
+% @ifset VAR ... @end ifset reads the `...' iff VAR has been defined
+% with @set.
+%
+\def\ifset{\parsearg\ifsetxxx}
+\def\ifsetxxx #1{%
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax
+    \expandafter\ifsetfail
+  \else
+    \expandafter\ifsetsucceed
+  \fi
+}
+\def\ifsetsucceed{\conditionalsucceed{ifset}}
+\def\ifsetfail{\nestedignore{ifset}}
+\defineunmatchedend{ifset}
+
+% @ifclear VAR ... @end ifclear reads the `...' iff VAR has never been
+% defined with @set, or has been undefined with @clear.
+%
+\def\ifclear{\parsearg\ifclearxxx}
+\def\ifclearxxx #1{%
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax
+    \expandafter\ifclearsucceed
+  \else
+    \expandafter\ifclearfail
+  \fi
+}
+\def\ifclearsucceed{\conditionalsucceed{ifclear}}
+\def\ifclearfail{\nestedignore{ifclear}}
+\defineunmatchedend{ifclear}
+
+% @iftex, @ifnothtml, @ifnotinfo always succeed; we read the text
+% following, through the first @end iftex (etc.).  Make `@end iftex'
+% (etc.) valid only after an @iftex.
+%
+\def\iftex{\conditionalsucceed{iftex}}
+\def\ifnothtml{\conditionalsucceed{ifnothtml}}
+\def\ifnotinfo{\conditionalsucceed{ifnotinfo}}
+\defineunmatchedend{iftex}
+\defineunmatchedend{ifnothtml}
+\defineunmatchedend{ifnotinfo}
+
+% We can't just want to start a group at @iftex (for example) and end it
+% at @end iftex, since then @set commands inside the conditional have no
+% effect (they'd get reverted at the end of the group).  So we must
+% define \Eiftex to redefine itself to be its previous value.  (We can't
+% just define it to fail again with an ``unmatched end'' error, since
+% the @ifset might be nested.)
+%
+\def\conditionalsucceed#1{%
+  \edef\temp{%
+    % Remember the current value of \E#1.
+    \let\nece{prevE#1} = \nece{E#1}%
+    %
+    % At the `@end #1', redefine \E#1 to be its previous value.
+    \def\nece{E#1}{\let\nece{E#1} = \nece{prevE#1}}%
+  }%
+  \temp
+}
+
+% We need to expand lots of \csname's, but we don't want to expand the
+% control sequences after we've constructed them.
+%
+\def\nece#1{\expandafter\noexpand\csname#1\endcsname}
+
+% @asis just yields its argument.  Used with @table, for example.
+%
+\def\asis#1{#1}
+
+% @math means output in math mode.
+% We don't use $'s directly in the definition of \math because control
+% sequences like \math are expanded when the toc file is written.  Then,
+% we read the toc file back, the $'s will be normal characters (as they
+% should be, according to the definition of Texinfo).  So we must use a
+% control sequence to switch into and out of math mode.
+%
+% This isn't quite enough for @math to work properly in indices, but it
+% seems unlikely it will ever be needed there.
+%
+\let\implicitmath = $
+\def\math#1{\implicitmath #1\implicitmath}
+
+% @bullet and @minus need the same treatment as @math, just above.
+\def\bullet{\implicitmath\ptexbullet\implicitmath}
+\def\minus{\implicitmath-\implicitmath}
+
+% @refill is a no-op.
+\let\refill=\relax
+
+% If working on a large document in chapters, it is convenient to
+% be able to disable indexing, cross-referencing, and contents, for test runs.
+% This is done with @novalidate (before @setfilename).
+%
+\newif\iflinks \linkstrue % by default we want the aux files.
+\let\novalidate = \linksfalse
+
+% @setfilename is done at the beginning of every texinfo file.
+% So open here the files we need to have open while reading the input.
+% This makes it possible to make a .fmt file for texinfo.
+\def\setfilename{%
+   \iflinks 
+     \readauxfile
+   \fi % \openindices needs to do some work in any case.
+   \openindices
+   \fixbackslash  % Turn off hack to swallow `\input texinfo'.
+   \global\let\setfilename=\comment % Ignore extra @setfilename cmds.
+   %
+   % If texinfo.cnf is present on the system, read it.
+   % Useful for site-wide @afourpaper, etc.
+   % Just to be on the safe side, close the input stream before the \input.
+   \openin 1 texinfo.cnf
+   \ifeof1 \let\temp=\relax \else \def\temp{\input texinfo.cnf }\fi
+   \closein1
+   \temp
+   %
+   \comment % Ignore the actual filename.
+}
+
+% Called from \setfilename.
+% 
+\def\openindices{%
+  \newindex{cp}%
+  \newcodeindex{fn}%
+  \newcodeindex{vr}%
+  \newcodeindex{tp}%
+  \newcodeindex{ky}%
+  \newcodeindex{pg}%
+}
+
+% @bye.
+\outer\def\bye{\pagealignmacro\tracingstats=1\ptexend}
+
+
+\message{fonts,}
+% Font-change commands.
+
+% Texinfo sort of supports the sans serif font style, which plain TeX does not.
+% So we set up a \sf analogous to plain's \rm, etc.
+\newfam\sffam
+\def\sf{\fam=\sffam \tensf}
+\let\li = \sf % Sometimes we call it \li, not \sf.
+
+% We don't need math for this one.
+\def\ttsl{\tenttsl}
+
+% Use Computer Modern fonts at \magstephalf (11pt).
+\newcount\mainmagstep
+\mainmagstep=\magstephalf
+
+% Set the font macro #1 to the font named #2, adding on the
+% specified font prefix (normally `cm').
+% #3 is the font's design size, #4 is a scale factor
+\def\setfont#1#2#3#4{\font#1=\fontprefix#2#3 scaled #4}
+
+% Use cm as the default font prefix.
+% To specify the font prefix, you must define \fontprefix
+% before you read in texinfo.tex.
+\ifx\fontprefix\undefined
+\def\fontprefix{cm}
+\fi
+% Support font families that don't use the same naming scheme as CM.
+\def\rmshape{r}
+\def\rmbshape{bx}               %where the normal face is bold
+\def\bfshape{b}
+\def\bxshape{bx}
+\def\ttshape{tt}
+\def\ttbshape{tt}
+\def\ttslshape{sltt}
+\def\itshape{ti}
+\def\itbshape{bxti}
+\def\slshape{sl}
+\def\slbshape{bxsl}
+\def\sfshape{ss}
+\def\sfbshape{ss}
+\def\scshape{csc}
+\def\scbshape{csc}
+
+\ifx\bigger\relax
+\let\mainmagstep=\magstep1
+\setfont\textrm\rmshape{12}{1000}
+\setfont\texttt\ttshape{12}{1000}
+\else
+\setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
+\setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
+\fi
+% Instead of cmb10, you many want to use cmbx10.
+% cmbx10 is a prettier font on its own, but cmb10
+% looks better when embedded in a line with cmr10.
+\setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
+\setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
+\setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
+\setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
+\setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
+\setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
+\font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep
+\font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep
+
+% A few fonts for @defun, etc.
+\setfont\defbf\bxshape{10}{\magstep1} %was 1314
+\setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstep1}
+\def\df{\let\tentt=\deftt \let\tenbf = \defbf \bf}
+
+% Fonts for indices and small examples (9pt).
+% We actually use the slanted font rather than the italic,
+% because texinfo normally uses the slanted fonts for that.
+% Do not make many font distinctions in general in the index, since they
+% aren't very useful.
+\setfont\ninett\ttshape{9}{1000}
+\setfont\ninettsl\ttslshape{10}{900}
+\setfont\indrm\rmshape{9}{1000}
+\setfont\indit\itshape{9}{1000}
+\setfont\indsl\slshape{9}{1000}
+\let\indtt=\ninett
+\let\indttsl=\ninettsl
+\let\indsf=\indrm
+\let\indbf=\indrm
+\setfont\indsc\scshape{10}{900}
+\font\indi=cmmi9
+\font\indsy=cmsy9
+
+% Fonts for title page:
+\setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3}
+\setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4}
+\setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4}
+\setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3}
+\setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4}
+\setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1}
+\let\titlebf=\titlerm
+\setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4}
+\font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3
+\font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4
+\def\authorrm{\secrm}
+
+% Chapter (and unnumbered) fonts (17.28pt).
+\setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep2}
+\setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep3}
+\setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep3}
+\setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep2}
+\setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep3}
+\setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{17}{1000}
+\let\chapbf=\chaprm
+\setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep3}
+\font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep2
+\font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep3
+
+% Section fonts (14.4pt).
+\setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1}
+\setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2}
+\setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2}
+\setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1}
+\setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2}
+\setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1}
+\let\secbf\secrm
+\setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2}
+\font\seci=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1
+\font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2
+
+% \setfont\ssecrm\bxshape{10}{\magstep1}    % This size an font looked bad.
+% \setfont\ssecit\itshape{10}{\magstep1}    % The letters were too crowded.
+% \setfont\ssecsl\slshape{10}{\magstep1}
+% \setfont\ssectt\ttshape{10}{\magstep1}
+% \setfont\ssecsf\sfshape{10}{\magstep1}
+
+%\setfont\ssecrm\bfshape{10}{1315}      % Note the use of cmb rather than cmbx.
+%\setfont\ssecit\itshape{10}{1315}      % Also, the size is a little larger than
+%\setfont\ssecsl\slshape{10}{1315}      % being scaled magstep1.
+%\setfont\ssectt\ttshape{10}{1315}
+%\setfont\ssecsf\sfshape{10}{1315}
+
+%\let\ssecbf=\ssecrm
+
+% Subsection fonts (13.15pt).
+\setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstephalf}
+\setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1315}
+\setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1315}
+\setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstephalf}
+\setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1315}
+\setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstephalf}
+\let\ssecbf\ssecrm
+\setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep1}
+\font\sseci=cmmi12 scaled \magstephalf
+\font\ssecsy=cmsy10 scaled 1315
+% The smallcaps and symbol fonts should actually be scaled \magstep1.5,
+% but that is not a standard magnification.
+
+% In order for the font changes to affect most math symbols and letters,
+% we have to define the \textfont of the standard families.  Since
+% texinfo doesn't allow for producing subscripts and superscripts, we
+% don't bother to reset \scriptfont and \scriptscriptfont (which would
+% also require loading a lot more fonts).
+%
+\def\resetmathfonts{%
+  \textfont0 = \tenrm \textfont1 = \teni \textfont2 = \tensy
+  \textfont\itfam = \tenit \textfont\slfam = \tensl \textfont\bffam = \tenbf
+  \textfont\ttfam = \tentt \textfont\sffam = \tensf
+}
+
+
+% The font-changing commands redefine the meanings of \tenSTYLE, instead
+% of just \STYLE.  We do this so that font changes will continue to work
+% in math mode, where it is the current \fam that is relevant in most
+% cases, not the current font.  Plain TeX does \def\bf{\fam=\bffam
+% \tenbf}, for example.  By redefining \tenbf, we obviate the need to
+% redefine \bf itself.
+\def\textfonts{%
+  \let\tenrm=\textrm \let\tenit=\textit \let\tensl=\textsl
+  \let\tenbf=\textbf \let\tentt=\texttt \let\smallcaps=\textsc
+  \let\tensf=\textsf \let\teni=\texti \let\tensy=\textsy \let\tenttsl=\textttsl
+  \resetmathfonts}
+\def\titlefonts{%
+  \let\tenrm=\titlerm \let\tenit=\titleit \let\tensl=\titlesl
+  \let\tenbf=\titlebf \let\tentt=\titlett \let\smallcaps=\titlesc
+  \let\tensf=\titlesf \let\teni=\titlei \let\tensy=\titlesy
+  \let\tenttsl=\titlettsl
+  \resetmathfonts \setleading{25pt}}
+\def\titlefont#1{{\titlefonts\rm #1}}
+\def\chapfonts{%
+  \let\tenrm=\chaprm \let\tenit=\chapit \let\tensl=\chapsl
+  \let\tenbf=\chapbf \let\tentt=\chaptt \let\smallcaps=\chapsc
+  \let\tensf=\chapsf \let\teni=\chapi \let\tensy=\chapsy \let\tenttsl=\chapttsl
+  \resetmathfonts \setleading{19pt}}
+\def\secfonts{%
+  \let\tenrm=\secrm \let\tenit=\secit \let\tensl=\secsl
+  \let\tenbf=\secbf \let\tentt=\sectt \let\smallcaps=\secsc
+  \let\tensf=\secsf \let\teni=\seci \let\tensy=\secsy \let\tenttsl=\secttsl
+  \resetmathfonts \setleading{16pt}}
+\def\subsecfonts{%
+  \let\tenrm=\ssecrm \let\tenit=\ssecit \let\tensl=\ssecsl
+  \let\tenbf=\ssecbf \let\tentt=\ssectt \let\smallcaps=\ssecsc
+  \let\tensf=\ssecsf \let\teni=\sseci \let\tensy=\ssecsy \let\tenttsl=\ssecttsl
+  \resetmathfonts \setleading{15pt}}
+\let\subsubsecfonts = \subsecfonts % Maybe make sssec fonts scaled magstephalf?
+\def\indexfonts{%
+  \let\tenrm=\indrm \let\tenit=\indit \let\tensl=\indsl
+  \let\tenbf=\indbf \let\tentt=\indtt \let\smallcaps=\indsc
+  \let\tensf=\indsf \let\teni=\indi \let\tensy=\indsy \let\tenttsl=\indttsl
+  \resetmathfonts \setleading{12pt}}
+
+% Set up the default fonts, so we can use them for creating boxes.
+%
+\textfonts
+
+% Define these so they can be easily changed for other fonts.
+\def\angleleft{$\langle$}
+\def\angleright{$\rangle$}
+
+% Count depth in font-changes, for error checks
+\newcount\fontdepth \fontdepth=0
+
+% Fonts for short table of contents.
+\setfont\shortcontrm\rmshape{12}{1000}
+\setfont\shortcontbf\bxshape{12}{1000}
+\setfont\shortcontsl\slshape{12}{1000}
+
+%% Add scribe-like font environments, plus @l for inline lisp (usually sans
+%% serif) and @ii for TeX italic
+
+% \smartitalic{ARG} outputs arg in italics, followed by an italic correction
+% unless the following character is such as not to need one.
+\def\smartitalicx{\ifx\next,\else\ifx\next-\else\ifx\next.\else\/\fi\fi\fi}
+\def\smartslanted#1{{\sl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx}
+\def\smartitalic#1{{\it #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx}
+
+\let\i=\smartitalic
+\let\var=\smartslanted
+\let\dfn=\smartslanted
+\let\emph=\smartitalic
+\let\cite=\smartslanted
+
+\def\b#1{{\bf #1}}
+\let\strong=\b
+
+% We can't just use \exhyphenpenalty, because that only has effect at
+% the end of a paragraph.  Restore normal hyphenation at the end of the
+% group within which \nohyphenation is presumably called.
+%
+\def\nohyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = -1  \aftergroup\restorehyphenation}
+\def\restorehyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = `- }
+
+\def\t#1{%
+  {\tt \rawbackslash \frenchspacing #1}%
+  \null
+}
+\let\ttfont=\t
+\def\samp#1{`\tclose{#1}'\null}
+\setfont\smallrm\rmshape{8}{1000}
+\font\smallsy=cmsy9
+\def\key#1{{\smallrm\textfont2=\smallsy \leavevmode\hbox{%
+  \raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleleft}\kern-.08em\vtop{%
+    \vbox{\hrule\kern-0.4pt
+     \hbox{\raise0.4pt\hbox{\vphantom{\angleleft}}#1}}%
+    \kern-0.4pt\hrule}%
+  \kern-.06em\raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleright}}}}
+% The old definition, with no lozenge:
+%\def\key #1{{\ttsl \nohyphenation \uppercase{#1}}\null}
+\def\ctrl #1{{\tt \rawbackslash \hat}#1}
+
+% @file, @option are the same as @samp.
+\let\file=\samp
+\let\option=\samp
+
+% @code is a modification of @t,
+% which makes spaces the same size as normal in the surrounding text.
+\def\tclose#1{%
+  {%
+    % Change normal interword space to be same as for the current font.
+    \spaceskip = \fontdimen2\font
+    %
+    % Switch to typewriter.
+    \tt
+    %
+    % But `\ ' produces the large typewriter interword space.
+    \def\ {{\spaceskip = 0pt{} }}%
+    %
+    % Turn off hyphenation.
+    \nohyphenation
+    %
+    \rawbackslash
+    \frenchspacing
+    #1%
+  }%
+  \null
+}
+
+% We *must* turn on hyphenation at `-' and `_' in \code.
+% Otherwise, it is too hard to avoid overfull hboxes
+% in the Emacs manual, the Library manual, etc.
+
+% Unfortunately, TeX uses one parameter (\hyphenchar) to control
+% both hyphenation at - and hyphenation within words.
+% We must therefore turn them both off (\tclose does that)
+% and arrange explicitly to hyphenate at a dash.
+%  -- rms.
+{
+  \catcode`\-=\active
+  \catcode`\_=\active
+  %
+  \global\def\code{\begingroup
+    \catcode`\-=\active \let-\codedash
+    \catcode`\_=\active \let_\codeunder
+    \codex
+  }
+  %
+  % If we end up with any active - characters when handling the index,
+  % just treat them as a normal -.
+  \global\def\indexbreaks{\catcode`\-=\active \let-\realdash}
+}
+
+\def\realdash{-}
+\def\codedash{-\discretionary{}{}{}}
+\def\codeunder{\ifusingtt{\normalunderscore\discretionary{}{}{}}{\_}}
+\def\codex #1{\tclose{#1}\endgroup}
+
+%\let\exp=\tclose  %Was temporary
+
+% @kbd is like @code, except that if the argument is just one @key command,
+% then @kbd has no effect.
+
+% @kbdinputstyle -- arg is `distinct' (@kbd uses slanted tty font always),
+%   `example' (@kbd uses ttsl only inside of @example and friends),
+%   or `code' (@kbd uses normal tty font always).
+\def\kbdinputstyle{\parsearg\kbdinputstylexxx}
+\def\kbdinputstylexxx#1{%
+  \def\arg{#1}%
+  \ifx\arg\worddistinct
+    \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\ttsl}%
+  \else\ifx\arg\wordexample
+    \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}%
+  \else\ifx\arg\wordcode
+    \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\tt}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}%
+  \fi\fi\fi
+}
+\def\worddistinct{distinct}
+\def\wordexample{example}
+\def\wordcode{code}
+
+% Default is kbdinputdistinct.  (Too much of a hassle to call the macro,
+% the catcodes are wrong for parsearg to work.)
+\gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\ttsl}
+
+\def\xkey{\key}
+\def\kbdfoo#1#2#3\par{\def\one{#1}\def\three{#3}\def\threex{??}%
+\ifx\one\xkey\ifx\threex\three \key{#2}%
+\else{\tclose{\kbdfont\look}}\fi
+\else{\tclose{\kbdfont\look}}\fi}
+
+% For @url, @env, @command quotes seem unnecessary, so use \code.
+\let\url=\code
+\let\env=\code
+\let\command=\code
+
+% @uref (abbreviation for `urlref') takes an optional second argument
+% specifying the text to display.  First (mandatory) arg is the url.
+% Perhaps eventually put in a hypertex \special here.
+% 
+\def\uref#1{\urefxxx #1,,\finish}
+\def\urefxxx#1,#2,#3\finish{%
+  \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
+  \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
+    \unhbox0\ (\code{#1})%
+  \else
+    \code{#1}%
+  \fi
+}
+
+% rms does not like the angle brackets --karl, 17may97.
+% So now @email is just like @uref.
+%\def\email#1{\angleleft{\tt #1}\angleright}
+\let\email=\uref
+
+% Check if we are currently using a typewriter font.  Since all the
+% Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero interword stretch (and
+% shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all typewriter fonts to have
+% this property, we can check that font parameter.
+%
+\def\ifmonospace{\ifdim\fontdimen3\font=0pt }
+
+% Typeset a dimension, e.g., `in' or `pt'.  The only reason for the
+% argument is to make the input look right: @dmn{pt} instead of @dmn{}pt.
+%
+\def\dmn#1{\thinspace #1}
+
+\def\kbd#1{\def\look{#1}\expandafter\kbdfoo\look??\par}
+
+% @l was never documented to mean ``switch to the Lisp font'',
+% and it is not used as such in any manual I can find.  We need it for
+% Polish suppressed-l.  --karl, 22sep96.
+%\def\l#1{{\li #1}\null}
+
+% Explicit font changes: @r, @sc, undocumented @ii.
+\def\r#1{{\rm #1}}              % roman font
+\def\sc#1{{\smallcaps#1}}       % smallcaps font
+\def\ii#1{{\it #1}}             % italic font
+
+% @acronym downcases the argument and prints in smallcaps.
+\def\acronym#1{{\smallcaps \lowercase{#1}}}
+
+% @pounds{} is a sterling sign.
+\def\pounds{{\it\$}}
+
+
+\message{page headings,}
+
+\newskip\titlepagetopglue \titlepagetopglue = 1.5in
+\newskip\titlepagebottomglue \titlepagebottomglue = 2pc
+
+% First the title page.  Must do @settitle before @titlepage.
+\newif\ifseenauthor
+\newif\iffinishedtitlepage
+
+% Do an implicit @contents or @shortcontents after @end titlepage if the
+% user says @contentsaftertitlepage or @shortcontentsaftertitlepage.
+% 
+\newif\ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage
+ \let\setcontentsaftertitlepage = \setcontentsaftertitlepagetrue
+\newif\ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage
+ \let\setshortcontentsaftertitlepage = \setshortcontentsaftertitlepagetrue
+
+\def\shorttitlepage{\parsearg\shorttitlepagezzz}
+\def\shorttitlepagezzz #1{\begingroup\hbox{}\vskip 1.5in \chaprm \centerline{#1}%
+        \endgroup\page\hbox{}\page}
+
+\def\titlepage{\begingroup \parindent=0pt \textfonts
+   \let\subtitlerm=\tenrm
+   \def\subtitlefont{\subtitlerm \normalbaselineskip = 13pt \normalbaselines}%
+   %
+   \def\authorfont{\authorrm \normalbaselineskip = 16pt \normalbaselines}%
+   %
+   % Leave some space at the very top of the page.
+   \vglue\titlepagetopglue
+   %
+   % Now you can print the title using @title.
+   \def\title{\parsearg\titlezzz}%
+   \def\titlezzz##1{\leftline{\titlefonts\rm ##1}
+                    % print a rule at the page bottom also.
+                    \finishedtitlepagefalse
+                    \vskip4pt \hrule height 4pt width \hsize \vskip4pt}%
+   % No rule at page bottom unless we print one at the top with @title.
+   \finishedtitlepagetrue
+   %
+   % Now you can put text using @subtitle.
+   \def\subtitle{\parsearg\subtitlezzz}%
+   \def\subtitlezzz##1{{\subtitlefont \rightline{##1}}}%
+   %
+   % @author should come last, but may come many times.
+   \def\author{\parsearg\authorzzz}%
+   \def\authorzzz##1{\ifseenauthor\else\vskip 0pt plus 1filll\seenauthortrue\fi
+      {\authorfont \leftline{##1}}}%
+   %
+   % Most title ``pages'' are actually two pages long, with space
+   % at the top of the second.  We don't want the ragged left on the second.
+   \let\oldpage = \page
+   \def\page{%
+      \iffinishedtitlepage\else
+         \finishtitlepage
+      \fi
+      \oldpage
+      \let\page = \oldpage
+      \hbox{}}%
+%   \def\page{\oldpage \hbox{}}
+}
+
+\def\Etitlepage{%
+   \iffinishedtitlepage\else
+      \finishtitlepage
+   \fi
+   % It is important to do the page break before ending the group,
+   % because the headline and footline are only empty inside the group.
+   % If we use the new definition of \page, we always get a blank page
+   % after the title page, which we certainly don't want.
+   \oldpage
+   \endgroup
+   %
+   % If they want short, they certainly want long too.
+   \ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage
+     \shortcontents
+     \contents
+     \global\let\shortcontents = \relax
+     \global\let\contents = \relax
+   \fi
+   %
+   \ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage
+     \contents
+     \global\let\contents = \relax
+     \global\let\shortcontents = \relax
+   \fi
+   %
+   \HEADINGSon
+}
+
+\def\finishtitlepage{%
+   \vskip4pt \hrule height 2pt width \hsize
+   \vskip\titlepagebottomglue
+   \finishedtitlepagetrue
+}
+
+%%% Set up page headings and footings.
+
+\let\thispage=\folio
+
+\newtoks\evenheadline    % headline on even pages
+\newtoks\oddheadline     % headline on odd pages
+\newtoks\evenfootline    % footline on even pages
+\newtoks\oddfootline     % footline on odd pages
+
+% Now make Tex use those variables
+\headline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddheadline
+                            \else \the\evenheadline \fi}}
+\footline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddfootline
+                            \else \the\evenfootline \fi}\HEADINGShook}
+\let\HEADINGShook=\relax
+
+% Commands to set those variables.
+% For example, this is what  @headings on  does
+% @evenheading @thistitle|@thispage|@thischapter
+% @oddheading @thischapter|@thispage|@thistitle
+% @evenfooting @thisfile||
+% @oddfooting ||@thisfile
+
+\def\evenheading{\parsearg\evenheadingxxx}
+\def\oddheading{\parsearg\oddheadingxxx}
+\def\everyheading{\parsearg\everyheadingxxx}
+
+\def\evenfooting{\parsearg\evenfootingxxx}
+\def\oddfooting{\parsearg\oddfootingxxx}
+\def\everyfooting{\parsearg\everyfootingxxx}
+
+{\catcode`\@=0 %
+
+\gdef\evenheadingxxx #1{\evenheadingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish}
+\gdef\evenheadingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{%
+\global\evenheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
+
+\gdef\oddheadingxxx #1{\oddheadingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish}
+\gdef\oddheadingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{%
+\global\oddheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
+
+\gdef\everyheadingxxx#1{\oddheadingxxx{#1}\evenheadingxxx{#1}}%
+
+\gdef\evenfootingxxx #1{\evenfootingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish}
+\gdef\evenfootingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{%
+\global\evenfootline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
+
+\gdef\oddfootingxxx #1{\oddfootingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish}
+\gdef\oddfootingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{%
+  \global\oddfootline = {\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}%
+  %
+  % Leave some space for the footline.  Hopefully ok to assume
+  % @evenfooting will not be used by itself.
+  \global\advance\pageheight by -\baselineskip
+  \global\advance\vsize by -\baselineskip
+}
+
+\gdef\everyfootingxxx#1{\oddfootingxxx{#1}\evenfootingxxx{#1}}
+%
+}% unbind the catcode of @.
+
+% @headings double      turns headings on for double-sided printing.
+% @headings single      turns headings on for single-sided printing.
+% @headings off         turns them off.
+% @headings on          same as @headings double, retained for compatibility.
+% @headings after       turns on double-sided headings after this page.
+% @headings doubleafter turns on double-sided headings after this page.
+% @headings singleafter turns on single-sided headings after this page.
+% By default, they are off at the start of a document,
+% and turned `on' after @end titlepage.
+
+\def\headings #1 {\csname HEADINGS#1\endcsname}
+
+\def\HEADINGSoff{
+\global\evenheadline={\hfil} \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
+\global\oddheadline={\hfil} \global\oddfootline={\hfil}}
+\HEADINGSoff
+% When we turn headings on, set the page number to 1.
+% For double-sided printing, put current file name in lower left corner,
+% chapter name on inside top of right hand pages, document
+% title on inside top of left hand pages, and page numbers on outside top
+% edge of all pages.
+\def\HEADINGSdouble{
+\global\pageno=1
+\global\evenfootline={\hfil}
+\global\oddfootline={\hfil}
+\global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}}
+\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
+\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
+}
+\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
+
+% For single-sided printing, chapter title goes across top left of page,
+% page number on top right.
+\def\HEADINGSsingle{
+\global\pageno=1
+\global\evenfootline={\hfil}
+\global\oddfootline={\hfil}
+\global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
+\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
+\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
+}
+\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}
+
+\def\HEADINGSafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSdoublex}
+\let\HEADINGSdoubleafter=\HEADINGSafter
+\def\HEADINGSdoublex{%
+\global\evenfootline={\hfil}
+\global\oddfootline={\hfil}
+\global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}}
+\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
+\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
+}
+
+\def\HEADINGSsingleafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSsinglex}
+\def\HEADINGSsinglex{%
+\global\evenfootline={\hfil}
+\global\oddfootline={\hfil}
+\global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
+\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
+\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
+}
+
+% Subroutines used in generating headings
+% Produces Day Month Year style of output.
+\def\today{\number\day\space
+\ifcase\month\or
+January\or February\or March\or April\or May\or June\or
+July\or August\or September\or October\or November\or December\fi
+\space\number\year}
+
+% Use this if you want the Month Day, Year style of output.
+%\def\today{\ifcase\month\or
+%January\or February\or March\or April\or May\or June\or
+%July\or August\or September\or October\or November\or December\fi
+%\space\number\day, \number\year}
+
+% @settitle line...  specifies the title of the document, for headings
+% It generates no output of its own
+
+\def\thistitle{No Title}
+\def\settitle{\parsearg\settitlezzz}
+\def\settitlezzz #1{\gdef\thistitle{#1}}
+
+
+\message{tables,}
+% Tables -- @table, @ftable, @vtable, @item(x), @kitem(x), @xitem(x).
+
+% default indentation of table text
+\newdimen\tableindent \tableindent=.8in
+% default indentation of @itemize and @enumerate text
+\newdimen\itemindent  \itemindent=.3in
+% margin between end of table item and start of table text.
+\newdimen\itemmargin  \itemmargin=.1in
+
+% used internally for \itemindent minus \itemmargin
+\newdimen\itemmax
+
+% Note @table, @vtable, and @vtable define @item, @itemx, etc., with
+% these defs.
+% They also define \itemindex
+% to index the item name in whatever manner is desired (perhaps none).
+
+\newif\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip
+
+\def\itemxpar{\par\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip\nobreak\vskip-\parskip\nobreak\fi}
+
+\def\internalBitem{\smallbreak \parsearg\itemzzz}
+\def\internalBitemx{\itemxpar \parsearg\itemzzz}
+
+\def\internalBxitem "#1"{\def\xitemsubtopix{#1} \smallbreak \parsearg\xitemzzz}
+\def\internalBxitemx "#1"{\def\xitemsubtopix{#1} \itemxpar \parsearg\xitemzzz}
+
+\def\internalBkitem{\smallbreak \parsearg\kitemzzz}
+\def\internalBkitemx{\itemxpar \parsearg\kitemzzz}
+
+\def\kitemzzz #1{\dosubind {kw}{\code{#1}}{for {\bf \lastfunction}}%
+                 \itemzzz {#1}}
+
+\def\xitemzzz #1{\dosubind {kw}{\code{#1}}{for {\bf \xitemsubtopic}}%
+                 \itemzzz {#1}}
+
+\def\itemzzz #1{\begingroup %
+  \advance\hsize by -\rightskip
+  \advance\hsize by -\tableindent
+  \setbox0=\hbox{\itemfont{#1}}%
+  \itemindex{#1}%
+  \nobreak % This prevents a break before @itemx.
+  %
+  % If the item text does not fit in the space we have, put it on a line
+  % by itself, and do not allow a page break either before or after that
+  % line.  We do not start a paragraph here because then if the next
+  % command is, e.g., @kindex, the whatsit would get put into the
+  % horizontal list on a line by itself, resulting in extra blank space.
+  \ifdim \wd0>\itemmax
+    %
+    % Make this a paragraph so we get the \parskip glue and wrapping,
+    % but leave it ragged-right.
+    \begingroup
+      \advance\leftskip by-\tableindent
+      \advance\hsize by\tableindent
+      \advance\rightskip by0pt plus1fil
+      \leavevmode\unhbox0\par
+    \endgroup
+    %
+    % We're going to be starting a paragraph, but we don't want the
+    % \parskip glue -- logically it's part of the @item we just started.
+    \nobreak \vskip-\parskip
+    %
+    % Stop a page break at the \parskip glue coming up.  Unfortunately
+    % we can't prevent a possible page break at the following
+    % \baselineskip glue.
+    \nobreak
+    \endgroup
+    \itemxneedsnegativevskipfalse
+  \else
+    % The item text fits into the space.  Start a paragraph, so that the
+    % following text (if any) will end up on the same line.  
+    \noindent
+    % Do this with kerns and \unhbox so that if there is a footnote in
+    % the item text, it can migrate to the main vertical list and
+    % eventually be printed.
+    \nobreak\kern-\tableindent
+    \dimen0 = \itemmax  \advance\dimen0 by \itemmargin \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0
+    \unhbox0
+    \nobreak\kern\dimen0
+    \endgroup
+    \itemxneedsnegativevskiptrue
+  \fi
+}
+
+\def\item{\errmessage{@item while not in a table}}
+\def\itemx{\errmessage{@itemx while not in a table}}
+\def\kitem{\errmessage{@kitem while not in a table}}
+\def\kitemx{\errmessage{@kitemx while not in a table}}
+\def\xitem{\errmessage{@xitem while not in a table}}
+\def\xitemx{\errmessage{@xitemx while not in a table}}
+
+% Contains a kludge to get @end[description] to work.
+\def\description{\tablez{\dontindex}{1}{}{}{}{}}
+
+% @table, @ftable, @vtable.
+\def\table{\begingroup\inENV\obeylines\obeyspaces\tablex}
+{\obeylines\obeyspaces%
+\gdef\tablex #1^^M{%
+\tabley\dontindex#1        \endtabley}}
+
+\def\ftable{\begingroup\inENV\obeylines\obeyspaces\ftablex}
+{\obeylines\obeyspaces%
+\gdef\ftablex #1^^M{%
+\tabley\fnitemindex#1        \endtabley
+\def\Eftable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak\endgroup}%
+\let\Etable=\relax}}
+
+\def\vtable{\begingroup\inENV\obeylines\obeyspaces\vtablex}
+{\obeylines\obeyspaces%
+\gdef\vtablex #1^^M{%
+\tabley\vritemindex#1        \endtabley
+\def\Evtable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak\endgroup}%
+\let\Etable=\relax}}
+
+\def\dontindex #1{}
+\def\fnitemindex #1{\doind {fn}{\code{#1}}}%
+\def\vritemindex #1{\doind {vr}{\code{#1}}}%
+
+{\obeyspaces %
+\gdef\tabley#1#2 #3 #4 #5 #6 #7\endtabley{\endgroup%
+\tablez{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}{#6}}}
+
+\def\tablez #1#2#3#4#5#6{%
+\aboveenvbreak %
+\begingroup %
+\def\Edescription{\Etable}% Necessary kludge.
+\let\itemindex=#1%
+\ifnum 0#3>0 \advance \leftskip by #3\mil \fi %
+\ifnum 0#4>0 \tableindent=#4\mil \fi %
+\ifnum 0#5>0 \advance \rightskip by #5\mil \fi %
+\def\itemfont{#2}%
+\itemmax=\tableindent %
+\advance \itemmax by -\itemmargin %
+\advance \leftskip by \tableindent %
+\exdentamount=\tableindent
+\parindent = 0pt
+\parskip = \smallskipamount
+\ifdim \parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi%
+\def\Etable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak\endgroup}%
+\let\item = \internalBitem %
+\let\itemx = \internalBitemx %
+\let\kitem = \internalBkitem %
+\let\kitemx = \internalBkitemx %
+\let\xitem = \internalBxitem %
+\let\xitemx = \internalBxitemx %
+}
+
+% This is the counter used by @enumerate, which is really @itemize
+
+\newcount \itemno
+
+\def\itemize{\parsearg\itemizezzz}
+
+\def\itemizezzz #1{%
+  \begingroup % ended by the @end itemize
+  \itemizey {#1}{\Eitemize}
+}
+
+\def\itemizey #1#2{%
+\aboveenvbreak %
+\itemmax=\itemindent %
+\advance \itemmax by -\itemmargin %
+\advance \leftskip by \itemindent %
+\exdentamount=\itemindent
+\parindent = 0pt %
+\parskip = \smallskipamount %
+\ifdim \parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi%
+\def#2{\endgraf\afterenvbreak\endgroup}%
+\def\itemcontents{#1}%
+\let\item=\itemizeitem}
+
+% Set sfcode to normal for the chars that usually have another value.
+% These are `.?!:;,'
+\def\frenchspacing{\sfcode46=1000 \sfcode63=1000 \sfcode33=1000
+  \sfcode58=1000 \sfcode59=1000 \sfcode44=1000 }
+
+% \splitoff TOKENS\endmark defines \first to be the first token in
+% TOKENS, and \rest to be the remainder.
+%
+\def\splitoff#1#2\endmark{\def\first{#1}\def\rest{#2}}%
+
+% Allow an optional argument of an uppercase letter, lowercase letter,
+% or number, to specify the first label in the enumerated list.  No
+% argument is the same as `1'.
+%
+\def\enumerate{\parsearg\enumeratezzz}
+\def\enumeratezzz #1{\enumeratey #1  \endenumeratey}
+\def\enumeratey #1 #2\endenumeratey{%
+  \begingroup % ended by the @end enumerate
+  %
+  % If we were given no argument, pretend we were given `1'.
+  \def\thearg{#1}%
+  \ifx\thearg\empty \def\thearg{1}\fi
+  %
+  % Detect if the argument is a single token.  If so, it might be a
+  % letter.  Otherwise, the only valid thing it can be is a number.
+  % (We will always have one token, because of the test we just made.
+  % This is a good thing, since \splitoff doesn't work given nothing at
+  % all -- the first parameter is undelimited.)
+  \expandafter\splitoff\thearg\endmark
+  \ifx\rest\empty
+    % Only one token in the argument.  It could still be anything.
+    % A ``lowercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is nonzero.
+    % An ``uppercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is both nonzero, and
+    %   not equal to itself.
+    % Otherwise, we assume it's a number.
+    %
+    % We need the \relax at the end of the \ifnum lines to stop TeX from
+    % continuing to look for a <number>.
+    %
+    \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=0\relax
+      \numericenumerate % a number (we hope)
+    \else
+      % It's a letter.
+      \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=\expandafter`\thearg\relax
+        \lowercaseenumerate % lowercase letter
+      \else
+        \uppercaseenumerate % uppercase letter
+      \fi
+    \fi
+  \else
+    % Multiple tokens in the argument.  We hope it's a number.
+    \numericenumerate
+  \fi
+}
+
+% An @enumerate whose labels are integers.  The starting integer is
+% given in \thearg.
+%
+\def\numericenumerate{%
+  \itemno = \thearg
+  \startenumeration{\the\itemno}%
+}
+
+% The starting (lowercase) letter is in \thearg.
+\def\lowercaseenumerate{%
+  \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg
+  \startenumeration{%
+    % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet.
+    \ifnum\itemno=0
+      \errmessage{No more lowercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger
+                  alphabet}%
+    \fi
+    \char\lccode\itemno
+  }%
+}
+
+% The starting (uppercase) letter is in \thearg.
+\def\uppercaseenumerate{%
+  \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg
+  \startenumeration{%
+    % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet.
+    \ifnum\itemno=0
+      \errmessage{No more uppercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger
+                  alphabet}
+    \fi
+    \char\uccode\itemno
+  }%
+}
+
+% Call itemizey, adding a period to the first argument and supplying the
+% common last two arguments.  Also subtract one from the initial value in
+% \itemno, since @item increments \itemno.
+%
+\def\startenumeration#1{%
+  \advance\itemno by -1
+  \itemizey{#1.}\Eenumerate\flushcr
+}
+
+% @alphaenumerate and @capsenumerate are abbreviations for giving an arg
+% to @enumerate.
+%
+\def\alphaenumerate{\enumerate{a}}
+\def\capsenumerate{\enumerate{A}}
+\def\Ealphaenumerate{\Eenumerate}
+\def\Ecapsenumerate{\Eenumerate}
+
+% Definition of @item while inside @itemize.
+
+\def\itemizeitem{%
+\advance\itemno by 1
+{\let\par=\endgraf \smallbreak}%
+\ifhmode \errmessage{In hmode at itemizeitem}\fi
+{\parskip=0in \hskip 0pt
+\hbox to 0pt{\hss \itemcontents\hskip \itemmargin}%
+\vadjust{\penalty 1200}}%
+\flushcr}
+
+% @multitable macros
+% Amy Hendrickson, 8/18/94, 3/6/96
+%
+% @multitable ... @end multitable will make as many columns as desired.
+% Contents of each column will wrap at width given in preamble.  Width
+% can be specified either with sample text given in a template line,
+% or in percent of \hsize, the current width of text on page.
+
+% Table can continue over pages but will only break between lines.
+
+% To make preamble:
+%
+% Either define widths of columns in terms of percent of \hsize:
+%   @multitable @columnfractions .25 .3 .45
+%   @item ...
+%
+%   Numbers following @columnfractions are the percent of the total
+%   current hsize to be used for each column. You may use as many
+%   columns as desired.
+
+
+% Or use a template:
+%   @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template}
+%   @item ...
+%   using the widest term desired in each column.
+%
+% For those who want to use more than one line's worth of words in
+% the preamble, break the line within one argument and it
+% will parse correctly, i.e.,
+%
+%     @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3
+%      template}
+% Not:
+%     @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template}
+%      {Column 3 template}
+
+% Each new table line starts with @item, each subsequent new column
+% starts with @tab. Empty columns may be produced by supplying @tab's
+% with nothing between them for as many times as empty columns are needed,
+% ie, @tab@tab@tab will produce two empty columns.
+
+% @item, @tab, @multitable or @end multitable do not need to be on their
+% own lines, but it will not hurt if they are.
+
+% Sample multitable:
+
+%   @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template}
+%   @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff @tab third col
+%   @item
+%   first col stuff
+%   @tab
+%   second col stuff
+%   @tab
+%   third col
+%   @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff
+%   @tab Many paragraphs of text may be used in any column.
+%
+%         They will wrap at the width determined by the template.
+%   @item@tab@tab This will be in third column.
+%   @end multitable
+
+% Default dimensions may be reset by user.
+% @multitableparskip is vertical space between paragraphs in table.
+% @multitableparindent is paragraph indent in table.
+% @multitablecolmargin is horizontal space to be left between columns.
+% @multitablelinespace is space to leave between table items, baseline
+%                                                            to baseline.
+%   0pt means it depends on current normal line spacing.
+%
+\newskip\multitableparskip
+\newskip\multitableparindent
+\newdimen\multitablecolspace
+\newskip\multitablelinespace
+\multitableparskip=0pt
+\multitableparindent=6pt
+\multitablecolspace=12pt
+\multitablelinespace=0pt
+
+% Macros used to set up halign preamble:
+% 
+\let\endsetuptable\relax
+\def\xendsetuptable{\endsetuptable}
+\let\columnfractions\relax
+\def\xcolumnfractions{\columnfractions}
+\newif\ifsetpercent
+
+% 2/1/96, to allow fractions to be given with more than one digit.
+\def\pickupwholefraction#1 {\global\advance\colcount by1 %
+\expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{.#1\hsize}%
+\setuptable}
+
+\newcount\colcount
+\def\setuptable#1{\def\firstarg{#1}%
+\ifx\firstarg\xendsetuptable\let\go\relax%
+\else
+  \ifx\firstarg\xcolumnfractions\global\setpercenttrue%
+  \else
+    \ifsetpercent
+       \let\go\pickupwholefraction   % In this case arg of setuptable
+                                     % is the decimal point before the
+                                     % number given in percent of hsize.
+                                     % We don't need this so we don't use it.
+    \else
+       \global\advance\colcount by1
+       \setbox0=\hbox{#1 }% Add a normal word space as a separator;
+                          % typically that is always in the input, anyway.
+       \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{\the\wd0}%
+    \fi%
+  \fi%
+\ifx\go\pickupwholefraction\else\let\go\setuptable\fi%
+\fi\go}
+
+% multitable syntax
+\def\tab{&\hskip1sp\relax} % 2/2/96
+                           % tiny skip here makes sure this column space is
+                           % maintained, even if it is never used.
+
+% @multitable ... @end multitable definitions:
+
+\def\multitable{\parsearg\dotable}
+\def\dotable#1{\bgroup
+  \vskip\parskip
+  \let\item\crcr
+  \tolerance=9500
+  \hbadness=9500
+  \setmultitablespacing
+  \parskip=\multitableparskip
+  \parindent=\multitableparindent
+  \overfullrule=0pt
+  \global\colcount=0
+  \def\Emultitable{\global\setpercentfalse\cr\egroup\egroup}%
+  %
+  % To parse everything between @multitable and @item:
+  \setuptable#1 \endsetuptable
+  %
+  % \everycr will reset column counter, \colcount, at the end of
+  % each line. Every column entry will cause \colcount to advance by one.
+  % The table preamble
+  % looks at the current \colcount to find the correct column width.
+  \everycr{\noalign{%
+  %
+  % \filbreak%% keeps underfull box messages off when table breaks over pages.
+  % Maybe so, but it also creates really weird page breaks when the table
+  % breaks over pages. Wouldn't \vfil be better?  Wait until the problem
+  % manifests itself, so it can be fixed for real --karl.
+    \global\colcount=0\relax}}%
+  %
+  % This preamble sets up a generic column definition, which will
+  % be used as many times as user calls for columns.
+  % \vtop will set a single line and will also let text wrap and
+  % continue for many paragraphs if desired.
+  \halign\bgroup&\global\advance\colcount by 1\relax
+    \multistrut\vtop{\hsize=\expandafter\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname
+  %
+  % In order to keep entries from bumping into each other
+  % we will add a \leftskip of \multitablecolspace to all columns after
+  % the first one.
+  % 
+  % If a template has been used, we will add \multitablecolspace
+  % to the width of each template entry.
+  % 
+  % If the user has set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize we will
+  % use that dimension as the width of the column, and the \leftskip
+  % will keep entries from bumping into each other.  Table will start at
+  % left margin and final column will justify at right margin.
+  % 
+  % Make sure we don't inherit \rightskip from the outer environment.
+  \rightskip=0pt
+  \ifnum\colcount=1
+    % The first column will be indented with the surrounding text.
+    \advance\hsize by\leftskip
+  \else
+    \ifsetpercent \else
+      % If user has not set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize
+      % we will advance \hsize by \multitablecolspace.
+      \advance\hsize by \multitablecolspace
+    \fi
+   % In either case we will make \leftskip=\multitablecolspace:
+  \leftskip=\multitablecolspace
+  \fi
+  % Ignoring space at the beginning and end avoids an occasional spurious
+  % blank line, when TeX decides to break the line at the space before the
+  % box from the multistrut, so the strut ends up on a line by itself.
+  % For example:
+  % @multitable @columnfractions .11 .89
+  % @item @code{#}
+  % @tab Legal holiday which is valid in major parts of the whole country.
+  % Is automatically provided with highlighting sequences respectively marking
+  % characters.
+  \noindent\ignorespaces##\unskip\multistrut}\cr
+}
+
+\def\setmultitablespacing{% test to see if user has set \multitablelinespace.
+% If so, do nothing. If not, give it an appropriate dimension based on
+% current baselineskip.
+\ifdim\multitablelinespace=0pt
+%% strut to put in table in case some entry doesn't have descenders,
+%% to keep lines equally spaced
+\let\multistrut = \strut
+%% Test to see if parskip is larger than space between lines of
+%% table. If not, do nothing.
+%%        If so, set to same dimension as multitablelinespace.
+\else
+\gdef\multistrut{\vrule height\multitablelinespace depth\dp0
+width0pt\relax} \fi
+\ifdim\multitableparskip>\multitablelinespace
+\global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace
+\global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt %% to keep parskip somewhat smaller
+                                      %% than skip between lines in the table.
+\fi%
+\ifdim\multitableparskip=0pt
+\global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace
+\global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt %% to keep parskip somewhat smaller
+                                      %% than skip between lines in the table.
+\fi}
+
+
+\message{indexing,}
+% Index generation facilities
+
+% Define \newwrite to be identical to plain tex's \newwrite
+% except not \outer, so it can be used within \newindex.
+{\catcode`\@=11
+\gdef\newwrite{\alloc@7\write\chardef\sixt@@n}}
+
+% \newindex {foo} defines an index named foo.
+% It automatically defines \fooindex such that
+% \fooindex ...rest of line... puts an entry in the index foo.
+% It also defines \fooindfile to be the number of the output channel for
+% the file that accumulates this index.  The file's extension is foo.
+% The name of an index should be no more than 2 characters long
+% for the sake of vms.
+%
+\def\newindex#1{%
+  \iflinks
+    \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname
+    \openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1 % Open the file
+  \fi
+  \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{%     % Define @#1index
+    \noexpand\doindex{#1}}
+}
+
+% @defindex foo  ==  \newindex{foo}
+
+\def\defindex{\parsearg\newindex}
+
+% Define @defcodeindex, like @defindex except put all entries in @code.
+
+\def\newcodeindex#1{%
+  \iflinks
+    \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname
+    \openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1
+  \fi
+  \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{%
+    \noexpand\docodeindex{#1}}
+}
+
+\def\defcodeindex{\parsearg\newcodeindex}
+
+% @synindex foo bar    makes index foo feed into index bar.
+% Do this instead of @defindex foo if you don't want it as a separate index.
+% The \closeout helps reduce unnecessary open files; the limit on the
+% Acorn RISC OS is a mere 16 files.
+\def\synindex#1 #2 {%
+  \expandafter\let\expandafter\synindexfoo\expandafter=\csname#2indfile\endcsname
+  \expandafter\closeout\csname#1indfile\endcsname
+  \expandafter\let\csname#1indfile\endcsname=\synindexfoo
+  \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% define \xxxindex
+    \noexpand\doindex{#2}}%
+}
+
+% @syncodeindex foo bar   similar, but put all entries made for index foo
+% inside @code.
+\def\syncodeindex#1 #2 {%
+  \expandafter\let\expandafter\synindexfoo\expandafter=\csname#2indfile\endcsname
+  \expandafter\closeout\csname#1indfile\endcsname
+  \expandafter\let\csname#1indfile\endcsname=\synindexfoo
+  \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% define \xxxindex
+    \noexpand\docodeindex{#2}}%
+}
+
+% Define \doindex, the driver for all \fooindex macros.
+% Argument #1 is generated by the calling \fooindex macro,
+%  and it is "foo", the name of the index.
+
+% \doindex just uses \parsearg; it calls \doind for the actual work.
+% This is because \doind is more useful to call from other macros.
+
+% There is also \dosubind {index}{topic}{subtopic}
+% which makes an entry in a two-level index such as the operation index.
+
+\def\doindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singleindexer}
+\def\singleindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{#1}}
+
+% like the previous two, but they put @code around the argument.
+\def\docodeindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singlecodeindexer}
+\def\singlecodeindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{\code{#1}}}
+
+\def\indexdummies{%
+\def\ { }%
+% Take care of the plain tex accent commands.
+\def\"{\realbackslash "}%
+\def\`{\realbackslash `}%
+\def\'{\realbackslash '}%
+\def\^{\realbackslash ^}%
+\def\~{\realbackslash ~}%
+\def\={\realbackslash =}%
+\def\b{\realbackslash b}%
+\def\c{\realbackslash c}%
+\def\d{\realbackslash d}%
+\def\u{\realbackslash u}%
+\def\v{\realbackslash v}%
+\def\H{\realbackslash H}%
+% Take care of the plain tex special European modified letters.
+\def\oe{\realbackslash oe}%
+\def\ae{\realbackslash ae}%
+\def\aa{\realbackslash aa}%
+\def\OE{\realbackslash OE}%
+\def\AE{\realbackslash AE}%
+\def\AA{\realbackslash AA}%
+\def\o{\realbackslash o}%
+\def\O{\realbackslash O}%
+\def\l{\realbackslash l}%
+\def\L{\realbackslash L}%
+\def\ss{\realbackslash ss}%
+% Take care of texinfo commands likely to appear in an index entry.
+% (Must be a way to avoid doing expansion at all, and thus not have to
+% laboriously list every single command here.)
+\def\@{@}% will be @@ when we switch to @ as escape char.
+%\let\{ = \lbracecmd
+%\let\} = \rbracecmd
+\def\_{{\realbackslash _}}%
+\def\w{\realbackslash w }%
+\def\bf{\realbackslash bf }%
+%\def\rm{\realbackslash rm }%
+\def\sl{\realbackslash sl }%
+\def\sf{\realbackslash sf}%
+\def\tt{\realbackslash tt}%
+\def\gtr{\realbackslash gtr}%
+\def\less{\realbackslash less}%
+\def\hat{\realbackslash hat}%
+\def\TeX{\realbackslash TeX}%
+\def\dots{\realbackslash dots }%
+\def\result{\realbackslash result}%
+\def\equiv{\realbackslash equiv}%
+\def\expansion{\realbackslash expansion}%
+\def\print{\realbackslash print}%
+\def\error{\realbackslash error}%
+\def\point{\realbackslash point}%
+\def\copyright{\realbackslash copyright}%
+\def\tclose##1{\realbackslash tclose {##1}}%
+\def\code##1{\realbackslash code {##1}}%
+\def\uref##1{\realbackslash uref {##1}}%
+\def\url##1{\realbackslash url {##1}}%
+\def\env##1{\realbackslash env {##1}}%
+\def\command##1{\realbackslash command {##1}}%
+\def\option##1{\realbackslash option {##1}}%
+\def\dotless##1{\realbackslash dotless {##1}}%
+\def\samp##1{\realbackslash samp {##1}}%
+\def\,##1{\realbackslash ,{##1}}%
+\def\t##1{\realbackslash t {##1}}%
+\def\r##1{\realbackslash r {##1}}%
+\def\i##1{\realbackslash i {##1}}%
+\def\b##1{\realbackslash b {##1}}%
+\def\sc##1{\realbackslash sc {##1}}%
+\def\cite##1{\realbackslash cite {##1}}%
+\def\key##1{\realbackslash key {##1}}%
+\def\file##1{\realbackslash file {##1}}%
+\def\var##1{\realbackslash var {##1}}%
+\def\kbd##1{\realbackslash kbd {##1}}%
+\def\dfn##1{\realbackslash dfn {##1}}%
+\def\emph##1{\realbackslash emph {##1}}%
+\def\acronym##1{\realbackslash acronym {##1}}%
+%
+% Handle some cases of @value -- where the variable name does not
+% contain - or _, and the value does not contain any
+% (non-fully-expandable) commands.
+\let\value = \expandablevalue
+%
+\unsepspaces
+}
+
+% If an index command is used in an @example environment, any spaces
+% therein should become regular spaces in the raw index file, not the
+% expansion of \tie (\\leavevmode \penalty \@M \ ).
+{\obeyspaces
+ \gdef\unsepspaces{\obeyspaces\let =\space}}
+
+% \indexnofonts no-ops all font-change commands.
+% This is used when outputting the strings to sort the index by.
+\def\indexdummyfont#1{#1}
+\def\indexdummytex{TeX}
+\def\indexdummydots{...}
+
+\def\indexnofonts{%
+% Just ignore accents.
+\let\,=\indexdummyfont
+\let\"=\indexdummyfont
+\let\`=\indexdummyfont
+\let\'=\indexdummyfont
+\let\^=\indexdummyfont
+\let\~=\indexdummyfont
+\let\==\indexdummyfont
+\let\b=\indexdummyfont
+\let\c=\indexdummyfont
+\let\d=\indexdummyfont
+\let\u=\indexdummyfont
+\let\v=\indexdummyfont
+\let\H=\indexdummyfont
+\let\dotless=\indexdummyfont
+% Take care of the plain tex special European modified letters.
+\def\oe{oe}%
+\def\ae{ae}%
+\def\aa{aa}%
+\def\OE{OE}%
+\def\AE{AE}%
+\def\AA{AA}%
+\def\o{o}%
+\def\O{O}%
+\def\l{l}%
+\def\L{L}%
+\def\ss{ss}%
+\let\w=\indexdummyfont
+\let\t=\indexdummyfont
+\let\r=\indexdummyfont
+\let\i=\indexdummyfont
+\let\b=\indexdummyfont
+\let\emph=\indexdummyfont
+\let\strong=\indexdummyfont
+\let\cite=\indexdummyfont
+\let\sc=\indexdummyfont
+%Don't no-op \tt, since it isn't a user-level command
+% and is used in the definitions of the active chars like <, >, |...
+%\let\tt=\indexdummyfont
+\let\tclose=\indexdummyfont
+\let\code=\indexdummyfont
+\let\url=\indexdummyfont
+\let\uref=\indexdummyfont
+\let\env=\indexdummyfont
+\let\command=\indexdummyfont
+\let\option=\indexdummyfont
+\let\file=\indexdummyfont
+\let\samp=\indexdummyfont
+\let\kbd=\indexdummyfont
+\let\key=\indexdummyfont
+\let\var=\indexdummyfont
+\let\TeX=\indexdummytex
+\let\dots=\indexdummydots
+\def\@{@}%
+}
+
+% To define \realbackslash, we must make \ not be an escape.
+% We must first make another character (@) an escape
+% so we do not become unable to do a definition.
+
+{\catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=\other
+ @gdef@realbackslash{\}}
+
+\let\indexbackslash=0  %overridden during \printindex.
+\let\SETmarginindex=\relax % put index entries in margin (undocumented)?
+
+% For \ifx comparisons.
+\def\emptymacro{\empty}
+
+% Most index entries go through here, but \dosubind is the general case.
+% 
+\def\doind#1#2{\dosubind{#1}{#2}\empty}
+
+% Workhorse for all \fooindexes.
+% #1 is name of index, #2 is stuff to put there, #3 is subentry --
+% \empty if called from \doind, as we usually are.  The main exception
+% is with defuns, which call us directly.
+% 
+\def\dosubind#1#2#3{%
+  % Put the index entry in the margin if desired.
+  \ifx\SETmarginindex\relax\else
+    \insert\margin{\hbox{\vrule height8pt depth3pt width0pt #2}}%
+  \fi
+  {%
+    \count255=\lastpenalty
+    {%
+      \indexdummies % Must do this here, since \bf, etc expand at this stage
+      \escapechar=`\\
+      {%
+        \let\folio = 0% We will expand all macros now EXCEPT \folio.
+        \def\rawbackslashxx{\indexbackslash}% \indexbackslash isn't defined now
+        % so it will be output as is; and it will print as backslash.
+        %
+        \def\thirdarg{#3}%
+        %
+        % If third arg is present, precede it with space in sort key.
+        \ifx\thirdarg\emptymacro
+          \let\subentry = \empty
+        \else
+          \def\subentry{ #3}%
+        \fi
+        %
+        % First process the index-string with all font commands turned off
+        % to get the string to sort by.
+        {\indexnofonts \xdef\indexsorttmp{#2\subentry}}%
+        %
+        % Now produce the complete index entry, with both the sort key and the
+        % original text, including any font commands.
+        \toks0 = {#2}%
+        \edef\temp{%
+          \write\csname#1indfile\endcsname{%
+            \realbackslash entry{\indexsorttmp}{\folio}{\the\toks0}}%
+        }%
+        %
+        % If third (subentry) arg is present, add it to the index string.
+        \ifx\thirdarg\emptymacro \else
+          \toks0 = {#3}%
+          \edef\temp{\temp{\the\toks0}}%
+        \fi
+        %
+        % If a skip is the last thing on the list now, preserve it
+        % by backing up by \lastskip, doing the \write, then inserting
+        % the skip again.  Otherwise, the whatsit generated by the
+        % \write will make \lastskip zero.  The result is that sequences
+        % like this:
+        % @end defun
+        % @tindex whatever
+        % @defun ...
+        % will have extra space inserted, because the \medbreak in the
+        % start of the @defun won't see the skip inserted by the @end of
+        % the previous defun.
+        % 
+        % But don't do any of this if we're not in vertical mode.  We
+        % don't want to do a \vskip and prematurely end a paragraph.
+        % 
+        % Avoid page breaks due to these extra skips, too.
+        % 
+        \iflinks
+          \ifvmode
+            \skip0 = \lastskip
+            \ifdim\lastskip = 0pt \else \nobreak\vskip-\lastskip \fi
+          \fi
+          %
+          \temp % do the write
+          %
+          % 
+          \ifvmode \ifdim\skip0 = 0pt \else \nobreak\vskip\skip0 \fi \fi
+        \fi
+      }%
+    }%
+    \penalty\count255
+  }%
+}
+
+% The index entry written in the file actually looks like
+%  \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}
+% or
+%  \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}{subtopic}
+% The texindex program reads in these files and writes files
+% containing these kinds of lines:
+%  \initial {c}
+%     before the first topic whose initial is c
+%  \entry {topic}{pagelist}
+%     for a topic that is used without subtopics
+%  \primary {topic}
+%     for the beginning of a topic that is used with subtopics
+%  \secondary {subtopic}{pagelist}
+%     for each subtopic.
+
+% Define the user-accessible indexing commands
+% @findex, @vindex, @kindex, @cindex.
+
+\def\findex {\fnindex}
+\def\kindex {\kyindex}
+\def\cindex {\cpindex}
+\def\vindex {\vrindex}
+\def\tindex {\tpindex}
+\def\pindex {\pgindex}
+
+\def\cindexsub {\begingroup\obeylines\cindexsub}
+{\obeylines %
+\gdef\cindexsub "#1" #2^^M{\endgroup %
+\dosubind{cp}{#2}{#1}}}
+
+% Define the macros used in formatting output of the sorted index material.
+
+% @printindex causes a particular index (the ??s file) to get printed.
+% It does not print any chapter heading (usually an @unnumbered).
+%
+\def\printindex{\parsearg\doprintindex}
+\def\doprintindex#1{\begingroup
+  \dobreak \chapheadingskip{10000}%
+  %
+  \indexfonts \rm
+  \tolerance = 9500
+  \indexbreaks
+  %
+  % See if the index file exists and is nonempty.
+  % Change catcode of @ here so that if the index file contains
+  % \initial {@}
+  % as its first line, TeX doesn't complain about mismatched braces
+  % (because it thinks @} is a control sequence).
+  \catcode`\@ = 11
+  \openin 1 \jobname.#1s
+  \ifeof 1
+    % \enddoublecolumns gets confused if there is no text in the index,
+    % and it loses the chapter title and the aux file entries for the
+    % index.  The easiest way to prevent this problem is to make sure
+    % there is some text.
+    (Index is nonexistent)
+  \else
+    %
+    % If the index file exists but is empty, then \openin leaves \ifeof
+    % false.  We have to make TeX try to read something from the file, so
+    % it can discover if there is anything in it.
+    \read 1 to \temp
+    \ifeof 1
+      (Index is empty)
+    \else
+      % Index files are almost Texinfo source, but we use \ as the escape
+      % character.  It would be better to use @, but that's too big a change
+      % to make right now.
+      \def\indexbackslash{\rawbackslashxx}%
+      \catcode`\\ = 0
+      \escapechar = `\\
+      \begindoublecolumns
+      \input \jobname.#1s
+      \enddoublecolumns
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  \closein 1
+\endgroup}
+
+% These macros are used by the sorted index file itself.
+% Change them to control the appearance of the index.
+
+\def\initial#1{{%
+  % Some minor font changes for the special characters.
+  \let\tentt=\sectt \let\tt=\sectt \let\sf=\sectt
+  %
+  % Remove any glue we may have, we'll be inserting our own.
+  \removelastskip
+  % 
+  % We like breaks before the index initials, so insert a bonus.
+  \penalty -300
+  %
+  % Typeset the initial.  Making this add up to a whole number of
+  % baselineskips increases the chance of the dots lining up from column
+  % to column.  It still won't often be perfect, because of the stretch
+  % we need before each entry, but it's better.
+  % 
+  % No shrink because it confuses \balancecolumns.
+  \vskip 1.67\baselineskip plus .5\baselineskip
+  \leftline{\secbf #1}%
+  \vskip .33\baselineskip plus .1\baselineskip
+  %
+  % Do our best not to break after the initial.
+  \nobreak
+}}
+
+% This typesets a paragraph consisting of #1, dot leaders, and then #2
+% flush to the right margin.  It is used for index and table of contents
+% entries.  The paragraph is indented by \leftskip.
+%
+\def\entry#1#2{\begingroup
+  %
+  % Start a new paragraph if necessary, so our assignments below can't
+  % affect previous text.
+  \par
+  %
+  % Do not fill out the last line with white space.
+  \parfillskip = 0in
+  %
+  % No extra space above this paragraph.
+  \parskip = 0in
+  %
+  % Do not prefer a separate line ending with a hyphen to fewer lines.
+  \finalhyphendemerits = 0
+  %
+  % \hangindent is only relevant when the entry text and page number
+  % don't both fit on one line.  In that case, bob suggests starting the
+  % dots pretty far over on the line.  Unfortunately, a large
+  % indentation looks wrong when the entry text itself is broken across
+  % lines.  So we use a small indentation and put up with long leaders.
+  %
+  % \hangafter is reset to 1 (which is the value we want) at the start
+  % of each paragraph, so we need not do anything with that.
+  \hangindent = 2em
+  %
+  % When the entry text needs to be broken, just fill out the first line
+  % with blank space.
+  \rightskip = 0pt plus1fil
+  %
+  % A bit of stretch before each entry for the benefit of balancing columns.
+  \vskip 0pt plus1pt
+  %
+  % Start a ``paragraph'' for the index entry so the line breaking
+  % parameters we've set above will have an effect.
+  \noindent
+  %
+  % Insert the text of the index entry.  TeX will do line-breaking on it.
+  #1%
+  % The following is kludged to not output a line of dots in the index if
+  % there are no page numbers.  The next person who breaks this will be
+  % cursed by a Unix daemon.
+  \def\tempa{{\rm }}%
+  \def\tempb{#2}%
+  \edef\tempc{\tempa}%
+  \edef\tempd{\tempb}%
+  \ifx\tempc\tempd\ \else%
+    %
+    % If we must, put the page number on a line of its own, and fill out
+    % this line with blank space.  (The \hfil is overwhelmed with the
+    % fill leaders glue in \indexdotfill if the page number does fit.)
+    \hfil\penalty50
+    \null\nobreak\indexdotfill % Have leaders before the page number.
+    %
+    % The `\ ' here is removed by the implicit \unskip that TeX does as
+    % part of (the primitive) \par.  Without it, a spurious underfull
+    % \hbox ensues.
+    \ #2% The page number ends the paragraph.
+  \fi%
+  \par
+\endgroup}
+
+% Like \dotfill except takes at least 1 em.
+\def\indexdotfill{\cleaders
+  \hbox{$\mathsurround=0pt \mkern1.5mu ${\it .}$ \mkern1.5mu$}\hskip 1em plus 1fill}
+
+\def\primary #1{\line{#1\hfil}}
+
+\newskip\secondaryindent \secondaryindent=0.5cm
+
+\def\secondary #1#2{
+{\parfillskip=0in \parskip=0in
+\hangindent =1in \hangafter=1
+\noindent\hskip\secondaryindent\hbox{#1}\indexdotfill #2\par
+}}
+
+% Define two-column mode, which we use to typeset indexes.
+% Adapted from the TeXbook, page 416, which is to say,
+% the manmac.tex format used to print the TeXbook itself.
+\catcode`\@=11
+
+\newbox\partialpage
+\newdimen\doublecolumnhsize
+
+\def\begindoublecolumns{\begingroup % ended by \enddoublecolumns
+  % Grab any single-column material above us.
+  \output = {\global\setbox\partialpage = \vbox{%
+    % 
+    % Here is a possibility not foreseen in manmac: if we accumulate a
+    % whole lot of material, we might end up calling this \output
+    % routine twice in a row (see the doublecol-lose test, which is
+    % essentially a couple of indexes with @setchapternewpage off).  In
+    % that case, we must prevent the second \partialpage from
+    % simply overwriting the first, causing us to lose the page.
+    % This will preserve it until a real output routine can ship it
+    % out.  Generally, \partialpage will be empty when this runs and
+    % this will be a no-op.
+    \unvbox\partialpage
+    %
+    % Unvbox the main output page.
+    \unvbox255
+    \kern-\topskip \kern\baselineskip
+  }}%
+  \eject
+  %
+  % Use the double-column output routine for subsequent pages.
+  \output = {\doublecolumnout}%
+  %
+  % Change the page size parameters.  We could do this once outside this
+  % routine, in each of @smallbook, @afourpaper, and the default 8.5x11
+  % format, but then we repeat the same computation.  Repeating a couple
+  % of assignments once per index is clearly meaningless for the
+  % execution time, so we may as well do it in one place.
+  %
+  % First we halve the line length, less a little for the gutter between
+  % the columns.  We compute the gutter based on the line length, so it
+  % changes automatically with the paper format.  The magic constant
+  % below is chosen so that the gutter has the same value (well, +-<1pt)
+  % as it did when we hard-coded it.
+  %
+  % We put the result in a separate register, \doublecolumhsize, so we
+  % can restore it in \pagesofar, after \hsize itself has (potentially)
+  % been clobbered.
+  %
+  \doublecolumnhsize = \hsize
+    \advance\doublecolumnhsize by -.04154\hsize
+    \divide\doublecolumnhsize by 2
+  \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize
+  %
+  % Double the \vsize as well.  (We don't need a separate register here,
+  % since nobody clobbers \vsize.)
+  \advance\vsize by -\ht\partialpage
+  \vsize = 2\vsize
+}
+
+% The double-column output routine for all double-column pages except
+% the last.
+% 
+\def\doublecolumnout{%
+  \splittopskip=\topskip \splitmaxdepth=\maxdepth
+  % Get the available space for the double columns -- the normal
+  % (undoubled) page height minus any material left over from the
+  % previous page.
+  \dimen@ = \vsize
+  \divide\dimen@ by 2
+  %
+  % box0 will be the left-hand column, box2 the right.
+  \setbox0=\vsplit255 to\dimen@ \setbox2=\vsplit255 to\dimen@
+  \onepageout\pagesofar
+  \unvbox255
+  \penalty\outputpenalty
+}
+\def\pagesofar{%
+  % Re-output the contents of the output page -- any previous material,
+  % followed by the two boxes we just split, in box0 and box2.
+  \advance\vsize by \ht\partialpage
+  \unvbox\partialpage
+  %
+  \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize
+  \wd0=\hsize \wd2=\hsize
+  \hbox to\pagewidth{\box0\hfil\box2}%
+}
+\def\enddoublecolumns{%
+  \output = {%
+    % Split the last of the double-column material.  Leave on the
+    % current page, no automatic page break.
+    \balancecolumns
+    %
+    % If we end up splitting too much material for the current page,
+    % though, there will be another page break right after this \output
+    % invocation ends.  Having called \balancecolumns once, we do not
+    % want to call it again.  Therefore, reset \output to its normal
+    % definition right away.  (We hope \balancecolumns will never be
+    % called on to balance too much material, but if it is, this makes
+    % the output somewhat more palatable.)
+    \global\output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}}%
+    %
+    % \pagegoal was set to the doubled \vsize above, since we restarted
+    % the current page.  We're now back to normal single-column
+    % typesetting, so reset \pagegoal to the normal \vsize.
+    \pagegoal = \vsize
+  }%
+  \eject
+  \endgroup % started in \begindoublecolumns
+}
+\def\balancecolumns{%
+  % Called at the end of the double column material.
+  \setbox0 = \vbox{\unvbox255}% like \box255 but more efficient, see p.120.
+  \dimen@ = \ht0
+  \advance\dimen@ by \topskip
+  \advance\dimen@ by-\baselineskip
+  \divide\dimen@ by 2 % target to split to
+  %debug\message{final 2-column material height=\the\ht0, target=\the\dimen@.}%
+  \splittopskip = \topskip
+  % Loop until we get a decent breakpoint.
+  {%
+    \vbadness = 10000
+    \loop
+      \global\setbox3 = \copy0
+      \global\setbox1 = \vsplit3 to \dimen@
+    \ifdim\ht3>\dimen@
+      \global\advance\dimen@ by 1pt
+    \repeat
+  }%
+  %debug\message{split to \the\dimen@, column heights: \the\ht1, \the\ht3.}%
+  \setbox0=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox1}%
+  \setbox2=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox3}%
+  %
+  \pagesofar
+}
+\catcode`\@ = \other
+
+
+\message{sectioning,}
+% Define chapters, sections, etc.
+
+\newcount\chapno
+\newcount\secno        \secno=0
+\newcount\subsecno     \subsecno=0
+\newcount\subsubsecno  \subsubsecno=0
+
+% This counter is funny since it counts through charcodes of letters A, B, ...
+\newcount\appendixno  \appendixno = `\@
+\def\appendixletter{\char\the\appendixno}
+
+% Each @chapter defines this as the name of the chapter.
+% page headings and footings can use it.  @section does likewise.
+\def\thischapter{}
+\def\thissection{}
+
+\newcount\absseclevel % used to calculate proper heading level
+\newcount\secbase\secbase=0 % @raise/lowersections modify this count
+
+% @raisesections: treat @section as chapter, @subsection as section, etc.
+\def\raisesections{\global\advance\secbase by -1}
+\let\up=\raisesections % original BFox name
+
+% @lowersections: treat @chapter as section, @section as subsection, etc.
+\def\lowersections{\global\advance\secbase by 1}
+\let\down=\lowersections % original BFox name
+
+% Choose a numbered-heading macro
+% #1 is heading level if unmodified by @raisesections or @lowersections
+% #2 is text for heading
+\def\numhead#1#2{\absseclevel=\secbase\advance\absseclevel by #1
+\ifcase\absseclevel
+  \chapterzzz{#2}
+\or
+  \seczzz{#2}
+\or
+  \numberedsubseczzz{#2}
+\or
+  \numberedsubsubseczzz{#2}
+\else
+  \ifnum \absseclevel<0
+    \chapterzzz{#2}
+  \else
+    \numberedsubsubseczzz{#2}
+  \fi
+\fi
+}
+
+% like \numhead, but chooses appendix heading levels
+\def\apphead#1#2{\absseclevel=\secbase\advance\absseclevel by #1
+\ifcase\absseclevel
+  \appendixzzz{#2}
+\or
+  \appendixsectionzzz{#2}
+\or
+  \appendixsubseczzz{#2}
+\or
+  \appendixsubsubseczzz{#2}
+\else
+  \ifnum \absseclevel<0
+    \appendixzzz{#2}
+  \else
+    \appendixsubsubseczzz{#2}
+  \fi
+\fi
+}
+
+% like \numhead, but chooses numberless heading levels
+\def\unnmhead#1#2{\absseclevel=\secbase\advance\absseclevel by #1
+\ifcase\absseclevel
+  \unnumberedzzz{#2}
+\or
+  \unnumberedseczzz{#2}
+\or
+  \unnumberedsubseczzz{#2}
+\or
+  \unnumberedsubsubseczzz{#2}
+\else
+  \ifnum \absseclevel<0
+    \unnumberedzzz{#2}
+  \else
+    \unnumberedsubsubseczzz{#2}
+  \fi
+\fi
+}
+
+% @chapter, @appendix, @unnumbered.
+\def\thischaptername{No Chapter Title}
+\outer\def\chapter{\parsearg\chapteryyy}
+\def\chapteryyy #1{\numhead0{#1}} % normally numhead0 calls chapterzzz
+\def\chapterzzz #1{%
+\secno=0 \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0
+\global\advance \chapno by 1 \message{\putwordChapter\space \the\chapno}%
+\chapmacro {#1}{\the\chapno}%
+\gdef\thissection{#1}%
+\gdef\thischaptername{#1}%
+% We don't substitute the actual chapter name into \thischapter
+% because we don't want its macros evaluated now.
+\xdef\thischapter{\putwordChapter{} \the\chapno: \noexpand\thischaptername}%
+\toks0 = {#1}%
+\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash chapentry{\the\toks0}%
+                                  {\the\chapno}}}%
+\temp
+\donoderef
+\global\let\section = \numberedsec
+\global\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec
+\global\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec
+}
+
+\outer\def\appendix{\parsearg\appendixyyy}
+\def\appendixyyy #1{\apphead0{#1}} % normally apphead0 calls appendixzzz
+\def\appendixzzz #1{%
+\secno=0 \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0
+\global\advance \appendixno by 1
+\message{\putwordAppendix\space \appendixletter}%
+\chapmacro {#1}{\putwordAppendix{} \appendixletter}%
+\gdef\thissection{#1}%
+\gdef\thischaptername{#1}%
+\xdef\thischapter{\putwordAppendix{} \appendixletter: \noexpand\thischaptername}%
+\toks0 = {#1}%
+\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash chapentry{\the\toks0}%
+                       {\putwordAppendix{} \appendixletter}}}%
+\temp
+\appendixnoderef
+\global\let\section = \appendixsec
+\global\let\subsection = \appendixsubsec
+\global\let\subsubsection = \appendixsubsubsec
+}
+
+% @centerchap is like @unnumbered, but the heading is centered.
+\outer\def\centerchap{\parsearg\centerchapyyy}
+\def\centerchapyyy #1{{\let\unnumbchapmacro=\centerchapmacro \unnumberedyyy{#1}}}
+
+% @top is like @unnumbered.
+\outer\def\top{\parsearg\unnumberedyyy}
+
+\outer\def\unnumbered{\parsearg\unnumberedyyy}
+\def\unnumberedyyy #1{\unnmhead0{#1}} % normally unnmhead0 calls unnumberedzzz
+\def\unnumberedzzz #1{%
+\secno=0 \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0
+%
+% This used to be simply \message{#1}, but TeX fully expands the
+% argument to \message.  Therefore, if #1 contained @-commands, TeX
+% expanded them.  For example, in `@unnumbered The @cite{Book}', TeX
+% expanded @cite (which turns out to cause errors because \cite is meant
+% to be executed, not expanded).
+%
+% Anyway, we don't want the fully-expanded definition of @cite to appear
+% as a result of the \message, we just want `@cite' itself.  We use
+% \the<toks register> to achieve this: TeX expands \the<toks> only once,
+% simply yielding the contents of <toks register>.  (We also do this for
+% the toc entries.)
+\toks0 = {#1}\message{(\the\toks0)}%
+%
+\unnumbchapmacro {#1}%
+\gdef\thischapter{#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}%
+\toks0 = {#1}%
+\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash unnumbchapentry{\the\toks0}}}%
+\temp
+\unnumbnoderef
+\global\let\section = \unnumberedsec
+\global\let\subsection = \unnumberedsubsec
+\global\let\subsubsection = \unnumberedsubsubsec
+}
+
+% Sections.
+\outer\def\numberedsec{\parsearg\secyyy}
+\def\secyyy #1{\numhead1{#1}} % normally calls seczzz
+\def\seczzz #1{%
+\subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \secno by 1 %
+\gdef\thissection{#1}\secheading {#1}{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}%
+\toks0 = {#1}%
+\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash secentry{\the\toks0}%
+                                  {\the\chapno}{\the\secno}}}%
+\temp
+\donoderef
+\nobreak
+}
+
+\outer\def\appendixsection{\parsearg\appendixsecyyy}
+\outer\def\appendixsec{\parsearg\appendixsecyyy}
+\def\appendixsecyyy #1{\apphead1{#1}} % normally calls appendixsectionzzz
+\def\appendixsectionzzz #1{%
+\subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \secno by 1 %
+\gdef\thissection{#1}\secheading {#1}{\appendixletter}{\the\secno}%
+\toks0 = {#1}%
+\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash secentry{\the\toks0}%
+                                  {\appendixletter}{\the\secno}}}%
+\temp
+\appendixnoderef
+\nobreak
+}
+
+\outer\def\unnumberedsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsecyyy}
+\def\unnumberedsecyyy #1{\unnmhead1{#1}} % normally calls unnumberedseczzz
+\def\unnumberedseczzz #1{%
+\plainsecheading {#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}%
+\toks0 = {#1}%
+\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash unnumbsecentry{\the\toks0}}}%
+\temp
+\unnumbnoderef
+\nobreak
+}
+
+% Subsections.
+\outer\def\numberedsubsec{\parsearg\numberedsubsecyyy}
+\def\numberedsubsecyyy #1{\numhead2{#1}} % normally calls numberedsubseczzz
+\def\numberedsubseczzz #1{%
+\gdef\thissection{#1}\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \subsecno by 1 %
+\subsecheading {#1}{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}%
+\toks0 = {#1}%
+\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash subsecentry{\the\toks0}%
+                                    {\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}}}%
+\temp
+\donoderef
+\nobreak
+}
+
+\outer\def\appendixsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubsecyyy}
+\def\appendixsubsecyyy #1{\apphead2{#1}} % normally calls appendixsubseczzz
+\def\appendixsubseczzz #1{%
+\gdef\thissection{#1}\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \subsecno by 1 %
+\subsecheading {#1}{\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}%
+\toks0 = {#1}%
+\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash subsecentry{\the\toks0}%
+                                {\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}}}%
+\temp
+\appendixnoderef
+\nobreak
+}
+
+\outer\def\unnumberedsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubsecyyy}
+\def\unnumberedsubsecyyy #1{\unnmhead2{#1}} %normally calls unnumberedsubseczzz
+\def\unnumberedsubseczzz #1{%
+\plainsubsecheading {#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}%
+\toks0 = {#1}%
+\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash unnumbsubsecentry%
+                                    {\the\toks0}}}%
+\temp
+\unnumbnoderef
+\nobreak
+}
+
+% Subsubsections.
+\outer\def\numberedsubsubsec{\parsearg\numberedsubsubsecyyy}
+\def\numberedsubsubsecyyy #1{\numhead3{#1}} % normally numberedsubsubseczzz
+\def\numberedsubsubseczzz #1{%
+\gdef\thissection{#1}\global\advance \subsubsecno by 1 %
+\subsubsecheading {#1}
+  {\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}%
+\toks0 = {#1}%
+\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash subsubsecentry{\the\toks0}%
+  {\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}}}%
+\temp
+\donoderef
+\nobreak
+}
+
+\outer\def\appendixsubsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubsubsecyyy}
+\def\appendixsubsubsecyyy #1{\apphead3{#1}} % normally appendixsubsubseczzz
+\def\appendixsubsubseczzz #1{%
+\gdef\thissection{#1}\global\advance \subsubsecno by 1 %
+\subsubsecheading {#1}
+  {\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}%
+\toks0 = {#1}%
+\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash subsubsecentry{\the\toks0}%
+  {\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}}}%
+\temp
+\appendixnoderef
+\nobreak
+}
+
+\outer\def\unnumberedsubsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubsubsecyyy}
+\def\unnumberedsubsubsecyyy #1{\unnmhead3{#1}} %normally unnumberedsubsubseczzz
+\def\unnumberedsubsubseczzz #1{%
+\plainsubsubsecheading {#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}%
+\toks0 = {#1}%
+\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash unnumbsubsubsecentry%
+                                    {\the\toks0}}}%
+\temp
+\unnumbnoderef
+\nobreak
+}
+
+% These are variants which are not "outer", so they can appear in @ifinfo.
+% Actually, they should now be obsolete; ordinary section commands should work.
+\def\infotop{\parsearg\unnumberedzzz}
+\def\infounnumbered{\parsearg\unnumberedzzz}
+\def\infounnumberedsec{\parsearg\unnumberedseczzz}
+\def\infounnumberedsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubseczzz}
+\def\infounnumberedsubsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubsubseczzz}
+
+\def\infoappendix{\parsearg\appendixzzz}
+\def\infoappendixsec{\parsearg\appendixseczzz}
+\def\infoappendixsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubseczzz}
+\def\infoappendixsubsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubsubseczzz}
+
+\def\infochapter{\parsearg\chapterzzz}
+\def\infosection{\parsearg\sectionzzz}
+\def\infosubsection{\parsearg\subsectionzzz}
+\def\infosubsubsection{\parsearg\subsubsectionzzz}
+
+% These macros control what the section commands do, according
+% to what kind of chapter we are in (ordinary, appendix, or unnumbered).
+% Define them by default for a numbered chapter.
+\global\let\section = \numberedsec
+\global\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec
+\global\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec
+
+% Define @majorheading, @heading and @subheading
+
+% NOTE on use of \vbox for chapter headings, section headings, and such:
+%       1) We use \vbox rather than the earlier \line to permit
+%          overlong headings to fold.
+%       2) \hyphenpenalty is set to 10000 because hyphenation in a
+%          heading is obnoxious; this forbids it.
+%       3) Likewise, headings look best if no \parindent is used, and
+%          if justification is not attempted.  Hence \raggedright.
+
+
+\def\majorheading{\parsearg\majorheadingzzz}
+\def\majorheadingzzz #1{%
+{\advance\chapheadingskip by 10pt \chapbreak }%
+{\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
+                  \parindent=0pt\raggedright
+                  \rm #1\hfill}}\bigskip \par\penalty 200}
+
+\def\chapheading{\parsearg\chapheadingzzz}
+\def\chapheadingzzz #1{\chapbreak %
+{\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
+                  \parindent=0pt\raggedright
+                  \rm #1\hfill}}\bigskip \par\penalty 200}
+
+% @heading, @subheading, @subsubheading.
+\def\heading{\parsearg\plainsecheading}
+\def\subheading{\parsearg\plainsubsecheading}
+\def\subsubheading{\parsearg\plainsubsubsecheading}
+
+% These macros generate a chapter, section, etc. heading only
+% (including whitespace, linebreaking, etc. around it),
+% given all the information in convenient, parsed form.
+
+%%% Args are the skip and penalty (usually negative)
+\def\dobreak#1#2{\par\ifdim\lastskip<#1\removelastskip\penalty#2\vskip#1\fi}
+
+\def\setchapterstyle #1 {\csname CHAPF#1\endcsname}
+
+%%% Define plain chapter starts, and page on/off switching for it
+% Parameter controlling skip before chapter headings (if needed)
+
+\newskip\chapheadingskip
+
+\def\chapbreak{\dobreak \chapheadingskip {-4000}}
+\def\chappager{\par\vfill\supereject}
+\def\chapoddpage{\chappager \ifodd\pageno \else \hbox to 0pt{} \chappager\fi}
+
+\def\setchapternewpage #1 {\csname CHAPPAG#1\endcsname}
+
+\def\CHAPPAGoff{%
+\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
+\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapbreak
+\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager}
+
+\def\CHAPPAGon{%
+\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
+\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chappager
+\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager
+\global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSsingle}}
+
+\def\CHAPPAGodd{
+\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
+\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapoddpage
+\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chapoddpage
+\global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}}
+
+\CHAPPAGon
+
+\def\CHAPFplain{
+\global\let\chapmacro=\chfplain
+\global\let\unnumbchapmacro=\unnchfplain
+\global\let\centerchapmacro=\centerchfplain}
+
+% Plain chapter opening.
+% #1 is the text, #2 the chapter number or empty if unnumbered.
+\def\chfplain#1#2{%
+  \pchapsepmacro
+  {%
+    \chapfonts \rm
+    \def\chapnum{#2}%
+    \setbox0 = \hbox{#2\ifx\chapnum\empty\else\enspace\fi}%
+    \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \raggedright
+          \hangindent = \wd0 \centerparametersmaybe
+          \unhbox0 #1\par}%
+  }%
+  \nobreak\bigskip % no page break after a chapter title
+  \nobreak
+}
+
+% Plain opening for unnumbered.
+\def\unnchfplain#1{\chfplain{#1}{}}
+
+% @centerchap -- centered and unnumbered.
+\let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax
+\def\centerchfplain#1{{%
+  \def\centerparametersmaybe{%
+    \advance\rightskip by 3\rightskip
+    \leftskip = \rightskip
+    \parfillskip = 0pt
+  }%
+  \chfplain{#1}{}%
+}}
+
+\CHAPFplain % The default
+
+\def\unnchfopen #1{%
+\chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
+                       \parindent=0pt\raggedright
+                       \rm #1\hfill}}\bigskip \par\nobreak
+}
+
+\def\chfopen #1#2{\chapoddpage {\chapfonts
+\vbox to 3in{\vfil \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #2} \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #1} \vfil}}%
+\par\penalty 5000 %
+}
+
+\def\centerchfopen #1{%
+\chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
+                       \parindent=0pt
+                       \hfill {\rm #1}\hfill}}\bigskip \par\nobreak
+}
+
+\def\CHAPFopen{
+\global\let\chapmacro=\chfopen
+\global\let\unnumbchapmacro=\unnchfopen
+\global\let\centerchapmacro=\centerchfopen}
+
+
+% Section titles.
+\newskip\secheadingskip
+\def\secheadingbreak{\dobreak \secheadingskip {-1000}}
+\def\secheading#1#2#3{\sectionheading{sec}{#2.#3}{#1}}
+\def\plainsecheading#1{\sectionheading{sec}{}{#1}}
+
+% Subsection titles.
+\newskip \subsecheadingskip
+\def\subsecheadingbreak{\dobreak \subsecheadingskip {-500}}
+\def\subsecheading#1#2#3#4{\sectionheading{subsec}{#2.#3.#4}{#1}}
+\def\plainsubsecheading#1{\sectionheading{subsec}{}{#1}}
+
+% Subsubsection titles.
+\let\subsubsecheadingskip = \subsecheadingskip
+\let\subsubsecheadingbreak = \subsecheadingbreak
+\def\subsubsecheading#1#2#3#4#5{\sectionheading{subsubsec}{#2.#3.#4.#5}{#1}}
+\def\plainsubsubsecheading#1{\sectionheading{subsubsec}{}{#1}}
+
+
+% Print any size section title.
+%
+% #1 is the section type (sec/subsec/subsubsec), #2 is the section
+% number (maybe empty), #3 the text.
+\def\sectionheading#1#2#3{%
+  {%
+    \expandafter\advance\csname #1headingskip\endcsname by \parskip
+    \csname #1headingbreak\endcsname
+  }%
+  {%
+    % Switch to the right set of fonts.
+    \csname #1fonts\endcsname \rm
+    %
+    % Only insert the separating space if we have a section number.
+    \def\secnum{#2}%
+    \setbox0 = \hbox{#2\ifx\secnum\empty\else\enspace\fi}%
+    %
+    \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \raggedright
+          \hangindent = \wd0 % zero if no section number
+          \unhbox0 #3}%
+  }%
+  \ifdim\parskip<10pt \nobreak\kern10pt\nobreak\kern-\parskip\fi \nobreak
+}
+
+
+\message{toc,}
+\newwrite\tocfile
+
+% Write an entry to the toc file, opening it if necessary.
+% Called from @chapter, etc.  We supply {\folio} at the end of the
+% argument, which will end up as the last argument to the \...entry macro.
+% 
+% We open the .toc file here instead of at @setfilename or any other
+% given time so that @contents can be put in the document anywhere.
+% 
+\newif\iftocfileopened
+\def\writetocentry#1{%
+  \iftocfileopened\else
+    \immediate\openout\tocfile = \jobname.toc
+    \global\tocfileopenedtrue
+  \fi
+  \iflinks \write\tocfile{#1{\folio}}\fi
+}
+
+\newskip\contentsrightmargin \contentsrightmargin=1in
+\newcount\savepageno
+\newcount\lastnegativepageno \lastnegativepageno = -1
+
+% Finish up the main text and prepare to read what we've written
+% to \tocfile.
+% 
+\def\startcontents#1{%
+   % If @setchapternewpage on, and @headings double, the contents should
+   % start on an odd page, unlike chapters.  Thus, we maintain
+   % \contentsalignmacro in parallel with \pagealignmacro.
+   % From: Torbjorn Granlund <tege@matematik.su.se>
+   \contentsalignmacro
+   \immediate\closeout\tocfile
+   %
+   % Don't need to put `Contents' or `Short Contents' in the headline.
+   % It is abundantly clear what they are.
+   \unnumbchapmacro{#1}\def\thischapter{}%
+   \savepageno = \pageno
+   \begingroup                  % Set up to handle contents files properly.
+      \catcode`\\=0  \catcode`\{=1  \catcode`\}=2  \catcode`\@=11
+      % We can't do this, because then an actual ^ in a section
+      % title fails, e.g., @chapter ^ -- exponentiation.  --karl, 9jul97.
+      %\catcode`\^=7 % to see ^^e4 as \"a etc. juha@piuha.ydi.vtt.fi
+      \raggedbottom             % Worry more about breakpoints than the bottom.
+      \advance\hsize by -\contentsrightmargin % Don't use the full line length.
+      %
+      % Roman numerals for page numbers.
+      \ifnum \pageno>0 \pageno = \lastnegativepageno \fi
+}
+
+
+% Normal (long) toc.
+\def\contents{%
+   \startcontents{\putwordTableofContents}%
+     \openin 1 \jobname.toc
+     \ifeof 1 \else
+       \closein 1
+       \input \jobname.toc
+     \fi
+     \vfill \eject
+   \endgroup
+   \lastnegativepageno = \pageno
+   \pageno = \savepageno
+}
+
+% And just the chapters.
+\def\summarycontents{%
+   \startcontents{\putwordShortContents}%
+      %
+      \let\chapentry = \shortchapentry
+      \let\unnumbchapentry = \shortunnumberedentry
+      % We want a true roman here for the page numbers.
+      \secfonts
+      \let\rm=\shortcontrm \let\bf=\shortcontbf \let\sl=\shortcontsl
+      \rm
+      \hyphenpenalty = 10000
+      \advance\baselineskip by 1pt % Open it up a little.
+      \def\secentry ##1##2##3##4{}
+      \def\unnumbsecentry ##1##2{}
+      \def\subsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5{}
+      \def\unnumbsubsecentry ##1##2{}
+      \def\subsubsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5##6{}
+      \def\unnumbsubsubsecentry ##1##2{}
+      \openin 1 \jobname.toc
+      \ifeof 1 \else
+        \closein 1
+        \input \jobname.toc
+      \fi
+     \vfill \eject
+   \endgroup
+   \lastnegativepageno = \pageno
+   \pageno = \savepageno
+}
+\let\shortcontents = \summarycontents
+
+% These macros generate individual entries in the table of contents.
+% The first argument is the chapter or section name.
+% The last argument is the page number.
+% The arguments in between are the chapter number, section number, ...
+
+% Chapter-level things, for both the long and short contents.
+\def\chapentry#1#2#3{\dochapentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#3}}
+
+% See comments in \dochapentry re vbox and related settings
+\def\shortchapentry#1#2#3{%
+  \tocentry{\shortchaplabel{#2}\labelspace #1}{\doshortpageno{#3}}%
+}
+
+% Typeset the label for a chapter or appendix for the short contents.
+% The arg is, e.g. `Appendix A' for an appendix, or `3' for a chapter.
+% We could simplify the code here by writing out an \appendixentry
+% command in the toc file for appendices, instead of using \chapentry
+% for both, but it doesn't seem worth it.
+\setbox0 = \hbox{\shortcontrm \putwordAppendix }
+\newdimen\shortappendixwidth \shortappendixwidth = \wd0
+
+\def\shortchaplabel#1{%
+  % We typeset #1 in a box of constant width, regardless of the text of
+  % #1, so the chapter titles will come out aligned.
+  \setbox0 = \hbox{#1}%
+  \dimen0 = \ifdim\wd0 > \shortappendixwidth \shortappendixwidth \else 0pt \fi
+  %
+  % This space should be plenty, since a single number is .5em, and the
+  % widest letter (M) is 1em, at least in the Computer Modern fonts.
+  % (This space doesn't include the extra space that gets added after
+  % the label; that gets put in by \shortchapentry above.)
+  \advance\dimen0 by 1.1em
+  \hbox to \dimen0{#1\hfil}%
+}
+
+\def\unnumbchapentry#1#2{\dochapentry{#1}{#2}}
+\def\shortunnumberedentry#1#2{\tocentry{#1}{\doshortpageno{#2}}}
+
+% Sections.
+\def\secentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#2.#3\labelspace#1}{#4}}
+\def\unnumbsecentry#1#2{\dosecentry{#1}{#2}}
+
+% Subsections.
+\def\subsecentry#1#2#3#4#5{\dosubsecentry{#2.#3.#4\labelspace#1}{#5}}
+\def\unnumbsubsecentry#1#2{\dosubsecentry{#1}{#2}}
+
+% And subsubsections.
+\def\subsubsecentry#1#2#3#4#5#6{%
+  \dosubsubsecentry{#2.#3.#4.#5\labelspace#1}{#6}}
+\def\unnumbsubsubsecentry#1#2{\dosubsubsecentry{#1}{#2}}
+
+% This parameter controls the indentation of the various levels.
+\newdimen\tocindent \tocindent = 3pc
+
+% Now for the actual typesetting. In all these, #1 is the text and #2 is the
+% page number.
+%
+% If the toc has to be broken over pages, we want it to be at chapters
+% if at all possible; hence the \penalty.
+\def\dochapentry#1#2{%
+   \penalty-300 \vskip1\baselineskip plus.33\baselineskip minus.25\baselineskip
+   \begingroup
+     \chapentryfonts
+     \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno{#2}}%
+   \endgroup
+   \nobreak\vskip .25\baselineskip plus.1\baselineskip
+}
+
+\def\dosecentry#1#2{\begingroup
+  \secentryfonts \leftskip=\tocindent
+  \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno{#2}}%
+\endgroup}
+
+\def\dosubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup
+  \subsecentryfonts \leftskip=2\tocindent
+  \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno{#2}}%
+\endgroup}
+
+\def\dosubsubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup
+  \subsubsecentryfonts \leftskip=3\tocindent
+  \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno{#2}}%
+\endgroup}
+
+% Final typesetting of a toc entry; we use the same \entry macro as for
+% the index entries, but we want to suppress hyphenation here.  (We
+% can't do that in the \entry macro, since index entries might consist
+% of hyphenated-identifiers-that-do-not-fit-on-a-line-and-nothing-else.)
+\def\tocentry#1#2{\begingroup
+  \vskip 0pt plus1pt % allow a little stretch for the sake of nice page breaks
+  % Do not use \turnoffactive in these arguments.  Since the toc is
+  % typeset in cmr, so characters such as _ would come out wrong; we
+  % have to do the usual translation tricks.
+  \entry{#1}{#2}%
+\endgroup}
+
+% Space between chapter (or whatever) number and the title.
+\def\labelspace{\hskip1em \relax}
+
+\def\dopageno#1{{\rm #1}}
+\def\doshortpageno#1{{\rm #1}}
+
+\def\chapentryfonts{\secfonts \rm}
+\def\secentryfonts{\textfonts}
+\let\subsecentryfonts = \textfonts
+\let\subsubsecentryfonts = \textfonts
+
+
+\message{environments,}
+
+% Since these characters are used in examples, it should be an even number of
+% \tt widths. Each \tt character is 1en, so two makes it 1em.
+% Furthermore, these definitions must come after we define our fonts.
+\newbox\dblarrowbox    \newbox\longdblarrowbox
+\newbox\pushcharbox    \newbox\bullbox
+\newbox\equivbox       \newbox\errorbox
+
+%{\tentt
+%\global\setbox\dblarrowbox = \hbox to 1em{\hfil$\Rightarrow$\hfil}
+%\global\setbox\longdblarrowbox = \hbox to 1em{\hfil$\mapsto$\hfil}
+%\global\setbox\pushcharbox = \hbox to 1em{\hfil$\dashv$\hfil}
+%\global\setbox\equivbox = \hbox to 1em{\hfil$\ptexequiv$\hfil}
+% Adapted from the manmac format (p.420 of TeXbook)
+%\global\setbox\bullbox = \hbox to 1em{\kern.15em\vrule height .75ex width .85ex
+%                                      depth .1ex\hfil}
+%}
+
+% @point{}, @result{}, @expansion{}, @print{}, @equiv{}.
+\def\point{$\star$}
+\def\result{\leavevmode\raise.15ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\Rightarrow$\hfil}}
+\def\expansion{\leavevmode\raise.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\mapsto$\hfil}}
+\def\print{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\dashv$\hfil}}
+\def\equiv{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\ptexequiv$\hfil}}
+
+% Adapted from the TeXbook's \boxit.
+{\tentt \global\dimen0 = 3em}% Width of the box.
+\dimen2 = .55pt % Thickness of rules
+% The text. (`r' is open on the right, `e' somewhat less so on the left.)
+\setbox0 = \hbox{\kern-.75pt \tensf error\kern-1.5pt}
+
+\global\setbox\errorbox=\hbox to \dimen0{\hfil
+   \hsize = \dimen0 \advance\hsize by -5.8pt % Space to left+right.
+   \advance\hsize by -2\dimen2 % Rules.
+   \vbox{
+      \hrule height\dimen2
+      \hbox{\vrule width\dimen2 \kern3pt          % Space to left of text.
+         \vtop{\kern2.4pt \box0 \kern2.4pt}% Space above/below.
+         \kern3pt\vrule width\dimen2}% Space to right.
+      \hrule height\dimen2}
+    \hfil}
+
+% The @error{} command.
+\def\error{\leavevmode\lower.7ex\copy\errorbox}
+
+% @tex ... @end tex    escapes into raw Tex temporarily.
+% One exception: @ is still an escape character, so that @end tex works.
+% But \@ or @@ will get a plain tex @ character.
+
+\def\tex{\begingroup
+  \catcode `\\=0 \catcode `\{=1 \catcode `\}=2
+  \catcode `\$=3 \catcode `\&=4 \catcode `\#=6
+  \catcode `\^=7 \catcode `\_=8 \catcode `\~=13 \let~=\tie
+  \catcode `\%=14
+  \catcode 43=12 % plus
+  \catcode`\"=12
+  \catcode`\==12
+  \catcode`\|=12
+  \catcode`\<=12
+  \catcode`\>=12
+  \escapechar=`\\
+  %
+  \let\b=\ptexb
+  \let\bullet=\ptexbullet
+  \let\c=\ptexc
+  \let\,=\ptexcomma
+  \let\.=\ptexdot
+  \let\dots=\ptexdots
+  \let\equiv=\ptexequiv
+  \let\!=\ptexexclam
+  \let\i=\ptexi
+  \let\{=\ptexlbrace
+  \let\+=\tabalign
+  \let\}=\ptexrbrace
+  \let\*=\ptexstar
+  \let\t=\ptext
+  %
+  \def\endldots{\mathinner{\ldots\ldots\ldots\ldots}}%
+  \def\enddots{\relax\ifmmode\endldots\else$\mathsurround=0pt \endldots\,$\fi}%
+  \def\@{@}%
+\let\Etex=\endgroup}
+
+% Define @lisp ... @endlisp.
+% @lisp does a \begingroup so it can rebind things,
+% including the definition of @endlisp (which normally is erroneous).
+
+% Amount to narrow the margins by for @lisp.
+\newskip\lispnarrowing \lispnarrowing=0.4in
+
+% This is the definition that ^^M gets inside @lisp, @example, and other
+% such environments.  \null is better than a space, since it doesn't
+% have any width.
+\def\lisppar{\null\endgraf}
+
+% Make each space character in the input produce a normal interword
+% space in the output.  Don't allow a line break at this space, as this
+% is used only in environments like @example, where each line of input
+% should produce a line of output anyway.
+%
+{\obeyspaces %
+\gdef\sepspaces{\obeyspaces\let =\tie}}
+
+% Define \obeyedspace to be our active space, whatever it is.  This is
+% for use in \parsearg.
+{\sepspaces%
+\global\let\obeyedspace= }
+
+% This space is always present above and below environments.
+\newskip\envskipamount \envskipamount = 0pt
+
+% Make spacing and below environment symmetrical.  We use \parskip here
+% to help in doing that, since in @example-like environments \parskip
+% is reset to zero; thus the \afterenvbreak inserts no space -- but the
+% start of the next paragraph will insert \parskip
+%
+\def\aboveenvbreak{{\advance\envskipamount by \parskip
+\endgraf \ifdim\lastskip<\envskipamount
+\removelastskip \penalty-50 \vskip\envskipamount \fi}}
+
+\let\afterenvbreak = \aboveenvbreak
+
+% \nonarrowing is a flag.  If "set", @lisp etc don't narrow margins.
+\let\nonarrowing=\relax
+
+% @cartouche ... @end cartouche: draw rectangle w/rounded corners around
+% environment contents.
+\font\circle=lcircle10
+\newdimen\circthick
+\newdimen\cartouter\newdimen\cartinner
+\newskip\normbskip\newskip\normpskip\newskip\normlskip
+\circthick=\fontdimen8\circle
+%
+\def\ctl{{\circle\char'013\hskip -6pt}}% 6pt from pl file: 1/2charwidth
+\def\ctr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'010}}
+\def\cbl{{\circle\char'012\hskip -6pt}}
+\def\cbr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'011}}
+\def\carttop{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip
+        \ctl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\ctr
+        \hskip\rskip}}
+\def\cartbot{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip
+        \cbl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\cbr
+        \hskip\rskip}}
+%
+\newskip\lskip\newskip\rskip
+
+\long\def\cartouche{%
+\begingroup
+        \lskip=\leftskip \rskip=\rightskip
+        \leftskip=0pt\rightskip=0pt %we want these *outside*.
+        \cartinner=\hsize \advance\cartinner by-\lskip
+                          \advance\cartinner by-\rskip
+        \cartouter=\hsize
+        \advance\cartouter by 18.4pt % allow for 3pt kerns on either
+%                                    side, and for 6pt waste from
+%                                    each corner char, and rule thickness
+        \normbskip=\baselineskip \normpskip=\parskip \normlskip=\lineskip
+        % Flag to tell @lisp, etc., not to narrow margin.
+        \let\nonarrowing=\comment
+        \vbox\bgroup
+                \baselineskip=0pt\parskip=0pt\lineskip=0pt
+                \carttop
+                \hbox\bgroup
+                        \hskip\lskip
+                        \vrule\kern3pt
+                        \vbox\bgroup
+                                \hsize=\cartinner
+                                \kern3pt
+                                \begingroup
+                                        \baselineskip=\normbskip
+                                        \lineskip=\normlskip
+                                        \parskip=\normpskip
+                                        \vskip -\parskip
+\def\Ecartouche{%
+                                \endgroup
+                                \kern3pt
+                        \egroup
+                        \kern3pt\vrule
+                        \hskip\rskip
+                \egroup
+                \cartbot
+        \egroup
+\endgroup
+}}
+
+
+% This macro is called at the beginning of all the @example variants,
+% inside a group.
+\def\nonfillstart{%
+  \aboveenvbreak
+  \inENV % This group ends at the end of the body
+  \hfuzz = 12pt % Don't be fussy
+  \sepspaces % Make spaces be word-separators rather than space tokens.
+  \singlespace
+  \let\par = \lisppar % don't ignore blank lines
+  \obeylines % each line of input is a line of output
+  \parskip = 0pt
+  \parindent = 0pt
+  \emergencystretch = 0pt % don't try to avoid overfull boxes
+  % @cartouche defines \nonarrowing to inhibit narrowing
+  % at next level down.
+  \ifx\nonarrowing\relax
+    \advance \leftskip by \lispnarrowing
+    \exdentamount=\lispnarrowing
+    \let\exdent=\nofillexdent
+    \let\nonarrowing=\relax
+  \fi
+}
+
+% Define the \E... control sequence only if we are inside the particular
+% environment, so the error checking in \end will work.
+% 
+% To end an @example-like environment, we first end the paragraph (via
+% \afterenvbreak's vertical glue), and then the group.  That way we keep
+% the zero \parskip that the environments set -- \parskip glue will be
+% inserted at the beginning of the next paragraph in the document, after
+% the environment.
+%
+\def\nonfillfinish{\afterenvbreak\endgroup}
+
+% @lisp: indented, narrowed, typewriter font.
+\def\lisp{\begingroup
+  \nonfillstart
+  \let\Elisp = \nonfillfinish
+  \tt
+  \let\kbdfont = \kbdexamplefont % Allow @kbd to do something special.
+  \gobble       % eat return
+}
+
+% @example: Same as @lisp.
+\def\example{\begingroup \def\Eexample{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\lisp}
+
+% @small... is usually equivalent to the non-small (@smallbook
+% redefines).  We must call \example (or whatever) last in the
+% definition, since it reads the return following the @example (or
+% whatever) command.
+% 
+% This actually allows (for example) @end display inside an
+% @smalldisplay.  Too bad, but makeinfo will catch the error anyway.
+%
+\def\smalldisplay{\begingroup\def\Esmalldisplay{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\display}
+\def\smallexample{\begingroup\def\Esmallexample{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\lisp}
+\def\smallformat{\begingroup\def\Esmallformat{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\format}
+\def\smalllisp{\begingroup\def\Esmalllisp{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\lisp}
+
+% Real @smallexample and @smalllisp (when @smallbook): use smaller fonts.
+% Originally contributed by Pavel@xerox.
+\def\smalllispx{\begingroup
+  \def\Esmalllisp{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}%
+  \def\Esmallexample{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}%
+  \indexfonts
+  \lisp
+}
+
+% @display: same as @lisp except keep current font.
+%
+\def\display{\begingroup
+  \nonfillstart
+  \let\Edisplay = \nonfillfinish
+  \gobble
+}
+
+% @smalldisplay (when @smallbook): @display plus smaller fonts.
+%
+\def\smalldisplayx{\begingroup
+  \def\Esmalldisplay{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}%
+  \indexfonts \rm
+  \display
+}
+
+% @format: same as @display except don't narrow margins.
+%
+\def\format{\begingroup
+  \let\nonarrowing = t
+  \nonfillstart
+  \let\Eformat = \nonfillfinish
+  \gobble
+}
+
+% @smallformat (when @smallbook): @format plus smaller fonts.
+%
+\def\smallformatx{\begingroup
+  \def\Esmallformat{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}%
+  \indexfonts \rm
+  \format
+}
+
+% @flushleft (same as @format).
+%
+\def\flushleft{\begingroup \def\Eflushleft{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\format}
+
+% @flushright.
+% 
+\def\flushright{\begingroup
+  \let\nonarrowing = t
+  \nonfillstart
+  \let\Eflushright = \nonfillfinish
+  \advance\leftskip by 0pt plus 1fill
+  \gobble
+}
+
+% @quotation does normal linebreaking (hence we can't use \nonfillstart)
+% and narrows the margins.
+%
+\def\quotation{%
+  \begingroup\inENV %This group ends at the end of the @quotation body
+  {\parskip=0pt \aboveenvbreak}% because \aboveenvbreak inserts \parskip
+  \singlespace
+  \parindent=0pt
+  % We have retained a nonzero parskip for the environment, since we're
+  % doing normal filling. So to avoid extra space below the environment...
+  \def\Equotation{\parskip = 0pt \nonfillfinish}%
+  %
+  % @cartouche defines \nonarrowing to inhibit narrowing at next level down.
+  \ifx\nonarrowing\relax
+    \advance\leftskip by \lispnarrowing
+    \advance\rightskip by \lispnarrowing
+    \exdentamount = \lispnarrowing
+    \let\nonarrowing = \relax
+  \fi
+}
+
+
+\message{defuns,}
+% Define formatter for defuns
+% First, allow user to change definition object font (\df) internally
+\def\setdeffont #1 {\csname DEF#1\endcsname}
+
+\newskip\defbodyindent \defbodyindent=.4in
+\newskip\defargsindent \defargsindent=50pt
+\newskip\deftypemargin \deftypemargin=12pt
+\newskip\deflastargmargin \deflastargmargin=18pt
+
+\newcount\parencount
+% define \functionparens, which makes ( and ) and & do special things.
+% \functionparens affects the group it is contained in.
+\def\activeparens{%
+\catcode`\(=\active \catcode`\)=\active \catcode`\&=\active
+\catcode`\[=\active \catcode`\]=\active}
+
+% Make control sequences which act like normal parenthesis chars.
+\let\lparen = ( \let\rparen = )
+
+{\activeparens % Now, smart parens don't turn on until &foo (see \amprm)
+
+% Be sure that we always have a definition for `(', etc.  For example,
+% if the fn name has parens in it, \boldbrax will not be in effect yet,
+% so TeX would otherwise complain about undefined control sequence.
+\global\let(=\lparen \global\let)=\rparen
+\global\let[=\lbrack \global\let]=\rbrack
+
+\gdef\functionparens{\boldbrax\let&=\amprm\parencount=0 }
+\gdef\boldbrax{\let(=\opnr\let)=\clnr\let[=\lbrb\let]=\rbrb}
+% This is used to turn on special parens
+% but make & act ordinary (given that it's active).
+\gdef\boldbraxnoamp{\let(=\opnr\let)=\clnr\let[=\lbrb\let]=\rbrb\let&=\ampnr}
+
+% Definitions of (, ) and & used in args for functions.
+% This is the definition of ( outside of all parentheses.
+\gdef\oprm#1 {{\rm\char`\(}#1 \bf \let(=\opnested
+  \global\advance\parencount by 1
+}
+%
+% This is the definition of ( when already inside a level of parens.
+\gdef\opnested{\char`\(\global\advance\parencount by 1 }
+%
+\gdef\clrm{% Print a paren in roman if it is taking us back to depth of 0.
+  % also in that case restore the outer-level definition of (.
+  \ifnum \parencount=1 {\rm \char `\)}\sl \let(=\oprm \else \char `\) \fi
+  \global\advance \parencount by -1 }
+% If we encounter &foo, then turn on ()-hacking afterwards
+\gdef\amprm#1 {{\rm\&#1}\let(=\oprm \let)=\clrm\ }
+%
+\gdef\normalparens{\boldbrax\let&=\ampnr}
+} % End of definition inside \activeparens
+%% These parens (in \boldbrax) actually are a little bolder than the
+%% contained text.  This is especially needed for [ and ]
+\def\opnr{{\sf\char`\(}\global\advance\parencount by 1 }
+\def\clnr{{\sf\char`\)}\global\advance\parencount by -1 }
+\def\ampnr{\&}
+\def\lbrb{{\bf\char`\[}}
+\def\rbrb{{\bf\char`\]}}
+
+% First, defname, which formats the header line itself.
+% #1 should be the function name.
+% #2 should be the type of definition, such as "Function".
+
+\def\defname #1#2{%
+% Get the values of \leftskip and \rightskip as they were
+% outside the @def...
+\dimen2=\leftskip
+\advance\dimen2 by -\defbodyindent
+\noindent
+\setbox0=\hbox{\hskip \deflastargmargin{\rm #2}\hskip \deftypemargin}%
+\dimen0=\hsize \advance \dimen0 by -\wd0 % compute size for first line
+\dimen1=\hsize \advance \dimen1 by -\defargsindent %size for continuations
+\parshape 2 0in \dimen0 \defargsindent \dimen1
+% Now output arg 2 ("Function" or some such)
+% ending at \deftypemargin from the right margin,
+% but stuck inside a box of width 0 so it does not interfere with linebreaking
+{% Adjust \hsize to exclude the ambient margins,
+% so that \rightline will obey them.
+\advance \hsize by -\dimen2
+\rlap{\rightline{{\rm #2}\hskip -1.25pc }}}%
+% Make all lines underfull and no complaints:
+\tolerance=10000 \hbadness=10000
+\advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent
+\exdentamount=\defbodyindent
+{\df #1}\enskip        % Generate function name
+}
+
+% Actually process the body of a definition
+% #1 should be the terminating control sequence, such as \Edefun.
+% #2 should be the "another name" control sequence, such as \defunx.
+% #3 should be the control sequence that actually processes the header,
+%    such as \defunheader.
+
+\def\defparsebody #1#2#3{\begingroup\inENV% Environment for definitionbody
+\medbreak %
+% Define the end token that this defining construct specifies
+% so that it will exit this group.
+\def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}%
+\def#2{\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit#3}%
+\parindent=0in
+\advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
+\exdentamount=\defbodyindent
+\begingroup %
+\catcode 61=\active % 61 is `='
+\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit#3}
+
+% #1 is the \E... control sequence to end the definition (which we define).
+% #2 is the \...x control sequence for consecutive fns (which we define).
+% #3 is the control sequence to call to resume processing.
+% #4, delimited by the space, is the class name.
+% 
+\def\defmethparsebody#1#2#3#4 {\begingroup\inENV %
+\medbreak %
+% Define the end token that this defining construct specifies
+% so that it will exit this group.
+\def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}%
+\def#2##1 {\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{##1}}}%
+\parindent=0in
+\advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
+\exdentamount=\defbodyindent
+\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{#4}}}
+
+% @deftypemethod has an extra argument that nothing else does.  Sigh.
+% #1 is the \E... control sequence to end the definition (which we define).
+% #2 is the \...x control sequence for consecutive fns (which we define).
+% #3 is the control sequence to call to resume processing.
+% #4, delimited by the space, is the class name.
+% #5 is the method's return type.
+% 
+\def\deftypemethparsebody#1#2#3#4 #5 {\begingroup\inENV %
+\medbreak %
+% Define the end token that this defining construct specifies
+% so that it will exit this group.
+\def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}%
+\def#2##1 ##2 {\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{##1}{##2}}}%
+\parindent=0in
+\advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
+\exdentamount=\defbodyindent
+\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{#4}{#5}}}
+
+\def\defopparsebody #1#2#3#4#5 {\begingroup\inENV %
+\medbreak %
+% Define the end token that this defining construct specifies
+% so that it will exit this group.
+\def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}%
+\def#2##1 ##2 {\def#4{##1}%
+\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{##2}}}%
+\parindent=0in
+\advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
+\exdentamount=\defbodyindent
+\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{#5}}}
+
+% These parsing functions are similar to the preceding ones
+% except that they do not make parens into active characters.
+% These are used for "variables" since they have no arguments.
+
+\def\defvarparsebody #1#2#3{\begingroup\inENV% Environment for definitionbody
+\medbreak %
+% Define the end token that this defining construct specifies
+% so that it will exit this group.
+\def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}%
+\def#2{\begingroup\obeylines\spacesplit#3}%
+\parindent=0in
+\advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
+\exdentamount=\defbodyindent
+\begingroup %
+\catcode 61=\active %
+\obeylines\spacesplit#3}
+
+% This is used for \def{tp,vr}parsebody.  It could probably be used for
+% some of the others, too, with some judicious conditionals.
+%
+\def\parsebodycommon#1#2#3{%
+  \begingroup\inENV %
+  \medbreak %
+  % Define the end token that this defining construct specifies
+  % so that it will exit this group.
+  \def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}%
+  \def#2##1 {\begingroup\obeylines\spacesplit{#3{##1}}}%
+  \parindent=0in
+  \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
+  \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
+  \begingroup\obeylines
+}
+
+\def\defvrparsebody#1#2#3#4 {%
+  \parsebodycommon{#1}{#2}{#3}%
+  \spacesplit{#3{#4}}%
+}
+
+% This loses on `@deftp {Data Type} {struct termios}' -- it thinks the
+% type is just `struct', because we lose the braces in `{struct
+% termios}' when \spacesplit reads its undelimited argument.  Sigh.
+% \let\deftpparsebody=\defvrparsebody
+%
+% So, to get around this, we put \empty in with the type name.  That
+% way, TeX won't find exactly `{...}' as an undelimited argument, and
+% won't strip off the braces.
+%
+\def\deftpparsebody #1#2#3#4 {%
+  \parsebodycommon{#1}{#2}{#3}%
+  \spacesplit{\parsetpheaderline{#3{#4}}}\empty
+}
+
+% Fine, but then we have to eventually remove the \empty *and* the
+% braces (if any).  That's what this does.
+%
+\def\removeemptybraces\empty#1\relax{#1}
+
+% After \spacesplit has done its work, this is called -- #1 is the final
+% thing to call, #2 the type name (which starts with \empty), and #3
+% (which might be empty) the arguments.
+%
+\def\parsetpheaderline#1#2#3{%
+  #1{\removeemptybraces#2\relax}{#3}%
+}%
+
+\def\defopvarparsebody #1#2#3#4#5 {\begingroup\inENV %
+\medbreak %
+% Define the end token that this defining construct specifies
+% so that it will exit this group.
+\def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}%
+\def#2##1 ##2 {\def#4{##1}%
+\begingroup\obeylines\spacesplit{#3{##2}}}%
+\parindent=0in
+\advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
+\exdentamount=\defbodyindent
+\begingroup\obeylines\spacesplit{#3{#5}}}
+
+% Split up #2 at the first space token.
+% call #1 with two arguments:
+%  the first is all of #2 before the space token,
+%  the second is all of #2 after that space token.
+% If #2 contains no space token, all of it is passed as the first arg
+% and the second is passed as empty.
+
+{\obeylines
+\gdef\spacesplit#1#2^^M{\endgroup\spacesplitfoo{#1}#2 \relax\spacesplitfoo}%
+\long\gdef\spacesplitfoo#1#2 #3#4\spacesplitfoo{%
+\ifx\relax #3%
+#1{#2}{}\else #1{#2}{#3#4}\fi}}
+
+% So much for the things common to all kinds of definitions.
+
+% Define @defun.
+
+% First, define the processing that is wanted for arguments of \defun
+% Use this to expand the args and terminate the paragraph they make up
+
+\def\defunargs #1{\functionparens \sl
+% Expand, preventing hyphenation at `-' chars.
+% Note that groups don't affect changes in \hyphenchar.
+\hyphenchar\tensl=0
+#1%
+\hyphenchar\tensl=45
+\ifnum\parencount=0 \else \errmessage{Unbalanced parentheses in @def}\fi%
+\interlinepenalty=10000
+\advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fil
+\endgraf\nobreak\vskip -\parskip\nobreak
+}
+
+\def\deftypefunargs #1{%
+% Expand, preventing hyphenation at `-' chars.
+% Note that groups don't affect changes in \hyphenchar.
+% Use \boldbraxnoamp, not \functionparens, so that & is not special.
+\boldbraxnoamp
+\tclose{#1}% avoid \code because of side effects on active chars
+\interlinepenalty=10000
+\advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fil
+\endgraf\nobreak\vskip -\parskip\nobreak
+}
+
+% Do complete processing of one @defun or @defunx line already parsed.
+
+% @deffn Command forward-char nchars
+
+\def\deffn{\defmethparsebody\Edeffn\deffnx\deffnheader}
+
+\def\deffnheader #1#2#3{\doind {fn}{\code{#2}}%
+\begingroup\defname {#2}{#1}\defunargs{#3}\endgroup %
+\catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
+}
+
+% @defun == @deffn Function
+
+\def\defun{\defparsebody\Edefun\defunx\defunheader}
+
+\def\defunheader #1#2{\doind {fn}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in function index
+\begingroup\defname {#1}{Function}%
+\defunargs {#2}\endgroup %
+\catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
+}
+
+% @deftypefun int foobar (int @var{foo}, float @var{bar})
+
+\def\deftypefun{\defparsebody\Edeftypefun\deftypefunx\deftypefunheader}
+
+% #1 is the data type.  #2 is the name and args.
+\def\deftypefunheader #1#2{\deftypefunheaderx{#1}#2 \relax}
+% #1 is the data type, #2 the name, #3 the args.
+\def\deftypefunheaderx #1#2 #3\relax{%
+\doind {fn}{\code{#2}}% Make entry in function index
+\begingroup\defname {\defheaderxcond#1\relax$$$#2}{Function}%
+\deftypefunargs {#3}\endgroup %
+\catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
+}
+
+% @deftypefn {Library Function} int foobar (int @var{foo}, float @var{bar})
+
+\def\deftypefn{\defmethparsebody\Edeftypefn\deftypefnx\deftypefnheader}
+
+% \defheaderxcond#1\relax$$$
+% puts #1 in @code, followed by a space, but does nothing if #1 is null.
+\def\defheaderxcond#1#2$$${\ifx#1\relax\else\code{#1#2} \fi}
+
+% #1 is the classification.  #2 is the data type.  #3 is the name and args.
+\def\deftypefnheader #1#2#3{\deftypefnheaderx{#1}{#2}#3 \relax}
+% #1 is the classification, #2 the data type, #3 the name, #4 the args.
+\def\deftypefnheaderx #1#2#3 #4\relax{%
+\doind {fn}{\code{#3}}% Make entry in function index
+\begingroup
+\normalparens % notably, turn off `&' magic, which prevents
+%               at least some C++ text from working
+\defname {\defheaderxcond#2\relax$$$#3}{#1}%
+\deftypefunargs {#4}\endgroup %
+\catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
+}
+
+% @defmac == @deffn Macro
+
+\def\defmac{\defparsebody\Edefmac\defmacx\defmacheader}
+
+\def\defmacheader #1#2{\doind {fn}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in function index
+\begingroup\defname {#1}{Macro}%
+\defunargs {#2}\endgroup %
+\catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
+}
+
+% @defspec == @deffn Special Form
+
+\def\defspec{\defparsebody\Edefspec\defspecx\defspecheader}
+
+\def\defspecheader #1#2{\doind {fn}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in function index
+\begingroup\defname {#1}{Special Form}%
+\defunargs {#2}\endgroup %
+\catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
+}
+
+% This definition is run if you use @defunx
+% anywhere other than immediately after a @defun or @defunx.
+
+\def\deffnx #1 {\errmessage{@deffnx in invalid context}}
+\def\defunx #1 {\errmessage{@defunx in invalid context}}
+\def\defmacx #1 {\errmessage{@defmacx in invalid context}}
+\def\defspecx #1 {\errmessage{@defspecx in invalid context}}
+\def\deftypefnx #1 {\errmessage{@deftypefnx in invalid context}}
+\def\deftypemethodx #1 {\errmessage{@deftypemethodx in invalid context}}
+\def\deftypefunx #1 {\errmessage{@deftypefunx in invalid context}}
+
+% @defmethod, and so on
+
+% @defop CATEGORY CLASS OPERATION ARG...
+
+\def\defop #1 {\def\defoptype{#1}%
+\defopparsebody\Edefop\defopx\defopheader\defoptype}
+
+\def\defopheader #1#2#3{%
+\dosubind {fn}{\code{#2}}{\putwordon\ #1}% Make entry in function index
+\begingroup\defname {#2}{\defoptype{} on #1}%
+\defunargs {#3}\endgroup %
+}
+
+% @deftypemethod CLASS RETURN-TYPE METHOD ARG...
+%
+\def\deftypemethod{%
+  \deftypemethparsebody\Edeftypemethod\deftypemethodx\deftypemethodheader}
+%
+% #1 is the class name, #2 the data type, #3 the method name, #4 the args.
+\def\deftypemethodheader#1#2#3#4{%
+  \dosubind{fn}{\code{#3}}{\putwordon\ \code{#1}}% entry in function index
+  \begingroup
+    \defname{\defheaderxcond#2\relax$$$#3}{\putwordMethodon\ \code{#1}}%
+    \deftypefunargs{#4}%
+  \endgroup
+}
+
+% @defmethod == @defop Method
+%
+\def\defmethod{\defmethparsebody\Edefmethod\defmethodx\defmethodheader}
+%
+% #1 is the class name, #2 the method name, #3 the args.
+\def\defmethodheader#1#2#3{%
+  \dosubind{fn}{\code{#2}}{\putwordon\ \code{#1}}% entry in function index
+  \begingroup
+    \defname{#2}{\putwordMethodon\ \code{#1}}%
+    \defunargs{#3}%
+  \endgroup
+}
+
+% @defcv {Class Option} foo-class foo-flag
+
+\def\defcv #1 {\def\defcvtype{#1}%
+\defopvarparsebody\Edefcv\defcvx\defcvarheader\defcvtype}
+
+\def\defcvarheader #1#2#3{%
+\dosubind {vr}{\code{#2}}{of #1}% Make entry in var index
+\begingroup\defname {#2}{\defcvtype{} of #1}%
+\defvarargs {#3}\endgroup %
+}
+
+% @defivar == @defcv {Instance Variable}
+
+\def\defivar{\defvrparsebody\Edefivar\defivarx\defivarheader}
+
+\def\defivarheader #1#2#3{%
+\dosubind {vr}{\code{#2}}{of #1}% Make entry in var index
+\begingroup\defname {#2}{Instance Variable of #1}%
+\defvarargs {#3}\endgroup %
+}
+
+% These definitions are run if you use @defmethodx, etc.,
+% anywhere other than immediately after a @defmethod, etc.
+
+\def\defopx #1 {\errmessage{@defopx in invalid context}}
+\def\defmethodx #1 {\errmessage{@defmethodx in invalid context}}
+\def\defcvx #1 {\errmessage{@defcvx in invalid context}}
+\def\defivarx #1 {\errmessage{@defivarx in invalid context}}
+
+% Now @defvar
+
+% First, define the processing that is wanted for arguments of @defvar.
+% This is actually simple: just print them in roman.
+% This must expand the args and terminate the paragraph they make up
+\def\defvarargs #1{\normalparens #1%
+\interlinepenalty=10000
+\endgraf\nobreak\vskip -\parskip\nobreak}
+
+% @defvr Counter foo-count
+
+\def\defvr{\defvrparsebody\Edefvr\defvrx\defvrheader}
+
+\def\defvrheader #1#2#3{\doind {vr}{\code{#2}}%
+\begingroup\defname {#2}{#1}\defvarargs{#3}\endgroup}
+
+% @defvar == @defvr Variable
+
+\def\defvar{\defvarparsebody\Edefvar\defvarx\defvarheader}
+
+\def\defvarheader #1#2{\doind {vr}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in var index
+\begingroup\defname {#1}{Variable}%
+\defvarargs {#2}\endgroup %
+}
+
+% @defopt == @defvr {User Option}
+
+\def\defopt{\defvarparsebody\Edefopt\defoptx\defoptheader}
+
+\def\defoptheader #1#2{\doind {vr}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in var index
+\begingroup\defname {#1}{User Option}%
+\defvarargs {#2}\endgroup %
+}
+
+% @deftypevar int foobar
+
+\def\deftypevar{\defvarparsebody\Edeftypevar\deftypevarx\deftypevarheader}
+
+% #1 is the data type.  #2 is the name, perhaps followed by text that
+% is actually part of the data type, which should not be put into the index.
+\def\deftypevarheader #1#2{%
+\dovarind#2 \relax% Make entry in variables index
+\begingroup\defname {\defheaderxcond#1\relax$$$#2}{Variable}%
+\interlinepenalty=10000
+\endgraf\nobreak\vskip -\parskip\nobreak
+\endgroup}
+\def\dovarind#1 #2\relax{\doind{vr}{\code{#1}}}
+
+% @deftypevr {Global Flag} int enable
+
+\def\deftypevr{\defvrparsebody\Edeftypevr\deftypevrx\deftypevrheader}
+
+\def\deftypevrheader #1#2#3{\dovarind#3 \relax%
+\begingroup\defname {\defheaderxcond#2\relax$$$#3}{#1}
+\interlinepenalty=10000
+\endgraf\nobreak\vskip -\parskip\nobreak
+\endgroup}
+
+% This definition is run if you use @defvarx
+% anywhere other than immediately after a @defvar or @defvarx.
+
+\def\defvrx #1 {\errmessage{@defvrx in invalid context}}
+\def\defvarx #1 {\errmessage{@defvarx in invalid context}}
+\def\defoptx #1 {\errmessage{@defoptx in invalid context}}
+\def\deftypevarx #1 {\errmessage{@deftypevarx in invalid context}}
+\def\deftypevrx #1 {\errmessage{@deftypevrx in invalid context}}
+
+% Now define @deftp
+% Args are printed in bold, a slight difference from @defvar.
+
+\def\deftpargs #1{\bf \defvarargs{#1}}
+
+% @deftp Class window height width ...
+
+\def\deftp{\deftpparsebody\Edeftp\deftpx\deftpheader}
+
+\def\deftpheader #1#2#3{\doind {tp}{\code{#2}}%
+\begingroup\defname {#2}{#1}\deftpargs{#3}\endgroup}
+
+% This definition is run if you use @deftpx, etc
+% anywhere other than immediately after a @deftp, etc.
+
+\def\deftpx #1 {\errmessage{@deftpx in invalid context}}
+
+
+\message{macros,}
+% @macro.
+
+% To do this right we need a feature of e-TeX, \scantokens, 
+% which we arrange to emulate with a temporary file in ordinary TeX.
+\ifx\eTeXversion\undefined
+ \newwrite\macscribble
+ \def\scanmacro#1{%
+   \begingroup \newlinechar`\^^M
+   \immediate\openout\macscribble=\jobname.tmp
+   \immediate\write\macscribble{#1}%
+   \immediate\closeout\macscribble
+   \let\xeatspaces\eatspaces
+   \input \jobname.tmp
+   \endgroup
+}
+\else
+\def\scanmacro#1{%
+\begingroup \newlinechar`\^^M
+\let\xeatspaces\eatspaces\scantokens{#1}\endgroup}
+\fi
+
+\newcount\paramno   % Count of parameters
+\newtoks\macname    % Macro name
+\newif\ifrecursive  % Is it recursive?
+
+% Utility routines.
+% Thisdoes \let #1 = #2, except with \csnames.
+\def\cslet#1#2{%
+\expandafter\expandafter
+\expandafter\let
+\expandafter\expandafter
+\csname#1\endcsname
+\csname#2\endcsname}
+
+% Trim leading and trailing spaces off a string.
+% Concepts from aro-bend problem 15 (see CTAN).
+{\catcode`\@=11
+\gdef\eatspaces #1{\expandafter\trim@\expandafter{#1 }}
+\gdef\trim@ #1{\trim@@ @#1 @ #1 @ @@}
+\gdef\trim@@ #1@ #2@ #3@@{\trim@@@\empty #2 @}
+\def\unbrace#1{#1}
+\unbrace{\gdef\trim@@@ #1 } #2@{#1}
+}
+
+% Trim a single trailing ^^M off a string.
+{\catcode`\^^M=12\catcode`\Q=3%
+\gdef\eatcr #1{\eatcra #1Q^^MQ}%
+\gdef\eatcra#1^^MQ{\eatcrb#1Q}%
+\gdef\eatcrb#1Q#2Q{#1}%
+}
+
+% Macro bodies are absorbed as an argument in a context where
+% all characters are catcode 10, 11 or 12, except \ which is active
+% (as in normal texinfo). It is necessary to change the definition of \.
+
+% It's necessary to have hard CRs when the macro is executed. This is 
+% done by  making ^^M (\endlinechar) catcode 12 when reading the macro 
+% body, and then making it the \newlinechar in \scanmacro.
+
+\def\macrobodyctxt{%
+  \catcode`\~=12
+  \catcode`\^=12
+  \catcode`\_=12
+  \catcode`\|=12
+  \catcode`\<=12
+  \catcode`\>=12
+  \catcode`\+=12
+  \catcode`\{=12
+  \catcode`\}=12
+  \catcode`\@=12
+  \catcode`\^^M=12
+  \usembodybackslash}
+
+\def\macroargctxt{%
+  \catcode`\~=12
+  \catcode`\^=12
+  \catcode`\_=12
+  \catcode`\|=12
+  \catcode`\<=12
+  \catcode`\>=12
+  \catcode`\+=12
+  \catcode`\@=12
+  \catcode`\\=12}
+
+% \mbodybackslash is the definition of \ in @macro bodies.
+% It maps \foo\ => \csname macarg.foo\endcsname => #N 
+% where N is the macro parameter number.
+% We define \csname macarg.\endcsname to be \realbackslash, so
+% \\ in macro replacement text gets you a backslash.
+
+{\catcode`@=0 @catcode`@\=@active
+ @gdef@usembodybackslash{@let\=@mbodybackslash}
+ @gdef@mbodybackslash#1\{@csname macarg.#1@endcsname}
+}
+\expandafter\def\csname macarg.\endcsname{\realbackslash}
+
+\def\macro{\recursivefalse\parsearg\macroxxx}
+\def\rmacro{\recursivetrue\parsearg\macroxxx}
+
+\def\macroxxx#1{%
+  \getargs{#1}%           now \macname is the macname and \argl the arglist
+  \ifx\argl\empty       % no arguments
+     \paramno=0%
+  \else
+     \expandafter\parsemargdef \argl;% 
+  \fi
+  \expandafter\ifx \csname macsave.\the\macname\endcsname \relax
+     \cslet{macsave.\the\macname}{\the\macname}%
+  \else
+     \message{Warning: redefining \the\macname}%
+  \fi
+  \begingroup \macrobodyctxt
+  \ifrecursive \expandafter\parsermacbody
+  \else \expandafter\parsemacbody 
+  \fi}
+
+\def\unmacro{\parsearg\unmacroxxx}
+\def\unmacroxxx#1{%
+  \expandafter\ifx \csname macsave.\the\macname\endcsname \relax
+    \errmessage{Macro \the\macname\ not defined.}%
+  \else
+    \cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}%
+    \expandafter\let \csname macsave.\the\macname\endcsname \undefined
+  \fi
+}
+
+% This makes use of the obscure feature that if the last token of a
+% <parameter list> is #, then the preceding argument is delimited by
+% an opening brace, and that opening brace is not consumed.
+\def\getargs#1{\getargsxxx#1{}}
+\def\getargsxxx#1#{\getmacname #1 \relax\getmacargs}
+\def\getmacname #1 #2\relax{\macname={#1}}
+\def\getmacargs#1{\def\argl{#1}}
+
+% Parse the optional {params} list.  Set up \paramno and \paramlist
+% so \defmacro knows what to do.  Define \macarg.blah for each blah
+% in the params list, to be ##N where N is the position in that list.
+% That gets used by \mbodybackslash (above).
+
+% We need to get `macro parameter char #' into several definitions.
+% The technique used is stolen from LaTeX:  let \hash be something
+% unexpandable, insert that wherever you need a #, and then redefine
+% it to # just before using the token list produced.
+%
+% The same technique is used to protect \eatspaces till just before
+% the macro is used.
+
+\def\parsemargdef#1;{\paramno=0\def\paramlist{}%
+        \let\hash\relax\let\xeatspaces\relax\parsemargdefxxx#1,;,}
+\def\parsemargdefxxx#1,{%
+  \if#1;\let\next=\relax
+  \else \let\next=\parsemargdefxxx
+    \advance\paramno by 1%
+    \expandafter\edef\csname macarg.\eatspaces{#1}\endcsname
+        {\xeatspaces{\hash\the\paramno}}%
+    \edef\paramlist{\paramlist\hash\the\paramno,}%
+  \fi\next}
+
+% These two commands read recursive and nonrecursive macro bodies.
+% (They're different since rec and nonrec macros end differently.)
+
+\long\def\parsemacbody#1@end macro%
+{\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}%
+\long\def\parsermacbody#1@end rmacro%
+{\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}%
+
+% This defines the macro itself. There are six cases: recursive and
+% nonrecursive macros of zero, one, and many arguments.
+% Much magic with \expandafter here.
+% \xdef is used so that macro definitions will survive the file
+% they're defined in; @include reads the file inside a group.
+\def\defmacro{%
+  \let\hash=##% convert placeholders to macro parameter chars
+  \ifrecursive
+    \ifcase\paramno
+    % 0
+      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
+        \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}%
+    \or % 1
+      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
+         \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
+         \noexpand\braceorline\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname}%
+      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname##1{%
+         \egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}%
+    \else % many
+      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
+         \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
+         \noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname}
+      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{%
+          \csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}%
+      \expandafter\expandafter
+      \expandafter\xdef
+      \expandafter\expandafter
+        \csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname 
+          \paramlist{\egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}%
+    \fi
+  \else
+    \ifcase\paramno
+    % 0
+      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
+        \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}%
+        \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}%
+    \or % 1
+      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
+         \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
+         \noexpand\braceorline\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname}%
+      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname##1{%
+        \egroup
+        \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}%
+        \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}%
+    \else % many
+      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
+         \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
+         \noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname}
+      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{%
+          \csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}%
+      \expandafter\expandafter
+      \expandafter\xdef
+      \expandafter\expandafter
+      \csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname
+      \paramlist{%
+          \egroup
+          \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}%
+          \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}%
+    \fi
+  \fi}
+
+\def\norecurse#1{\bgroup\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}}
+
+% \braceorline decides whether the next nonwhitespace character is a
+% {.  If so it reads up to the closing }, if not, it reads the whole
+% line.  Whatever was read is then fed to the next control sequence
+% as an argument (by \parsebrace or \parsearg)
+\def\braceorline#1{\let\next=#1\futurelet\nchar\braceorlinexxx}
+\def\braceorlinexxx{%
+  \ifx\nchar\bgroup\else
+    \expandafter\parsearg 
+  \fi \next}
+
+
+\message{cross references,}
+\newwrite\auxfile
+
+\newif\ifhavexrefs    % True if xref values are known.
+\newif\ifwarnedxrefs  % True if we warned once that they aren't known.
+
+% @inforef is relatively simple.
+\def\inforef #1{\inforefzzz #1,,,,**}
+\def\inforefzzz #1,#2,#3,#4**{\putwordSee{} \putwordInfo{} \putwordfile{} \file{\ignorespaces #3{}},
+  node \samp{\ignorespaces#1{}}}
+
+% @node's job is to define \lastnode.
+\def\node{\ENVcheck\parsearg\nodezzz}
+\def\nodezzz#1{\nodexxx [#1,]}
+\def\nodexxx[#1,#2]{\gdef\lastnode{#1}}
+\let\nwnode=\node
+\let\lastnode=\relax
+
+% The sectioning commands (@chapter, etc.) call these.
+\def\donoderef{%
+  \ifx\lastnode\relax\else
+    \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\setref{\lastnode}%
+      {Ysectionnumberandtype}%
+    \global\let\lastnode=\relax
+  \fi
+}
+\def\unnumbnoderef{%
+  \ifx\lastnode\relax\else
+    \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\setref{\lastnode}{Ynothing}%
+    \global\let\lastnode=\relax
+  \fi
+}
+\def\appendixnoderef{%
+  \ifx\lastnode\relax\else
+    \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\setref{\lastnode}%
+      {Yappendixletterandtype}%
+    \global\let\lastnode=\relax
+  \fi
+}
+
+
+% @anchor{NAME} -- define xref target at arbitrary point.
+% 
+\def\anchor#1{\setref{#1}{Ynothing}}
+
+
+% \setref{NAME}{SNT} defines a cross-reference point NAME, namely
+% NAME-title, NAME-pg, and NAME-SNT.  Called from \foonoderef.  We have
+% to set \indexdummies so commands such as @code in a section title
+% aren't expanded.  It would be nicer not to expand the titles in the
+% first place, but there's so many layers that that is hard to do.
+% 
+\def\setref#1#2{{%
+  \indexdummies
+  \dosetq{#1-title}{Ytitle}%
+  \dosetq{#1-pg}{Ypagenumber}%
+  \dosetq{#1-snt}{#2}
+}}
+
+% @xref, @pxref, and @ref generate cross-references.  For \xrefX, #1 is
+% the node name, #2 the name of the Info cross-reference, #3 the printed
+% node name, #4 the name of the Info file, #5 the name of the printed
+% manual.  All but the node name can be omitted.
+%
+\def\pxref#1{\putwordsee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
+\def\xref#1{\putwordSee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
+\def\ref#1{\xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
+\def\xrefX[#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6]{\begingroup
+  \def\printedmanual{\ignorespaces #5}%
+  \def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #3}%
+  \setbox1=\hbox{\printedmanual}%
+  \setbox0=\hbox{\printednodename}%
+  \ifdim \wd0 = 0pt
+    % No printed node name was explicitly given.
+    \expandafter\ifx\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname\relax
+      % Use the node name inside the square brackets.
+      \def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #1}%
+    \else
+      % Use the actual chapter/section title appear inside
+      % the square brackets.  Use the real section title if we have it.
+      \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt
+        % It is in another manual, so we don't have it.
+        \def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #1}%
+      \else
+        \ifhavexrefs
+          % We know the real title if we have the xref values.
+          \def\printednodename{\refx{#1-title}{}}%
+        \else
+          % Otherwise just copy the Info node name.
+          \def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #1}%
+        \fi%
+      \fi
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  %
+  % If we use \unhbox0 and \unhbox1 to print the node names, TeX does not
+  % insert empty discretionaries after hyphens, which means that it will
+  % not find a line break at a hyphen in a node names.  Since some manuals
+  % are best written with fairly long node names, containing hyphens, this
+  % is a loss.  Therefore, we give the text of the node name again, so it
+  % is as if TeX is seeing it for the first time.
+  \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt
+    \putwordsection{} ``\printednodename'' in \cite{\printedmanual}%
+  \else
+    % _ (for example) has to be the character _ for the purposes of the
+    % control sequence corresponding to the node, but it has to expand
+    % into the usual \leavevmode...\vrule stuff for purposes of
+    % printing. So we \turnoffactive for the \refx-snt, back on for the
+    % printing, back off for the \refx-pg.
+    {\normalturnoffactive
+     % Only output a following space if the -snt ref is nonempty; for
+     % @unnumbered and @anchor, it won't be.
+     \setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces \refx{#1-snt}{}}%
+     \ifdim \wd2 > 0pt \refx{#1-snt}\space\fi
+    }%
+    % [mynode], 
+    [\printednodename],\space
+    % page 3
+    \turnoffactive \putwordpage\tie\refx{#1-pg}{}%
+  \fi
+\endgroup}
+
+% \dosetq is the interface for calls from other macros
+
+% Use \normalturnoffactive so that punctuation chars such as underscore
+% and backslash work in node names.  (\turnoffactive doesn't do \.)
+\def\dosetq#1#2{%
+  {\let\folio=0
+   \normalturnoffactive
+   \edef\next{\write\auxfile{\internalsetq{#1}{#2}}}%
+   \iflinks
+     \next
+   \fi
+  }%
+}
+
+% \internalsetq {foo}{page} expands into
+% CHARACTERS 'xrdef {foo}{...expansion of \Ypage...}
+% When the aux file is read, ' is the escape character
+
+\def\internalsetq #1#2{'xrdef {#1}{\csname #2\endcsname}}
+
+% Things to be expanded by \internalsetq
+
+\def\Ypagenumber{\folio}
+
+\def\Ytitle{\thissection}
+
+\def\Ynothing{}
+
+\def\Ysectionnumberandtype{%
+\ifnum\secno=0 \putwordChapter\xreftie\the\chapno %
+\else \ifnum \subsecno=0 \putwordSection\xreftie\the\chapno.\the\secno %
+\else \ifnum \subsubsecno=0 %
+\putwordSection\xreftie\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno %
+\else %
+\putwordSection\xreftie\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno %
+\fi \fi \fi }
+
+\def\Yappendixletterandtype{%
+\ifnum\secno=0 \putwordAppendix\xreftie'char\the\appendixno{}%
+\else \ifnum \subsecno=0 \putwordSection\xreftie'char\the\appendixno.\the\secno %
+\else \ifnum \subsubsecno=0 %
+\putwordSection\xreftie'char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno %
+\else %
+\putwordSection\xreftie'char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno %
+\fi \fi \fi }
+
+\gdef\xreftie{'tie}
+
+% Use TeX 3.0's \inputlineno to get the line number, for better error
+% messages, but if we're using an old version of TeX, don't do anything.
+%
+\ifx\inputlineno\thisisundefined
+  \let\linenumber = \empty % Non-3.0.
+\else
+  \def\linenumber{\the\inputlineno:\space}
+\fi
+
+% Define \refx{NAME}{SUFFIX} to reference a cross-reference string named NAME.
+% If its value is nonempty, SUFFIX is output afterward.
+
+\def\refx#1#2{%
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname X#1\endcsname\relax
+    % If not defined, say something at least.
+    \angleleft un\-de\-fined\angleright
+    \iflinks
+      \ifhavexrefs
+        \message{\linenumber Undefined cross reference `#1'.}%
+      \else
+        \ifwarnedxrefs\else
+          \global\warnedxrefstrue
+          \message{Cross reference values unknown; you must run TeX again.}%
+        \fi
+      \fi
+    \fi
+  \else
+    % It's defined, so just use it.
+    \csname X#1\endcsname
+  \fi
+  #2% Output the suffix in any case.
+}
+
+% This is the macro invoked by entries in the aux file.
+% 
+\def\xrdef#1{\begingroup
+  % Reenable \ as an escape while reading the second argument.
+  \catcode`\\ = 0
+  \afterassignment\endgroup
+  \expandafter\gdef\csname X#1\endcsname
+}
+
+% Read the last existing aux file, if any.  No error if none exists.
+\def\readauxfile{\begingroup
+  \catcode`\^^@=\other
+  \catcode`\^^A=\other
+  \catcode`\^^B=\other
+  \catcode`\^^C=\other
+  \catcode`\^^D=\other
+  \catcode`\^^E=\other
+  \catcode`\^^F=\other
+  \catcode`\^^G=\other
+  \catcode`\^^H=\other
+  \catcode`\^^K=\other
+  \catcode`\^^L=\other
+  \catcode`\^^N=\other
+  \catcode`\^^P=\other
+  \catcode`\^^Q=\other
+  \catcode`\^^R=\other
+  \catcode`\^^S=\other
+  \catcode`\^^T=\other
+  \catcode`\^^U=\other
+  \catcode`\^^V=\other
+  \catcode`\^^W=\other
+  \catcode`\^^X=\other
+  \catcode`\^^Z=\other
+  \catcode`\^^[=\other
+  \catcode`\^^\=\other
+  \catcode`\^^]=\other
+  \catcode`\^^^=\other
+  \catcode`\^^_=\other
+  \catcode`\@=\other
+  \catcode`\^=\other
+  % It was suggested to define this as 7, which would allow ^^e4 etc.
+  % in xref tags, i.e., node names.  But since ^^e4 notation isn't
+  % supported in the main text, it doesn't seem desirable.  Furthermore,
+  % that is not enough: for node names that actually contain a ^
+  % character, we would end up writing a line like this: 'xrdef {'hat
+  % b-title}{'hat b} and \xrdef does a \csname...\endcsname on the first
+  % argument, and \hat is not an expandable control sequence.  It could
+  % all be worked out, but why?  Either we support ^^ or we don't.
+  %
+  % The other change necessary for this was to define \auxhat:
+  % \def\auxhat{\def^{'hat }}% extra space so ok if followed by letter
+  % and then to call \auxhat in \setq.
+  %
+  \catcode`\~=\other
+  \catcode`\[=\other
+  \catcode`\]=\other
+  \catcode`\"=\other
+  \catcode`\_=\other
+  \catcode`\|=\other
+  \catcode`\<=\other
+  \catcode`\>=\other
+  \catcode`\$=\other
+  \catcode`\#=\other
+  \catcode`\&=\other
+  \catcode`+=\other % avoid \+ for paranoia even though we've turned it off
+  % Make the characters 128-255 be printing characters
+  {%
+    \count 1=128
+    \def\loop{%
+      \catcode\count 1=\other
+      \advance\count 1 by 1
+      \ifnum \count 1<256 \loop \fi
+    }%
+  }%
+  % The aux file uses ' as the escape (for now).
+  % Turn off \ as an escape so we do not lose on
+  % entries which were dumped with control sequences in their names.
+  % For example, 'xrdef {$\leq $-fun}{page ...} made by @defun ^^
+  % Reference to such entries still does not work the way one would wish,
+  % but at least they do not bomb out when the aux file is read in.
+  \catcode`\{=1
+  \catcode`\}=2
+  \catcode`\%=\other
+  \catcode`\'=0
+  \catcode`\\=\other
+  %
+  \openin 1 \jobname.aux
+  \ifeof 1 \else
+    \closein 1
+    \input \jobname.aux
+    \global\havexrefstrue
+    \global\warnedobstrue
+  \fi
+  % Open the new aux file.  TeX will close it automatically at exit.
+  \openout\auxfile=\jobname.aux
+\endgroup}
+
+
+% Footnotes.
+
+\newcount \footnoteno
+
+% The trailing space in the following definition for supereject is
+% vital for proper filling; pages come out unaligned when you do a
+% pagealignmacro call if that space before the closing brace is
+% removed. (Generally, numeric constants should always be followed by a
+% space to prevent strange expansion errors.)
+\def\supereject{\par\penalty -20000\footnoteno =0 }
+
+% @footnotestyle is meaningful for info output only.
+\let\footnotestyle=\comment
+
+\let\ptexfootnote=\footnote
+
+{\catcode `\@=11
+%
+% Auto-number footnotes.  Otherwise like plain.
+\gdef\footnote{%
+  \global\advance\footnoteno by \@ne
+  \edef\thisfootno{$^{\the\footnoteno}$}%
+  %
+  % In case the footnote comes at the end of a sentence, preserve the
+  % extra spacing after we do the footnote number.
+  \let\@sf\empty
+  \ifhmode\edef\@sf{\spacefactor\the\spacefactor}\/\fi
+  %
+  % Remove inadvertent blank space before typesetting the footnote number.
+  \unskip
+  \thisfootno\@sf
+  \footnotezzz
+}%
+
+% Don't bother with the trickery in plain.tex to not require the
+% footnote text as a parameter.  Our footnotes don't need to be so general.
+%
+% Oh yes, they do; otherwise, @ifset and anything else that uses
+% \parseargline fail inside footnotes because the tokens are fixed when
+% the footnote is read.  --karl, 16nov96.
+%
+\long\gdef\footnotezzz{\insert\footins\bgroup
+  % We want to typeset this text as a normal paragraph, even if the
+  % footnote reference occurs in (for example) a display environment.
+  % So reset some parameters.
+  \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty
+  \splittopskip\ht\strutbox % top baseline for broken footnotes
+  \splitmaxdepth\dp\strutbox
+  \floatingpenalty\@MM
+  \leftskip\z@skip
+  \rightskip\z@skip
+  \spaceskip\z@skip
+  \xspaceskip\z@skip
+  \parindent\defaultparindent
+  %
+  % Hang the footnote text off the number.
+  \hang
+  \textindent{\thisfootno}%
+  %
+  % Don't crash into the line above the footnote text.  Since this
+  % expands into a box, it must come within the paragraph, lest it
+  % provide a place where TeX can split the footnote.
+  \footstrut
+  \futurelet\next\fo@t
+}
+\def\fo@t{\ifcat\bgroup\noexpand\next \let\next\f@@t
+  \else\let\next\f@t\fi \next}
+\def\f@@t{\bgroup\aftergroup\@foot\let\next}
+\def\f@t#1{#1\@foot}
+\def\@foot{\strut\egroup}
+
+}%end \catcode `\@=11
+
+% Set the baselineskip to #1, and the lineskip and strut size
+% correspondingly.  There is no deep meaning behind these magic numbers
+% used as factors; they just match (closely enough) what Knuth defined.
+%
+\def\lineskipfactor{.08333}
+\def\strutheightpercent{.70833}
+\def\strutdepthpercent {.29167}
+%
+\def\setleading#1{%
+  \normalbaselineskip = #1\relax
+  \normallineskip = \lineskipfactor\normalbaselineskip
+  \normalbaselines
+  \setbox\strutbox =\hbox{%
+    \vrule width0pt height\strutheightpercent\baselineskip
+                    depth \strutdepthpercent \baselineskip
+  }%
+}
+
+% @| inserts a changebar to the left of the current line.  It should
+% surround any changed text.  This approach does *not* work if the
+% change spans more than two lines of output.  To handle that, we would
+% have adopt a much more difficult approach (putting marks into the main
+% vertical list for the beginning and end of each change).
+%
+\def\|{%
+  % \vadjust can only be used in horizontal mode.
+  \leavevmode
+  %
+  % Append this vertical mode material after the current line in the output.
+  \vadjust{%
+    % We want to insert a rule with the height and depth of the current
+    % leading; that is exactly what \strutbox is supposed to record.
+    \vskip-\baselineskip
+    %
+    % \vadjust-items are inserted at the left edge of the type.  So
+    % the \llap here moves out into the left-hand margin.
+    \llap{%
+      %
+      % For a thicker or thinner bar, change the `1pt'.
+      \vrule height\baselineskip width1pt
+      %
+      % This is the space between the bar and the text.
+      \hskip 12pt
+    }%
+  }%
+}
+
+% For a final copy, take out the rectangles
+% that mark overfull boxes (in case you have decided
+% that the text looks ok even though it passes the margin).
+%
+\def\finalout{\overfullrule=0pt}
+
+% @image.  We use the macros from epsf.tex to support this.
+% If epsf.tex is not installed and @image is used, we complain.
+% 
+% Check for and read epsf.tex up front.  If we read it only at @image
+% time, we might be inside a group, and then its definitions would get
+% undone and the next image would fail.
+\openin 1 = epsf.tex
+\ifeof 1 \else
+  \closein 1
+  % Do not bother showing banner with post-v2.7 epsf.tex (available in
+  % doc/epsf.tex until it shows up on ctan).
+  \def\epsfannounce{\toks0 = }%
+  \input epsf.tex
+\fi
+%
+\newif\ifwarnednoepsf
+\newhelp\noepsfhelp{epsf.tex must be installed for images to
+  work.  It is also included in the Texinfo distribution, or you can get
+  it from ftp://ftp.tug.org/tex/epsf.tex.}
+%
+% Only complain once about lack of epsf.tex.
+\def\image#1{%
+  \ifx\epsfbox\undefined
+    \ifwarnednoepsf \else
+      \errhelp = \noepsfhelp
+      \errmessage{epsf.tex not found, images will be ignored}%
+      \global\warnednoepsftrue
+    \fi
+  \else
+    \imagexxx #1,,,\finish
+  \fi
+}
+%
+% Arguments to @image:
+% #1 is (mandatory) image filename; we tack on .eps extension.
+% #2 is (optional) width, #3 is (optional) height.
+% #4 is just the usual extra ignored arg for parsing this stuff.
+\def\imagexxx#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{%
+  % \epsfbox itself resets \epsf?size at each figure.
+  \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfxsize=#2\relax \fi
+  \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfysize=#3\relax \fi
+  % If the image is by itself, center it.
+  \ifvmode
+    \nobreak\medskip
+    \nobreak
+    \centerline{\epsfbox{#1.eps}}%
+    \bigbreak
+  \else
+    \epsfbox{#1.eps}%
+  \fi
+}
+
+
+\message{paper sizes,}
+% And other related parameters.
+
+\newdimen\defaultparindent \defaultparindent = 15pt
+
+\chapheadingskip = 15pt plus 4pt minus 2pt
+\secheadingskip = 12pt plus 3pt minus 2pt
+\subsecheadingskip = 9pt plus 2pt minus 2pt
+
+% Prevent underfull vbox error messages.
+\vbadness = 10000
+
+% Don't be so finicky about underfull hboxes, either.
+\hbadness = 2000
+
+% Following George Bush, just get rid of widows and orphans.
+\widowpenalty=10000
+\clubpenalty=10000
+
+% Use TeX 3.0's \emergencystretch to help line breaking, but if we're
+% using an old version of TeX, don't do anything.  We want the amount of
+% stretch added to depend on the line length, hence the dependence on
+% \hsize.  This makes it come to about 9pt for the 8.5x11 format.  We
+% call this whenever the paper size is set.
+%
+\def\setemergencystretch{%
+  \ifx\emergencystretch\thisisundefined
+    % Allow us to assign to \emergencystretch anyway.
+    \def\emergencystretch{\dimen0}%
+  \else
+    \emergencystretch = \hsize
+    \divide\emergencystretch by 45
+  \fi
+}
+
+% Parameters in order: 1) textheight; 2) textwidth; 3) voffset;
+% 4) hoffset; 5) binding offset; 6) topskip.  Then whoever calls us can
+% set \parskip and call \setleading for \baselineskip.
+%
+\def\internalpagesizes#1#2#3#4#5#6{%
+  \voffset = #3\relax
+  \topskip = #6\relax
+  \splittopskip = \topskip
+  %
+  \vsize = #1\relax
+  \advance\vsize by \topskip
+  \outervsize = \vsize
+  \advance\outervsize by 0.6in
+  \pageheight = \vsize
+  %
+  \hsize = #2\relax
+  \outerhsize = \hsize
+  \advance\outerhsize by 0.5in
+  \pagewidth = \hsize
+  %
+  \normaloffset = #4\relax
+  \bindingoffset = #5\relax
+  %
+  \parindent = \defaultparindent
+  \setemergencystretch
+}
+
+% @letterpaper (the default).
+\def\letterpaper{{\globaldefs = 1
+  \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
+  \setleading{13.2pt}%
+  %
+  % If page is nothing but text, make it come out even.
+  \internalpagesizes{46\baselineskip}{6in}{\voffset}{.25in}{\bindingoffset}{36pt}%
+}}
+
+% Use @smallbook to reset parameters for 7x9.5 (or so) format.
+\def\smallbook{{\globaldefs = 1
+  \parskip = 2pt plus 1pt
+  \setleading{12pt}%
+  %
+  \internalpagesizes{7.5in}{5.in}{\voffset}{.25in}{\bindingoffset}{16pt}%
+  %
+  \lispnarrowing = 0.3in
+  \tolerance = 700
+  \hfuzz = 1pt
+  \contentsrightmargin = 0pt
+  \deftypemargin = 0pt
+  \defbodyindent = .5cm
+  %
+  \let\smalldisplay = \smalldisplayx
+  \let\smallexample = \smalllispx
+  \let\smallformat = \smallformatx
+  \let\smalllisp = \smalllispx
+}}
+
+% Use @afourpaper to print on European A4 paper.
+\def\afourpaper{{\globaldefs = 1
+  \setleading{12pt}%
+  \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
+  %
+  \internalpagesizes{53\baselineskip}{160mm}{\voffset}{4mm}{\bindingoffset}{44pt}%
+  %
+  \tolerance = 700
+  \hfuzz = 1pt
+}}
+
+% A specific text layout, 24x15cm overall, intended for A4 paper.  Top margin
+% 29mm, hence bottom margin 28mm, nominal side margin 3cm.
+\def\afourlatex{{\globaldefs = 1
+  \setleading{13.6pt}%
+  %
+  \afourpaper
+  \internalpagesizes{237mm}{150mm}{3.6mm}{3.6mm}{3mm}{7mm}%
+  %
+  \globaldefs = 0
+}}
+
+% Use @afourwide to print on European A4 paper in wide format.
+\def\afourwide{%
+  \afourpaper
+  \internalpagesizes{9.5in}{6.5in}{\hoffset}{\normaloffset}{\bindingoffset}{7mm}%
+  %
+  \globaldefs = 0
+}
+
+% @pagesizes TEXTHEIGHT[,TEXTWIDTH]
+% Perhaps we should allow setting the margins, \topskip, \parskip,
+% and/or leading, also. Or perhaps we should compute them somehow.
+% 
+\def\pagesizes{\parsearg\pagesizesxxx}
+\def\pagesizesxxx#1{\pagesizesyyy #1,,\finish}
+\def\pagesizesyyy#1,#2,#3\finish{{%
+  \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \hsize=#2\relax \fi
+  \globaldefs = 1
+  %
+  \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
+  \setleading{13.2pt}%
+  %
+  \internalpagesizes{#1}{\hsize}{\voffset}{\normaloffset}{\bindingoffset}{44pt}%
+}}
+
+% Set default to letter.
+% 
+\letterpaper
+
+\message{and turning on texinfo input format.}
+
+% Define macros to output various characters with catcode for normal text.
+\catcode`\"=\other
+\catcode`\~=\other
+\catcode`\^=\other
+\catcode`\_=\other
+\catcode`\|=\other
+\catcode`\<=\other
+\catcode`\>=\other
+\catcode`\+=\other
+\def\normaldoublequote{"}
+\def\normaltilde{~}
+\def\normalcaret{^}
+\def\normalunderscore{_}
+\def\normalverticalbar{|}
+\def\normalless{<}
+\def\normalgreater{>}
+\def\normalplus{+}
+
+% This macro is used to make a character print one way in ttfont
+% where it can probably just be output, and another way in other fonts,
+% where something hairier probably needs to be done.
+%
+% #1 is what to print if we are indeed using \tt; #2 is what to print
+% otherwise.  Since all the Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero
+% interword stretch (and shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all
+% typewriter fonts to have this, we can check that font parameter.
+%
+\def\ifusingtt#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen3\the\font=0pt #1\else #2\fi}
+
+% Turn off all special characters except @
+% (and those which the user can use as if they were ordinary).
+% Most of these we simply print from the \tt font, but for some, we can
+% use math or other variants that look better in normal text.
+
+\catcode`\"=\active
+\def\activedoublequote{{\tt\char34}}
+\let"=\activedoublequote
+\catcode`\~=\active
+\def~{{\tt\char126}}
+\chardef\hat=`\^
+\catcode`\^=\active
+\def^{{\tt \hat}}
+
+\catcode`\_=\active
+\def_{\ifusingtt\normalunderscore\_}
+% Subroutine for the previous macro.
+\def\_{\leavevmode \kern.06em \vbox{\hrule width.3em height.1ex}}
+
+\catcode`\|=\active
+\def|{{\tt\char124}}
+\chardef \less=`\<
+\catcode`\<=\active
+\def<{{\tt \less}}
+\chardef \gtr=`\>
+\catcode`\>=\active
+\def>{{\tt \gtr}}
+\catcode`\+=\active
+\def+{{\tt \char 43}}
+%\catcode 27=\active
+%\def^^[{$\diamondsuit$}
+
+% Set up an active definition for =, but don't enable it most of the time.
+{\catcode`\==\active
+\global\def={{\tt \char 61}}}
+
+\catcode`+=\active
+\catcode`\_=\active
+
+% If a .fmt file is being used, characters that might appear in a file
+% name cannot be active until we have parsed the command line.
+% So turn them off again, and have \everyjob (or @setfilename) turn them on.
+% \otherifyactive is called near the end of this file.
+\def\otherifyactive{\catcode`+=\other \catcode`\_=\other}
+
+\catcode`\@=0
+
+% \rawbackslashxx output one backslash character in current font
+\global\chardef\rawbackslashxx=`\\
+%{\catcode`\\=\other
+%@gdef@rawbackslashxx{\}}
+
+% \rawbackslash redefines \ as input to do \rawbackslashxx.
+{\catcode`\\=\active
+@gdef@rawbackslash{@let\=@rawbackslashxx }}
+
+% \normalbackslash outputs one backslash in fixed width font.
+\def\normalbackslash{{\tt\rawbackslashxx}}
+
+% Say @foo, not \foo, in error messages.
+\escapechar=`\@
+
+% \catcode 17=0   % Define control-q
+\catcode`\\=\active
+
+% Used sometimes to turn off (effectively) the active characters
+% even after parsing them.
+@def@turnoffactive{@let"=@normaldoublequote
+@let\=@realbackslash
+@let~=@normaltilde
+@let^=@normalcaret
+@let_=@normalunderscore
+@let|=@normalverticalbar
+@let<=@normalless
+@let>=@normalgreater
+@let+=@normalplus}
+
+@def@normalturnoffactive{@let"=@normaldoublequote
+@let\=@normalbackslash
+@let~=@normaltilde
+@let^=@normalcaret
+@let_=@normalunderscore
+@let|=@normalverticalbar
+@let<=@normalless
+@let>=@normalgreater
+@let+=@normalplus}
+
+% Make _ and + \other characters, temporarily.
+% This is canceled by @fixbackslash.
+@otherifyactive
+
+% If a .fmt file is being used, we don't want the `\input texinfo' to show up.
+% That is what \eatinput is for; after that, the `\' should revert to printing
+% a backslash.
+%
+@gdef@eatinput input texinfo{@fixbackslash}
+@global@let\ = @eatinput
+
+% On the other hand, perhaps the file did not have a `\input texinfo'. Then
+% the first `\{ in the file would cause an error. This macro tries to fix
+% that, assuming it is called before the first `\' could plausibly occur.
+% Also back turn on active characters that might appear in the input
+% file name, in case not using a pre-dumped format.
+%
+@gdef@fixbackslash{@ifx\@eatinput @let\ = @normalbackslash @fi
+  @catcode`+=@active @catcode`@_=@active}
+
+% These look ok in all fonts, so just make them not special.  The @rm below
+% makes sure that the current font starts out as the newly loaded cmr10
+@catcode`@$=@other @catcode`@%=@other @catcode`@&=@other @catcode`@#=@other
+
+@textfonts
+@rm
+
+@c Local variables:
+@c eval: (add-hook 'write-file-hooks 'time-stamp)
+@c page-delimiter: "^\\\\message"
+@c time-stamp-start: "def\\\\texinfoversion{"
+@c time-stamp-format: "%:y-%02m-%02d"
+@c time-stamp-end: "}"
+@c End:
diff --git a/texinice.tex b/texinice.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..8e7be39c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/texinice.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,122 @@
+@tex % -*-tex-*-
+%
+% $Id: texinice.tex,v 1.1 1999/05/05 19:23:47 mdw Exp $
+%
+% Make Texinfo printed output look nice
+%
+% (c) 1998 Mark Wooding
+%
+
+%----- Licensing notice -----------------------------------------------------
+%
+% This file is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
+% it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
+% the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
+% (at your option) any later version.
+% 
+% This file is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+% but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+% MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the
+% GNU General Public License for more details.
+% 
+% You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+% along with this file; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation,
+% Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.
+
+%----- Revision history -----------------------------------------------------
+%
+% $Log: texinice.tex,v $
+% Revision 1.1  1999/05/05 19:23:47  mdw
+% Initial revision
+%
+
+\global\parskip = 10pt
+\global\parindent = 0pt
+\global\defaultparindent = 0pt
+
+\global\smallskipamount = 6pt
+
+\gdef\afourpaper{
+  \global\tolerance=700
+  \global\hfuzz=1pt
+  \setleading{12pt}
+  \global\topskip = 36pt
+  %%% NO!!! \global\parskip 15pt plus 1pt
+
+  \global\vsize= 53\baselineskip
+  \global\advance\vsize by \topskip
+  \global\hsize=   5.85in     % A4 wide 10pt
+  %\global\hsize=  6.5in
+  \global\outerhsize=\hsize
+  \global\advance\outerhsize by 0.5in
+  \global\outervsize=\vsize
+  \global\advance\outervsize by 0.6in
+
+  \global\pagewidth=\hsize
+  \global\pageheight=\vsize
+}
+
+\global\contentsrightmargin = 0pt
+
+\global\font\textrm = pplr7t at 10pt
+\global\font\texttt = pcrr7tn at 10pt
+\global\font\textbf = pplb7t at 10pt
+\global\font\textit = pplri7t at 10pt
+%\global\font\textsl = pplro7t at 10pt
+\global\let\textsl = \textit
+\global\font\textsc = pplrc7t at 10pt
+\global\font\textsf = phvr7t at 10pt
+\global\font\textttsl = pcrro7t at 10pt
+
+\global\let\defbf = \textbf
+\global\let\deftt = \texttt
+
+\global\font\ninett = pcrr7tn at 9pt
+\global\font\indrm = pplr7t at 9pt
+\global\font\intit = pplri7t at 9pt
+%\global\font\indsl = pplro7t at 9pt
+\global\let\indsl = \indit
+\global\let\indtt = \ninett
+\global\let\indttsl = \ninett
+\global\let\indsf = \indrm
+\global\let\indbf = \indrm
+\global\font\indsc = pplrc7t at 9pt
+
+\global\font\chaprm = phvb7t at 14.4pt
+\global\font\chapsl = phvbo7t at 14.4pt
+\global\let\chapit = \chapsl
+\global\font\chaptt = pcrb7t at 14.4pt
+\global\font\chapttsl = pcrbo7t at 14.4pt
+\global\let\chapsf = \chaprm
+\global\font\chapsc = phvbc7t at 14.4pt
+\global\let\chapbf = \chaprm
+
+\global\font\secrm = phvb7t at 12pt
+\global\font\secsl = phvbo7t at 12pt
+\global\let\secit = \secsl
+\global\font\sectt = pcrb7t at 12pt
+\global\font\secttsl = pcrbo7t at 12pt
+\global\let\secsf = \secrm
+\global\font\secsc = phvbc7t at 12pt
+\global\let\secbf = \secrm
+
+\global\font\ssecrm = phvb7t at 10pt
+\global\font\ssecsl = phvbo7t at 10pt
+\global\let\ssecit = \ssecsl
+\global\font\ssectt = pcrb7t at 10pt
+\global\font\ssecttsl = pcrbo7t at 10pt
+\global\let\ssecsf = \ssecrm
+\global\font\ssecsc = phvbc7t at 10pt
+\global\let\ssecbf = \ssecrm
+
+\global\font\titlerm = phvb7t at 20pt
+\global\let\authorrm = \secrm
+
+% \gdef\var#1{\leavevmode\hbox{$\langle$\textit#1\/$\rangle$}}
+
+%----- That's all, folks ----------------------------------------------------
+
+@end tex
+@textfonts
+@textrm
+@raggedbottom
diff --git a/txtlib.in b/txtlib.in
new file mode 100755
index 00000000..e8fb938f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/txtlib.in
@@ -0,0 +1,130 @@
+#! /bin/sh
+
+# -*-sh-*-
+#
+# $Id: txtlib.in,v 1.1 1999/05/05 19:23:47 mdw Exp $
+#
+# Manipulate simple libraries of text chunks
+#
+# (c) 1997 Mark Wooding
+#
+
+#----- Licensing notice -----------------------------------------------------
+#
+# This file is part of the Common Files Distribution (`common').
+#
+# `Common' is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
+# it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
+# the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
+# (at your option) any later version.
+#
+# `Common' is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+# but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+# MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the
+# GNU General Public License for more details.
+#
+# You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+# along with `common'; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation,
+# Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.
+
+#----- Revision history -----------------------------------------------------
+#
+# $Log: txtlib.in,v $
+# Revision 1.1  1999/05/05 19:23:47  mdw
+# Initial revision
+#
+
+# --- Handle command line arguments ---
+
+files=""
+mode=x
+out=""
+
+# --- Parse command line arguments ---
+
+while [ $# -gt 0 ]; do
+  case $1 in
+    -h | --h | --he | --hel | --help)
+      cat <<EOF
+Usage: txtlib [-lx] [-o FILE] [LIBRARY...]
+
+In \`extract' mode (-x, default), extracts chunks named on standard input
+from the list of libraries, and writes the result to standard output.
+
+In \`list' mode (-l), lists the chunks defined in the text libraries given.
+
+Options:
+
+-h, --help		Print this help text.
+-v, --version		Print the program's version number.
+-l, --list		List chunks defined in text libraries.
+-x, --extract		Extract chunks from text libraries (default).
+-o, --output=FILE	Extract chunks to FILE, not standard output.
+EOF
+      exit 0
+      ;;
+    -v | --v | --ve | --ver | --vers | --versi | --versio | --version)
+      version=`echo '$Revision: 1.1 $' |
+	sed -n -e 's;^.*: \([0-9.]*\)\\$;\1;p'`
+      echo "txtlib $version; Common Files Distribution version @VERSION@"
+      exit 0
+      ;;
+    -o | --o | --ou | --out | --outp | --outpu | --output)
+      out="$2";
+      shift
+      ;;
+    -o*)
+      out=`echo $1 | sed -e 's/^-[a-z]//'`
+      ;;
+    --o=* | --ou=* | --out=* | --outp=* | --outpu=* | --output=*)
+      out=`echo $1 | sed -e 's/^--[a-z]*=//'`
+      ;;
+    -l | --l | --li | --lis | --list)
+      mode=l
+      ;;
+    -x | --e | --ex | --ext | --extr | --extra | --extrac | --extract)
+      mode=x
+      ;;
+    --)
+      shift
+      break
+      ;;
+    -)
+      break
+      ;;
+    -*)
+      echo "txtlib: unknown option \`$1'" >&2
+      exit 1
+      ;;
+    *)
+      break
+      ;;
+  esac
+  shift
+done
+
+test "$out" = "-" && out=""
+
+# --- Build a `sed' script ---
+
+case $mode in
+  l)
+    sed -n -e "/^.*\*@-\([-a-zA-Z0-9_]*\)-@\*.*$/ s//\1/p" "$@"
+    ;;
+  x)
+    t=/tmp/txtlib.$$
+    if mkdir -m 700 $t; then :
+    else
+      echo >&2 "txtlib: could not create temporary directory"
+      exit 1
+    fi
+    sedfile=/$t/sed
+    while read LINE; do
+      echo "/\*@-$LINE-@\*/,/\*@-#-@\*/ p"
+    done >$sedfile
+    test -z "$out" || exec >$out
+    sed -e '/\*@-[-a-zA-Z0-9_]*-@\*/ i\
+    *@-#-@*' "$@" | sed -n -f $sedfile | sed -e '/\*@-#-@\*/ d'
+    rm -rf $t
+    ;;
+esac
diff --git a/ylwrap b/ylwrap
new file mode 100755
index 00000000..fbae17bd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/ylwrap
@@ -0,0 +1,101 @@
+#! /bin/sh
+# ylwrap - wrapper for lex/yacc invocations.
+# Copyright (C) 1996, 1997 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+# Written by Tom Tromey <tromey@cygnus.com>.
+#
+# This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
+# it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
+# the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option)
+# any later version.
+#
+# This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+# but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+# MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the
+# GNU General Public License for more details.
+#
+# You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+# along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
+# Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.
+
+# Usage:
+#     ylwrap PROGRAM INPUT [OUTPUT DESIRED]... -- [ARGS]...
+# * PROGRAM is program to run.
+# * INPUT is the input file
+# * OUTPUT is file PROG generates
+# * DESIRED is file we actually want
+# * ARGS are passed to PROG
+# Any number of OUTPUT,DESIRED pairs may be used.
+
+# The program to run.
+prog="$1"
+shift
+
+# The input.
+input="$1"
+shift
+case "$input" in
+ /*)
+    # Absolute path; do nothing.
+    ;;
+ *)
+    # Relative path.  Make it absolute.  Why?  Because otherwise any
+    # debugging info in the generated file will point to the wrong
+    # place.  This is really gross.
+    input="`pwd`/$input"
+    ;;
+esac
+
+pairlist=
+while test "$#" -ne 0; do
+   if test "$1" = "--"; then
+      break
+   fi
+   pairlist="$pairlist $1"
+   shift
+done
+
+# FIXME: add hostname here for parallel makes that run commands on
+# other machines.  But that might take us over the 14-char limit.
+dirname=ylwrap$$
+trap "cd `pwd`; rm -rf $dirname > /dev/null 2>&1" 1 2 3 15
+mkdir $dirname || exit 1
+
+cd $dirname
+$prog ${1+"$@"} "$input"
+status=$?
+
+if test $status -eq 0; then
+   set X $pairlist
+   shift
+   first=yes
+   while test "$#" -ne 0; do
+      if test -f "$1"; then
+         # If $2 is an absolute path name, then just use that,
+         # otherwise prepend `../'.
+         case "$2" in
+	   /*) target="$2";;
+	   *) target="../$2";;
+	 esac
+	 mv "$1" "$target" || status=$?
+      else
+	 # A missing file is only an error for the first file.  This
+	 # is a blatant hack to let us support using "yacc -d".  If -d
+	 # is not specified, we don't want an error when the header
+	 # file is "missing".
+	 if test $first = yes; then
+	    status=1
+	 fi
+      fi
+      shift
+      shift
+      first=no
+   done
+else
+   status=$?
+fi
+
+# Remove the directory.
+cd ..
+rm -rf $dirname
+
+exit $status
-- 
2.11.0

